01 LiftEquip General-Catalogue en

Components and Systems
Best Quality - Made in Germany
LiftEquip
Training
Center
More than you expect ...

The details quoted in this Product Information can
only be viewed as binding when confirmed expressly
in writing. Reproduction, reprint and storage only with
authorisation of the editor.
2 Issue 09/2015
Table of Contents
Page
Preface and Company Presentation 4
Inquiry Sheet , for Components and Systems 16
LEKalk, the tool for drive design and component selection 17
Homepage LiftEquip, Your information platform for components and systems 20
LiftEquip, Customer and training centre 21
Drive Units and Geared Machine, TW- and W-Series 27
Frequency Inverter
Gearless Machinen, PMC- and DAF-Series 47
MO61, Solutions with PMC Gearless 67
Compact Gearless, SC-Series 77
External Rotor Gearless, DAB-Series 81
Drive Accessories, Brake Control, UCM-Modul 85
Frequency Inverter MFC and MFR with regeneration 93
Safety- and Car Sling TCS, the Flexible One for Medium Loads 103
Elevator Components
Counterweight GTK, the Variable Solution for many Installaton Situations 107
Progressive Safety/Braking System 111
Overspeed Governor and Accessories 115
Oil and Spring Buffers, Telescopic Buffer Uprights 123
Roller Guides and Sliding Guides 131
Rope Pulleys and Accessories 143
Doors Comfort Door S8A/K8A 147
Modernisation for Door Drive F9 167
Kits LEA - Family 169
LEA 173
LEA - Flexible 185
LEA - Comfort 189
LEA - Cargo 193
Home Lift LEA - Home 209

LEMoS, the Modular Modernisation Solution 219
Safety Basic Safety Practices for Lifts 247
Calendar 289
Standards and guidelines 290
The TEAM of LiftEquip 294
www.liftequip.com 3
Preface
Dear Sir/Madam,
The complexity of the lift business is steadily increasing. To enable you to find the appropriate
solution with the right specifications for your project, we have now grouped all of our components,
kits and other solutions clearly in a general catalogue.
True to our motto More than you expect... LiftEquip you can find all of our products here, from the
simple, but reliable-and-tested sliding guide shoes and the complete range of safety technology to
all kinds of mechanical kits in the LEA family. LiftEquip also supplies the fast growing home lift market. We offer you
the Gulliver and Orion as complete solutions under the heading LEA Home" - not just for the private use.
A large part of the catalogue is taken up by the field of drive unit solutions: geared machines from the tried-and-tested
TW45C and TW63B to the heavy duty W332C. TW130 and TW160 effectively supplement the power ranges. Many
drives are also optionally suitable for higher protection classes or explosion-risk areas or can be supplied with the
successful NBS system for fast and safe A3 retrofitting.
In our gearless drives the smallest is the new star: the PMC125. Economic, reliable and extremely smooth in opera-
tion, it is the perfect entry to the successful PMC series. Additional efficient drives are available for the higher perfor-
mance range in the form of the DAF and SC series.
The importance we attach to sustainability is for example shown by our MFR inverter with integrated energy regene-
ration. It makes an active contribution to environmental protection during every journey and this every day for many
years. This will definitely also pay off for your customers!
We are aware from our day-to-day work how much safety is

a concern for all of us and a constant companion in what we
do. The optimally coordinated chain of development, planning,
design, manufacture, assembly, maintenance and monitoring
as well as repair and modernisation later on, is what make lifts
one of the safest modes of transport there is. Despite all this,
accidents can unfortunately still happen. This is why we have
decided to include the brochure Basic safety rules in full as
an annex, published by the European Lift Association (ELA)
and in this way help to distribute these vital safety rules and
prevent accidents.
I greatly appreciate your interest and now wish you success in

looking for the solution that fits you best. The LiftEquip team would be pleased to advise you. You can find our contact
data on the cover page at the end of the catalogue.
We look forward to working with you.
Best regards
Thorsten Elsaesser
4 Issue 09/2015
Location and International Alignment
Always where you need us
North America Europe

Asia
Africa
South America
Australia
What occurs to you when you think of elevators? What do you consider particularly important when you are choosing
a provider of elevators? No doubt you expect safety and reliability, and want products you can trust. After all, you are
deciding on an investment that you do not want to regret in future.
As LiftEquip, the renowned provider of components for elevators, we know your requirements and expectations very
precisely. Our products and services, in the same way as our company and actions, have been aligned to these requi-
rements and expectations. You receive full support where you need it. Our international alignment means that we know
the national legal and technical requirements in your country.
Thousands of highly satisfied customers have been placing their trust in us for many decades. Alongside the big
players in the industry, many small and medium-sized elevator companies and service operations are among our cus-
tomers. What they appreciate is that we know more about elevators than almost anyone else!
www.liftequip.com 5
Range of Products
Whether you are planning a low-cost standard elevator or a premium installation that will be subjected to high loads, and
whether your elevator is to run in a closed shaft or as a representative panorama system: we cover the entire range of
applications from passenger to freight elevators, and deliver all the important components for your elevator.
Drives
With our elevator drives, you can choose between the energy-efficient, gearless drives or the legendary gear drives for
virtually any range of speed and rated load. A balanced system with matching frequency control ensures outstanding
running performance on every drive.
Gears Gearless Control system
6 Issue 09/2015
High-Quality Components for your Elevator
From the Component to the Complete Assemblies
Solutions for modernisation

We have developed very special solutions for the modernisation of existing elevator systems. Variable in dimensions,
our compact and highly modern drives can be easily adapted to almost any circumstances. With a modification, you
reliably bring your installation up to date with regard to safety, comfort and energy consumption.
Modernisation
AS
L5
55
- 76
5m
m
ModKit MO61 S
ModKit MO61 D4
LEMoS
www.liftequip.com 7
Range of Products
Safety Doors
Safety gear frames and safety technology

Another centrepiece is the safety gear frame in which your elevator car is mounted to insulate it. Our safety technology
components are space-saving and easily accessible, integrated in the safety gear frame. It goes without saying that the
comprehensive range of products also includes all other safety devices.
Doors
The comfort elevator doors S8A / K8A be in people - employed and freight elevators with high demands on quiet running,
lifting height and comfort.
The shaft doors are 81-58 brand tested for fire resistance in accordance with DIN EN. The extensive range of options
(SA - special designs) the door is suitable for use under special requirements.
8 Issue 09/2015
From the Component to the Complete Assemblies
Kits -
The LEA - Family
LEA Flexible
LEA
Home Lift
LEA Comfort
Overall system in focus

All of our products meet the applicable requirements of European regulations and are certified for many countries. They
are designed and built according to the state of the art, have long service lives and are very reliable.
We pay particular attention to the function, co-ordination and availability of the entire elevator on designing our compo-
nents. This is why you also get components in finely graded construction sizes, each of which has the optimal perfor-
mance and price for your elevator.
Whether for a new installation or for a modernisation: with our components, you establish the basis for an outstanding
elevator and always make a good decision in favour of an economical investment!
www.liftequip.com 9
Consulting for our Customers
Every elevator is individual and must be adapted to the type of use in the building and the requirements of the opera-
tor. The elevator should fit into the building harmoniously and ensure smooth transport of passengers and freight. This
is why the choice of the appropriate components is of particular significance. Here, too, we support you as a partner.
Personal consulting
In a personal discussion, we are glad to advise you on the telephone or on site, naturally also in your national lan-
guage. Together we find the optimal solution for your use case. Our aim at all times is to work with you to create an
elevator system with optimised technology and economy.
Configuration program
Our configuration program contains all of our experience from theory and practice. The relevant criteria are queried to
ensure a reliable selection of products and construction sizes. Alongside the performance data such as rated load and
speed, the so-called handling capacity has a decisive influence. The programs deliver you planning data and also the
complete documentation that you require for registration and approval of the elevator system.
10 Issue 09/2015
The Human Factor for Success
Expertise in Elevators Guarantees you have made the right decision
What makes a company good and how does a good company differ from others? We are convinced that the ma-
jor factor is the workforce! Their qualifications and ideas have made us one of the best providers on the market.
This is to remain so in future.
Elevator expertise
Our specialists have the elevator expertise that enables them to adapt to your individual ideas and wishes. This
is the basis for being able to provide you as a customer with skilled and superior support, above all when older
elevator systems or delivery capabilities with respect to spare parts are involved. In the case of an elevator that
is to continue running safely after ten, twenty or more years, our expertise is a great advantage.
Continuous re-qualification
This is why outstanding in-house training and continuous re-qualification are particularly important to us. We
want our employees to know our customers and understand their needs and expectations. Our customers place
high demands on us with respect to safe and reliable elevators. And they are right to do so after all, a long-term
investment decision is involved!
www.liftequip.com 11
High-End Technology
Production with top technology - at an attractive price for you
12 Issue 09/2015
Alongside the people and their know-how, the technology in production

has a decisive influence on the quality of our products. This is why we
invest in the latest processes, machines and systems.
Certified quality
We guarantee the high quality level with certified processes. Quality assu-
rance checks are performed at each work step.. In our own test laboratory,
we use a highly precise 3-D measuring unit. Nothing is left to chance.
Our certifications document this impressively:
- Quality management complying with DIN EN ISO 9001
- Environmental management complying with ISO 14001
- Occupational health and safety management complying with ISO 18001.
Production at the elevator specialist

One important aspect of an elevator is good preparation of the compo-
nents for installation in the shaft. The metal plate parts must not be sharp-
edged. This is why we use a laser to cut them without burrs. The exact
fitting accuracy of the parts is achieved with a modern bending centre.
Excessive tolerances can only be balanced out on the construction site
very laboriously.
The drive is the component in the elevator that is subjected to the highest
stress. A long service life and reliability for gears are only achieved with
precise production of the gear teeth. We do this with special machines and
by exploiting our extensive experience. The same applies to the motors of
the gearless drives. The electrical and thermal configuration and the insu-
lation of the windings are the decisive quality characteristics here.
If only metal had no natural enemies such as corrosion ... To counteract
this, we use sheets made of stainless steel or with galvanised surfaces.
Other surfaces are covered with a high-quality powder coating.
Attractive price-performance ratio

Alongside quality, you naturally also expect an affordable product. The
deployment of technologically and economically optimised processes me-
ans that our products are very attractive as regards the price-performance
ratio. Our production can react flexibly when individual wishes or very short
delivery times have to be complied with.
Perfection all the way to delivery

Before our components leave our plant, we test the function of all products
and the completeness of every delivery. Our customers on the construction
site receive correctly adjusted and tested products at all times. This is what
we demand of ourselves!
Reliable Delivery
Tested products punctually at your elevator system
You order from us and want the products immediately?

We cant quite manage immediately, but we deliver the components to your construction site within a few days!
How do we manage that?

The common products such as drives, frequency controls and components for modernisation are in stock in our
warehouse. Our production plant is also very well situated for road, rail and air transport. We maintain other ware-
houses at central locations within Europe. This is an unbeatable advantage when a matter becomes urgent!
What awaits you at the construction site?

We deliver the products safely and suitably packaged for transport to the construction site and prepared for instal-
lation in line with the needs of the site. Our own installation specialists check and improve this continuously.
We offer solutions
The short-term availability of major components rounds off our service and together we find the right solution for
your project. Safely quickly reliably.
We make every effort to manufacture the best products for you so they should also arrive at your site in faultless
condition and punctually!
14 Issue 09/2015
Service and Customer Proximity
Full support until you are fully satisfied
For such a sophisticated and long-term investment as

an elevator, we offer not only the product itself but also
a comprehensive range of services. We assure you: you
always get our full support!
Consulting and telephone hotline

On our telephone hotline, we advise you with regard to
our products and the best way to deploy them. You talk
to specialists with practical experience who do their best
to answer your questions at all times. We clear up most
of these questions quickly and reliably by telephone, e-
mail or fax. You can also talk to our employees in many
languages.
Proximity to our customers

Close contact to our customers and the practitioners on
the construction site provide us with valuable feedback.
We use this acquired knowledge to continuously adapt the
products and their documentation to the requirements of
our customers to an even greater degree. Profit from this
wealth of experience from elevator construction and from
our close relationship to our customers.
On-site support
For each product, you receive detailed documentation
with all technical details, connection values, installation
instructions and many valuable tips. The safe and error-
free installation of the products is our number one priority.
Should you ever need on-site support, we will send one of
our specialists directly to you and your elevator as quickly
as possible.
Trade fairs and visiting you

Allow us to convince you of our services: we are repre-
sented at many trade fairs within Europe. There, you can
inspect our products and have them explained in detail.
We will also be glad to visit you to present our components
directly on site.
Place your trust in the attitude of our employees: We are
only satisfied when your elevator runs perfectly and reliab-
ly and your wishes have been fulfilled!
Inquiry Sheet
Inquiry Sheet
For components and systems
Inquiry Sheet
2.1 Drive Units Systems have interfaces to the building and compo-
Inquiry/Order
nents have interfaces to the neighbouring assem-
blies.
Customer Inquiry
Order ____________________________
To
Since only you know your project, we need your
Company LiftEquip GmbH Elevator Components input in order to be able to submit a tailor-made
Contact person
Phone +49 (7158) 12-2929
offer to you, which takes all your requirements into
Fax +49 (7158) 12-2971 account.
E-Mail Kontakt@liftequip.de
Date
We have produced enquiry forms for all of our

Machine type Gear Gearless products, covering the parameters we need for a
Controller type Frequency regulated 2-speed
qualified offer.
VVVF inverter MFC 20/21 MFC 30/31
MFR Others
Suspension r 1:1 2:1 3:1 4:1 You can find the enquiry forms for downloading on
Rated load Q [kg]
___________ our home page or contact our sales.
Rated speed vN [m/s]
___________
Car weight [kg]
incl. Car sling ___________ You will not only assist us in designing your com-
Counterweight [kg]
___________
ponents, but also benefit from our serving you as
Travel height [m] quickly as possible.
___________
Compensation rope / chain Yes No
Machine located Above (MR) Above beside Above (HR) If it is very urgent, use LEKalk and assemble the
Below (MR) Below beside Below (SP)
Depth of machine [m]
components needed.
(if machine not above) ___________
Machine type Gear TW 45 C TW 63 B TW 130
TW 160 W 263 C W 332 C When you place the order, we will once again check
Gearless PMC 145-2 DAF 210 SC 300
PMC 170 DAF 270 SC 400
the technology with you so that you can be sure of
Documentation German English French* Russian** having selected the best product for your needs.
Notes:
Page 1 of 2 Issue: 12/2014
16 Issue 09/2015
LEKalk
LEKalk
The tool for drive design and component selection
LEKalk
The LEkalk tool is a design and planning instrument for customers
and planners with which a gearless or gear drive can be quickly and
efficiently calculated with the matching inverter, with or without energy
feedback.
As a result, it is also very easy to calculate different lift configurations

comparing gearless or gear drive or designs with or without energy
feedback for lift planning and evaluation and in this way work out the
best solution for each application.
The drive design, traction capacity and rope detection can be used as
calculation for your registration documents at the body mentioned.
The programme is a local application, which you can download from
our homepage www.liftequip.de after the corresponding registration.
Please contact us in this regard.
Below there is a short overview of the LEKalk tool options:
LEKalk suggests possible mo-

tors on the basis of the lift data
and selection of the gear drive.
Here you can for example also
indicate whether energy feed-
back is desired.
After selecting the motor and

type of frequency control (here
with feedback), a selection of
possible inverters is suggested.
Power consumption and power
reserves are likewise stated.
LEKalk
LEKalk
LEKalk
LEKalk shows possible suitable

inverters. Power reserves are
stated.
LEKalk calculates the traction

capacity on the basis of the rele-
vant parameters.
You can add even more compo-

nents via the catalogue function,
such as the base frame, ropes,
car frame and the entire spect-
rum of safety technology.
18 Issue 09/2015
LEKalk
LEKalk
LEKalk
In this way you can create
your own offer independently
with price and delivery infor-
mation at any time.
The design is for submission

to the responsible monitoring
bodies.
An employee of LiftEquip would be pleased to assist you with queries and training
courses regarding LEkalk and with technical advice.
www.liftequip.com
www.liftequip.com
Your information platform for components and systems
LiftEquip Homepage
Always online, always up-to-date

Here you can find all the information on
LiftEquips products.
Register as a customer and the following
additional documents and tools will be
available to you:
LEKalk
product catalogues
operating manuals
type approval certificates
CAD data
3D models
.
LiftEquip newsletter Modernisation lift car LEMoS

LiftEquip has provided a modular solution for lift modernisations for rated loads up to
To ensure you are always up-to-date, 1050 kg at speeds of 1 m/s in the form of LEMoS.
Flexible means you can keep the parts of your lift whose replacement is not techni-
please register via the home page for our cally necessary and would make little economic sense. This flexibility with the flexible
LEMoS lift car, which can be combined with the doors of different manufacturers, is
newsletter. this solutions USP. Customised modernisation solutions, which make allowance for
technical as well as economic considerations, can be put together here irrespective
of the old lifts manufacturer.
You can find more advantages of the LEMoS system below or on our homepage:
https://www.liftequip.com/newsletter.html www.liftequip.com/products/systems/lemos.html
LEMoS - in a nutshell:
The lift car width and depth can be configured in millimetre steps hence optimal use of the existing
shaft.
Very compact. Micrometer: car width + 40 mm.
Short standstill times thanks to short installation and delivery times.
Prepared for doors of many different well-known markt manufacturers. As a result, it is possible to react
with the flexibility required to all kinds of demands.
Modern lift car design and high quality appearance.
LEMoS arose out of modernisation for modernisation! Modernisation can be this easy! Find out from
us today with the question sheet.
Machine base frame ModKit MO61 S
Extremely flexible and economic!

We would like to present another LiftEquip modernisation solution our new Mod-
Kit MO61S machine base frame. It is a pre-installed machine base frame, specially
developed for our gearless PMC145-2 M/XL and L/XL for 1:1 suspension, rated load
up to 675 kg and 1.0 m/s.
The ASL dimension (distance of lift car suspension to the counterweight suspension)
can be set flexibly from 555 to 765 mm and is delivered with rope guard. A hand
release and hand wheel are optionally available. The frame is pre-installed and can
be supplied from stock with the drive.
www.liftequip.com/products/systems/modkit-mo61s.html
20 Issue 09/2015
Customer and Training Centre
LiftEquip - Customer and Training Centre
Customer and Training Centre

In the new LiftEquip customer centre we will soon be offering you the following training courses.
LEKalk course: Here you learn how to handle LEKalk like a professional. The goal of this course is to learn the
finer points of the programme and then use it in everyday work.
Course duration: one day
MFC/MFR inverter course: In the theoretical part you learn the basics of inverter technology and the correct ins-
tallation and fast start-up of the MFC and MFR inverters. In the practical section you work on our training lift (1000
kg, 17m, 1.6 m/s) to implement what you have learned with exercises and get practical tips and tricks. You must
bring your own work clothing and personal protective equipment.
Course duration: one-and-a-half days
*For assistance during commissioning, you can contact our hotline (+49172735 2020).
Home lifts Gulliver and Orion course: Learn the installation and start-up of the home lift on our Gulliver training
model. You must bring your work clothing and safety shoes.
Maintenance and service on LiftEquip motors: You learn the basics of gear drive and gearless drive technology
as well as everything needed to maintain and correctly set the drives of LiftEquip and replacing the rotary encoder
and traction sheave. You must bring your work clothing and safety shoes.
LEA assembly course: You learn how to assemble the LiftEquip LEA MRL building kit in real lift shafts. We show
you the version of frameless assembly. The focus here in particular is on the installation of the machine base frame.
You must bring your own work clothing and personal protective equipment.
Course duration: one-and-a-half days
Please contact us if you are interested in one of the courses.
22 Issue 09/2015
Technical Report
Technical Report
LiftEquip - From components to home lifts
Technical Report - From components to home lifts

LiftEquip from components to home lifts UK
a matching rope drum for two ropes
for the familiar TW63, TW130 and
TW160 gear systems. These can be
used to move rated loads of 450 to
1200 kg and, in accordance with EN
81-1, speeds of up to 0.63 m/s can be
achieved. This is a clever alternative if
other drive system can only be in-
stalled with high overhead or, in ac-
cordance with EN 81-70, a larger eleva-
tor car has to be installed.
The legendary gear systems

From the small TW45 all the way to the
mighty W332, LiftEquip offers a very
wide range of gear systems, unsur-
passed by any other provider. "Above
all during modernisation, the optional
horizontal or vertical design of smaller
Clearly structured trade fair booth: gear systems and door (front), gearless and frequency gear systems means they can be
converters (back), system parts (left) and home lift (right) adapted to almost any spatial circum-
stances," says sales expert Thomas
Bzner. At LiftEquip, the continuous
enhancement of the gear systems
LiftEquip was present for the 11th The drum drive is back means that they are a genuine alterna-
time at the largest elevator trade fair
Even today, drum drive elevators are tive to modern gearless drives from a
interlift 2013 in Augsburg. Once again
still in operation in numerous build- technical and economic perspective.
this year, interesting innovations
ings. For these elevators and for older Their high efficiency enables energy-
awaited the visitors: the drum drive
installations with small car floor areas, efficient operation. The gear systems
for elevators without counterweight;
the drum drive using modern technol- of the TW model series are optionally
the gearless for "adjacent" with trac-
ogy is a good modernisation solution. available with an emergency brake sys-
tion sheave in the shaft; the wide
The fact that there is no counterweight tem conforming with EN 81-1:A3. The
range of balanced components con-
enables better use of the shaft cross large gear systems of the W model se-
forming with EN 81-1/2:A3; the home
section and a larger elevator car can ries move high rated loads of up to 6
lift for retrofitting inside and outside
be installed. Even hydraulic systems metric tonnes.
of buildings.
can easily be converted to a frequency-
LiftEquip is consistently pointing the controlled drum drive. LiftEquip offers
way as component supplier and solu-
tion provider.
Uniform colour assignment for

all drives
Trade fair visitors to Hall 1 found the
well-known exhibitors in their usual
places. In line with tradition, LiftEquip
Elevator Components from Neuhausen
near Stuttgart could be found on the
right-hand side with a clearly struc-
tured booth layout. It was conspicuous
and well received that all gear and
gearless drives are now painted with
an environmentally friendly and rug-
ged water-based paint in a noble black-
grey. This has provided the high-quali-
ty drive components from LiftEquip
with a uniform colour assignment,
from the reliable drives all the way to The modern gear systems with high efficiency are still very much in demand,
the progressive frequency converters. above all for modernisation
78 LIFT-REPORT 39. Jahrg. (2013) Heft 6
Technical Report
Technical Report
generations of converters in black

housings are configured to conform

with EN 81-1:A3 and do not require
contactors, which makes them very
quiet. In addition to many options, they
include an integrated brake control,
power filter, interface cards, as well as
a display. Connection per plug&play
makes commissioning very simple.
The MFC model series has been ex-
tended to include the construction siz-
es 100R, 155R and 310R with nominal
The gearless range encounters substantial output power of up to 140 kVA. The de- High-quality S8A comfort door with
interest: filigree model series PMC145 vices of the MFR model series for syn- glass door panels and sturdy TW160 gear
(front) and strong Compact Gearless (left) with emergency braking device
chronous drives have an integrated en-
ergy recovery unit and are available in
the performance classes from 5.5 to nents was exhibited on a large shelf
Gearless drives remain first 18.5 kW. within the main trade fair booth: safety
choice
gears, overspeed governors, buffers,
Arranged in a circle were the impres- Solutions for all drive types guides and elevator car LED lighting
sively filigree gearless drives of the with A3 conformity system. Markus Bruckmeyer, Sales
PMC145 model series in the construc- Manager for Germany: "These impor-
Under the key safety concept UCM
tion sizes from "S" (rated load 275 kg / tant components and many other small
(Unintended Car Movement), LiftEquip
suspension 1:1) to "XL" (1000 kg / 2:1). parts concerning every aspect of eleva-
provides solutions in accordance with
On request, these and the larger tors can also be ordered directly from
EN 81-1/2:A3 for all kinds of drives
PMC170 are available together with the LiftEquip. Our customers appreciate
ranging from the hydraulic installation
modernisation solution ModKit MO61. this, as it rounds off our range of prod-
to the geared drive to the gearless ele-
This enables very simple conversion of ucts perfectly."
vator. A brochure provides a clearly ar-
existing elevators with gear systems to
ranged overview of which certified
a gearless drive. The options range
components can be used for each drive
New: Gulliver home lift
from suspension 1:1 up to 1000 kg /
system. This can be seen at www. To date, LiftEquip has aligned its offer-
1.0 m/s and/or in 2:1 up to 1000 kg / ing to components and drive products
EN81-A3.com.
1.6 m/s. Under the key words "Geared for traction elevators. Brand new in the
to Gearless", another modernisation
The S8A / K8A comfort door for
solution with DAF210 and/or DAF270
was presented as a new product. The sophisticated applications
system is suitable for upward or down- On the other side of the trade fair
ward rope departure and for the trac- booth, LiftEquip exhibited the S8A
tion sheave in the shaft or in the ma- landing door for the matching K8A car
chine room. In all cases, secure door. Gnter Stoll, Sales Manager for
support in relation to the building, pro- Export North / East: "This door series
tected from vibration, is ensured. The has been developed for deployment in
highlight: existing circumstances such high-quality elevator systems. The de-
as wall openings, rope pulleys, safety sign is very solid and the frequency-
gear frame and counterweight do not controlled door drive is very quiet. The
have to be changed. As could be ex- incredibly wide range of version op-
pected, many expert visitors were very tions enables adaptation of the door to
interested. Upwards, the range of virtually any customer requirement.
products is rounded off by the Com- This door series clearly stands out
pact Gearless SC300/400 using syn- from the broad mass of standard
chronous technology. doors." It was only possible to exhibit a
few variants on the trade fair booth.
Frequency converters from 5 to The entire performance capability of
more than 50 kW the comfort door is shown in the new
door brochure.
LiftEquip offers a wide range of fre-
quency converters for motor outputs of System components and small
5 to 50 kW or more, for asynchronous
or synchronous drives. They are char-
parts
New product: Gulliver home lift in a
acterised by simple parameter input, It was presented on a separate trade free-standing shaft, ideal for retrofitting
and setup indoors or outdoors.
quick initial operation and safe evacua- fair booth two years ago, but this year Picture: LiftEquip GmbH Elevator
tion and maintenance. The modern a small selection of system compo- Components
24 Issue 09/2015
Technical Report
Technical Report
range is the Gulliver home lift: a free- Norbert Blum. "This makes Gulliver an house and are made in Germany. They

standing elevator with its own shaft ideal retrofit solution in the private and are configured with the extensive expe-
and a travel height of up to 15 metres public sector. This is confirmed by rience of a system provider and opti-
with a maximum of 5 landings. The many trade fair visitors. We are very mised in relation to one another. Our
system is configured in accordance excited about the way the market will customers appreciate the ability of our
with EN 81-41 and Machines Directive develop." salespeople to provide useful informa-
2006/42/EC. The hydraulic drive ena- tion alongside their commitment, also
bles a rated load of 300 or 400 kg with Skills in development, produc- where special wishes may be involved.
a speed of 0.15 m/s. Only 10 cm is re- To ensure long-term customer loyalty,
tion and system application
quired as the floor recess; alternative- we attach high value to skilled consult-
ly, an access ramp can be installed. What are the special features of Lift- ing, and reliable service, all the way to
The shaft head height is only 2350 Equip and the offered products? Man- rapid spare parts supply." On request,
mm. The doors can be arranged on aging Director Andreas Hnnige pro- interested customers are very wel-
three sides. "Gulliver is suitable for set- vides some insight: "The products of come to tour one of the largest produc-
ting up indoors and outdoors," explains LiftEquip have been developed in- tion locations for elevators in Europe.
26 Issue 09/2015
Gears
TW- and W-Series
Gears
Product description 29
Performance Matrix Gears 1:1 / 2:1 30
TW45C 32
TW63B 34
TW130 36
TW160 38
W263C 40
W332C 42
Drum drives 44
Emergency Brake System NBS 45
Colouring for all Drives 84
Gears
TW- and W-Series EN81-

20/ -50
Product Description -conform
Gears
All gear drives are designed with Machine base frame

VVVF motors in B5 configuration with A series of base frames are availab-
flexible coupling and as result provide le in connection with the gear drives,
maximum travel comfort. Depending e.g. with and without diverting pulleys,
on your space requirements, these for 2:1 or 1:1 rope suspensions, in
gear drives are available with a ver- left or right designs and in general for
tically or horizontally installed motor downward traction sheaves. The rope
(TW160, W263C und W332C only distance dimension can be chosen
horizontal). flexibly according to the circumstan-
Pole-changing (AC2) motors are also ces on the spot as a result of suitable Emergency brake system NBS
optionally available for the geared perforation patterns for the attachment optional
machine TW63B. of the drive and diverting pulley. The TW45C to TW160: as single-circuit
One- to three-stage worm gears en- base frame design left / right can be spring-operated disc brake it permits
sure continuous smooth running. chosen irrespective of the left / right upward braking and complies with EN
Tight production tolerances and the traction sheave. 81-1/9.10. Certification according to
use of high quality materials preserve The machines base frames are moun- EN81-1: Amendment 3 is available.
smooth running. Synthetic transmissi- ted on anti-vibration elements.
on oil ensures optimal lubrication and
EN81 20/-50
high efficiency. Optimal adjustment to your lift
Our drives meet all requirements with
The hardened, low-wear traction she- Traction sheaves in all directions are
regard to the above standards, in par-
ave has a long service life. possible, but must be ordered as cu-
ticular the approval of safety brakes
stom-build.
and the rope guard.
The service brake keeps the lift
safe as dual-circuit disc brake in the Also optionally as Ex part
TW45C and from the TW63B as dual- An extended traction sheave shaft with
circuit external contracting shoe bra- wall bearing, vapour-proof shaft duct
ke, even if a pitch circle fails. and the optional accompanying base
frame permit the use of standard ma-
chines for Ex areas.
28 Issue 09/2015
Gears
TW- and W-Series

Product Description
Gears
TW45C up to 1000 kg* TW63B up to 2000 kg* TW130 up to 3500 kg*
Horizontal/vertical version Horizontal/vertical version Horizontal/vertical version

Right or left hand Right or left hand Right or left hand
Emergency braking system optional Emergency braking system optional Emergency braking system optional
pole changing pole changing
TW160 up to 4000 kg* W263C up to 5000 kg* W332C up to 6000 kg*
Horizontal version Horizontal version Horizontal version

Right or left hand Right or left hand Right or left hand
Emergency braking system optional Worm gear with combined plained Worm gear with combined plained
bearings bearings
*Representation of the drives: horizontal right, 2:1 suspension
Gears
TW- and W-Series

Performance Matrix Gears 1:1
Travel height 25 m 40 m
Gears
Operating speed 0,63 m/s 0,8 m/s 1 m/s 1,2 m/s 1,6 m/s 2 m/s
Q= 450kg TW45C, 46:1, TS440 TW45C,46:1,TS520 *TW45C,32:1,TS440 TW45C,32:1,TS590 TW45C, 41:2, TS440 TW63B, 48:2, TS 675
F= 950kg 2726 kJ/h, 3,8 kW 3366 kJ/h, 3,8 kW 3630 kJ/h, 3.8 kW 4872 kJ/h, 5,2 kW 5513 kJ/h, 7 kW 7091 kJ/h, 10 kW
6,5 A / 10,1 A 8,3 A / 12,3 A 8,9 A / 13,9 A 12,9 A / 21,5 A 13,8A / 21,5 A 22,1 A / 38,8 A
1258 1/min, (NBS) 1352 1/min, (NBS) 1389 1/min, (NBS) 1243 1/min, (NBS) 1424 1/min, (NBS) 1358 1/min, (NBS)
MFC 20-15 V1 MFC 20-15 V1 MFC 20-15 V1 MFC 20-15 V1 MFC 20-15 V1 MFC 20-32 V1
Q= 630kg TW45C, 32:1,TS360 TW45C, 32:1,TS440 TW45C, 32:1,TS440 TW45C, 41:2, TS360 TW63B, 48:2, TS 590 TW63B, 48:2, TS 675
F= 1000kg 3595 kJ/h, 3,6 kW 4593 kJ/h, 4,6 kW 5310 kJ/h, 7,0 kW 5686 kJ/h, 7,0 kW 7779 kJ/h, 9,9 kW 9499 kJ/h, 13,0 kW
8,6 A / 13,3 A 12,8 A / 19 A 12,9 A / 17,9 A 13,7 A / 20 A 23,5 A / 40,2 A 25,7 A / 40,8 A
Q= 800kg TW45C,32:1,TS320 TW45C,32:1,TS320 *TW63B, 33:1, TS 510 *TW63B, 33:1, TS 510 TW63B, 48:2, TS 510 TW63B, 43:3, TS 450
F=1050kg 4407 kJ/h, 5,0 kW 5176 kJ/h, 7,0 kW 6305 kJ/h, 6,9 kW 6692 kJ/h, 10 kW 8914 kJ/h, 10 kW 11005 kJ/h, 12,7 kW
11,7 A / 17,2 A 12,8 A / 15,2 A 14,6 A / 22,5 A 20,5 A / 29,5 A 27,2 A / 39 A 29,3 A / 46,5 A
Q= 1000kg TW63B, 48:1, TS 450 TW63B, 33:1, TS 450 TW63B, 33:1, TS 450 TW63B, 48:2, TS 450 TW130, 45:2,TS 540 TW130, 45:2, TS 640
F= 1200kg 5277 kJ/h, 7 kW 6370 kJ/h, 9 kW 7422 kJ/h, 10 kW 8939 kJ/h, 9,8 kW 12198 kJ/h, 16 kW 15039 kJ/h, 20,5 kW
12,5 A / 18 A 20,4 A / 30,5 A 22,9 A / 32,3 A 27 A /42,4 A 30,8 A / 46,8 A 38,2 A / 57 A
Q= 1200kg *TW130, 52:1, TS 540 TW130, 52:1, TS 640 TW130, 42:1, TS 640 TW130, 35:1, TS 640 TW130, 45:2, TS 540 TW130, 45:2, TS 640
17 A / 26,6 A 21,7 A / 33 A 25,5 A / 38,5 A 28,6 A / 43,9 A 37,4 A / 56,4 A 46,8 A / 67,6 A
Q= 1600kg TW130, 52:1, TS 540 TW130, 42:1, TS 540 TW130, 35:1, TS 540 TW130, 35:1, TS 540 TW130, 45:2, TS 540 TW160, 45:2,TS 640
23,9 A / 34,2 A 26,8 A / 39,2 A 31,3 A / 46,1 A 36,9 A / 49,9 A 45,8 A / 68,2 A 57,3 A / 81,8 A
Q= 1800kg TW130, 52:1, TS 540 TW130, 42:1, TS 540 TW130, 35:1, TS 540 TW1301, 45:2, TS 540 TW160, 51:2, TS 640 *TW160, 45:2, TS 640
26,6 A / 37,4 A 29,9 A / 43 A 35 A / 50,7 A 38,3 A / 53,3 A 52,9 A / 78,8 A 59,8 A / 87,9 A
Q= 2000kg TW130, 42:1, TS 540 TW130, 35:1, TS 540 TW160, 41:1, TS 640 TW160, 35:1, TS 640 TW160, 51:2, TS640 W263C, 41:2, TS 640
24,3 A / 33,6 A 30 A / 39,7 A 39,1 A / 57,6 A 44,7 A / 66,8 A 59 A / 87 A 73,7 A / 113,2 A
936 1/min, (NBS) 990 1/min, (NBS) 1225 1/min, (NBS) 1253 1/min, (NBS) 1217 1/min, (NBS) 1224 1/min
MFC 20-32 V1 MFC 20-32 V1 MFC 20-48 V1 MFC 20-48 V1 MFC20-60 V1 MFC 20-105 V1
Q= 2200kg TW160, 50:1, TS640 TW160, 50:1, TS 640 TW160, 41:1, TS 640 TW160, 35:1, TS 640 W263C, 41:2, TS 540 W263C, 41:2, TS 540
26,9 A / 36,6 A 36,4 A / 51,1 A 42,9 A / 62,4 A 46,7 A / 70 A 70,3 A / 107,1 A 80,6 A / 130,9 A
940 1/min, (NBS) 1194 1/min, (NBS) 1224 1/min, (NBS) 1253 1/min, (NBS) 1160 1/min 1450 1/min
Q= 2400kg TW160, 50:1, TS 640 TW160, 41:1, TS 640 TW160, 35:1, TS 640 W263C, 40:1, TS640 W263C,41:2,TS540 W332C, 46:2,TS700
29,2 A / 39,2 A 36,1 A / 46,9 A 50,5 A / 71,2 A 57,3 A / 82 A 71,3 A / 107,9 A 93,6 A / 176,7 A
940 1/min, (NBS) 979 1/min, (NBS) 1045 1/min, (NBS) 1432 1/min 1160 1/min 1255 1/min
Q= 2600kg W332C, 63:1,TS640 W263C, 40:1, TS 540 W263C, 40:1, TS 540 W332C, 47:1, TS 800 W332C, 59:2, TS 700 *W332C, 46:2,TS640
F= 2800kg 16046 kJ/h, 26,1 kW 18431 kJ/h, 24,9 kW 20833 kJ/h, 27,5 kW 26872 kJ/h, 33,5 kW 34660 kJ/h, 42 kW 36445 kJ/h, 45,4 kW
38,3 A / 87,4 A 46,5 A / 70,5 A 52,6 A / 75,4 A 65,1 A / 121 A 82 A / 166,7 A 95,3 A / 173,6 A
1184 1/min 1132 1/min 1415 1/min 1347 1/min 1288 1/min 1373 1/min
Q= 2800kg *W332C, 63:1,TS640 W332C, 63:1,TS700 W332C, 47:1,TS640 W332C, 47:1,TS800 W332C, 59:2, TS 700 W332C, 46:2, TS 640
F= 3000kg 16622 kJ/h, 26,1 kW 19808 kJ/h, 33,5 kW 23550 kJ/h, 33,5 kW 28833 kJ/h, 33,5 kW 37186 kJ/h, 42 kW 38059 kJ/h, 45,4 kW
37,9 A / 87,9 A 47,9 A / 101,2 A 58,1 A / 101,9 A 69,7 A / 126,6 A 87,8 A / 175,8 A 97,2 A / 178,3 A
1184 1/min 1375 1/min 1403 1/min 1347 1/min 1288 1/min 1373 1/min
The calculations are examples, altera- * 50% compensation of rated load Q = Rated load,
tions are possible Machine type, Ratio, TS- [mm] F = Maximum mass of car,
Heat dissipated [kJ/h], Motor perf. [kW] at RPM TS = Traction sheave diameter,
Req. motor current [A] / Req. start up current [A] (NBS) = Compatible with emergency brake system.
Motor RPM [1/min], (NBS possible)
Inverter type. 1) stronger brake
Stand 04/2015
30 Issue 09/2015
Gears
TW- and W-Series

Performance Matrix Gears 2:1
Gears
Operating speed 0,63 m/s 0,8 m/s 1 m/s 1,2 m/s 1,6 m/s
Q= 630kg TW45C, 41:2, TS 440 TW45C, 41:2, TS 440 TW45C, 41:2, TS 590 TW45C, 40:3, TS440 TW63B, 43:3, TS 675
F= 1000kg 3234 kJ/h, 3,8 kW 3969 kJ/h, 5,2 kW 5039 kJ/h, 7 kW 5555 kJ/h, 7 kW 8150 kJ/h, 10 kW
7,9 A / 12,3 A 11 A / 14,5 A 12,4 A / 17,8 A 13,8 A / 19,7 A 25,1 A / 40,4 A
1121 1/min, (NBS) 1424 1/min, (NBS) 1327 1/min, (NBS) 1389 1/min, (NBS) 1298 1/min, (NBS)
MFC 20-15 V1 MFC 20-15 V1 MFC 20-15 V1 MFC 20-15 V1 MFC 20-32 V1
Q= 1000kg TW45C, 32:1, TS 520 TW45C, 40:3, TS 360 *TW45C, 40:3,TS 360 TW63B, 43:3, TS 510 *TW63B, 43:3, TS 675
F= 1500kg 5388 kJ/h, 7 kW 5956 kJ/h, 6,3 kW 6597 kJ/h, 7 kW 9060 kJ/h, 10 kW 11370 kJ/h, 13 kW
13,4 A / 16,1 A 15,8 A / 22,2 A 15,9 A / 21,9 A 27,7 A / 43,4 A 30,2 A / 47,9 A
Q= 1600kg TW63B, 33:1, TS 590 TW63B, 48:2, TS 590 TW63B, 43:3, TS 450 TW130, 43:3, TS 540 TW130, 43:3, TS 640
F= 1800kg 7744 kJ/h, 10 kW 9716 kJ/h, 12,9 kW 11577 kJ/h, 12,7 kW 14134 kJ/h, 15,6 kW 17993 kJ/h, 27,5 kW
23,7 A / 31,8 A 25,6 A / 37,4 A 31,1 A / 45,1 A 35,9 A / 53,4 A 46,8 A / 65,6 A
Q= 2000kg TW63B, 48:2, TS 450 TW130, 45:2, TS540 *TW130, 45:2, TS640 TW130, 43:3, TS 540 TW 1301, 43:3, TS 640
F= 2200kg 9333 kJ/h, 10 kW 11736 kJ/h, 16 kW 13668 kJ/h, 16 kW 17425 kJ/h, 20 kW 21916 kJ/h, 27,5 kW
28 A / 38,1 A 29,3 A / 42,1 A 34 A / 48,1 A 43,9 A / 65,2 A 56,8 A / 77,8 A
Q= 2500kg TW130, 35:1, TS 640 TW130, 45:2, TS 540 TW130, 45:2, TS 640 *TW1301, 43:3, TS 540 TW 1301, 43:3, TS 540
F= 2500kg 12048 kJ/h, 16 kW 14447 kJ/h, 16 kW 17805 kJ/h, 20,5 kW 18859 kJ/h, 26,8 kW 25128 kJ/h, 33,5 kW
30,2 A / 40,8 A 36 A / 49,4 A 44,6 A / 60,4 A 47,2 A / 71,3 A 67 A / 80,3 A
Q= 3000kg TW130, 35:1, TS 640 TW130, 45:2, TS 540 TW130, 45:2, TS 540 TW1301, 43:3, TS 540 TW160, 41:3, TS 640
F= 2800kg 14468 kJ/h, 16 kW 17357 kJ/h, 20,5kW 19078 kJ/h, 27,5 kW 23444 kJ/h, 32,6 kW 31911 kJ/h, 42 kW
36,2 A / 47 A 42,8 A / 58,5 A 50,9 A / 61,1 A 59,5 A / 86,1 A 79,4 A / 129 A
Q= 3500kg TW130, 45:2, TS 540 TW160, 57:2, TS 640 TW160, 45:2, TS 640 TW160, 45:2, TS 640 *W 332C, 57:3, TS 800
F= 3200kg 16973 kJ/h, 18,5 kW 19171 kJ/h, 27,5 kW 23354 kJ/h, 27,5 kW 26088 kJ/h, 33,5 kW 36107 kJ/h, 45,4 kW
38,6 A / 46,4 A 48,2 A / 63,6 A 58,8 A / 77,4 A 68,6 A / 81,8 A 97,9 A / 179,1 A
1003 1/min, (NBS) 1361 1/min, (NBS) 1343 1/min, (NBS) 1611 1/min, (NBS) 1452 1/min
Q= 4000kg TW160, 35:1, TS 640 TW160, 51:2, TS 640 TW160, 45:2, TS 640 W263C, 41:2, TS 640
F= 3500kg 18719 kJ/h, 20,5 kW 22169 kJ/h, 26,8 kW 25900 kJ/h, 33,5 kW 34038 kJ/h, 42 kW
45,8 A / 59,2 A 55,4 A / 75 A 64,7 A / 85,7 A 86,6 A / 131,6 A
1316 1/min, (NBS) 1218 1/min, (NBS) 1343 1/min, (NBS) 1468 1/min
MFC 20-48 V1 MFC 20-60 V1 MFC 20-105 V1 MFC 20-105 V1
Q= 4500kg TW160, 35:1, TS 640 W263C, 50:2, TS 540 W263C, 41:2, TS 540 *W 332C,57:3,TS640
F= 4000kg 19722 kJ/h, 27,5 kW 25747 kJ/h, 33,5 kW 31046 kJ/h, 42 kW 36192 kJ/h, 42 kW
49,2 A / 64,3 A 64,8 A / 87,9 A 78 A / 120 A 86,3 A / 172,4 A
1316 1/min, (NBS) 1415 1/min 1450 1/min 1361 1/min
Q= 5000kg W263C, 50:2, TS 540 W263C 41:2, TS 540 W332C, 46:2,TS640

F= 4500kg 24781 kJ/h, 29,9 kW 30548 kJ/h, 34,3 kW 35725 kJ/h, 45,4 kW * 50% compensation of rated load
63,4 A / 88,6 A 72,9 A / 101,1 A 95,8 A / 177,5 A Machine type, Ratio, TS- [mm]
1114 1/min 1160 1/min 1373 1/min Heat dissipated [kJ/h], Motor perf. [kW] at RPM
MFC 20-105 V1 MFC 20-105 V1 MFC 20-105 V1 Req. motor current [A] / Req. start up current
[A]
Q= 5500kg W332C, 47:1, TS 800 W332C, 59:2, TS 640 *W332C, 46:2,TS640 Motor RPM [1/min], (NBS possible)
F= 5000kg 28731 kJ/h, 33,5 kW 34694 kJ/h, 42 kW 37993 kJ/h, 45,4 kW Inverter type.
70,8 A / 123,9 A 85 A / 163,1 A 98,7 A / 176,3 A
1414 1/min 1409 1/min 1373 1/min Q = Rated load,
MFC 20-105 V1 MFC 20-105 V1 MFC 20-105 V1 F = Maximum mass of car,
TS = Traction sheave diameter,
Q= 6000kg W332C, 47:1, TS800 W332C, 59:2, TS640 (NBS) = Compatible with emergency brake
F= 5500kg 31916 kJ/h, 37 kW 36111 kJ/h, 45,4 kW system.
74,6 A / 124,8 A 97 A / 175,3 A
1414 1/min 1409 1/min 1) stronger brake
MFC 20-105 V1 MFC 20-105 V1
The calculations are examples, alterations are possible
TW-Drives
TW45C With NBS this geared machine

is conform to EN81-A3
The ideal solution for light loads

Gears
VVVF-motor (5,2 and 7 kW) controlled accurately

Emergency braking system NBS: braking upwards,
EN81-1/9.10, optional
Brake monitoring switch, manual brake release
Low-wear traction sheave, available in 320, 360, 440,
520 or 590 mm
Gear, motor, traction sheave: approx. 250 kg
Special designs are possible
TW45C
horizontal right
Technical Data
Gear type TW45C
Axle distance mm 120
Load on shaft (Ft) kN 30
Ratios 46:1 / 32:1 / 41:2 / 40:3
Oil filling L 5,5
Type of oil synthetic gear oil
Backlash 0,03 - 0,07
Weight kg ca. 105
Type of protection - Motor IP54
Hand wheel mm D270 (plastic)
Actual Value Sensor (standard) WDG100-38-1024/4096 TTL
Actual Value Sensor (special) WDG100-38-1024 HTL
WDG100-38-1024 Sinus/Cosinus
Operational Brake
Type Robastop RSZ 60
Braking Torque Nm 2 x 50
Operational Voltage VDC 180 - overexitation // 90 - retentive voltage
Traction Sheave
Diameter Traction Sheave mm 320 360 440 520 590
Rim width mm 102 77 115
max. Numerbrs of grooves 7 x 8 / 6 x 10 7 x 8 / 6 x 10
7x8 5x8
(z x d) 6 x 11 6 x 11 / 5 x 12
Weight kg 30 25 45 55 60
Subject to modifications
32 Issue 09/2015
TW-Drives
TW45C
Gears
PERFORMANCE DATA
Rated Load Q [kg] Operational Speed v [m/s] Suspension r

320 0,63 - 1,20 1:1
450 0,5 - 1,25 1:1
630 0,5 - 1,0 1:1
900 0,4 - 0,63 2:1
1000 0,4 - 1,0 2:1
1300 0,4 2:1
TW45C
Motor position horizontal on machine base frame
(pictured with traction sheave on left and with emergency brake system NBS, optional)
Brake release lever

(plug-in type
Bolt connection
4xM16 Motor position vertical
(pictured with traction sheave on left)
DT = 320 360 440 520 590

Bolt connection
W T = 102 77 115 115 115 4xM16
* Dimensions applicable to D T = 360 mm
Brake release lever
(plug-in type)
TW-Drives
TW63B With NBS this geared machine

The machine for middle loads

Gears
VVVF-motor (5,2 up to 13 kW) controlled

accurately
Emergency braking system NBS: braking
upwards, EN81-1/9.10, optional
Traction sheave in shaft with extended traction
sheave shaft and pedestal bearing (SA 9)
Gear according to ATEX
Brake magnets, Ex-proof (SA 15)
TW63B Low-wear traction sheave, available in 450,
horizontal right 510, 520, 590 or 675 mm
Technical Data
Gear type TW63B
Load on shaft (Ft) kN 43 (rope departure direction downwards)
Ratios 54:1 / 48:1 / 33:1 / 48:2 / 43:3
Oil filling L vertical: ca.11 / horizontal: ca. 9
Backlash 0,025 - 0,07
Weight kg ca. 190
Motor pole changing frequency-controlled
Hand wheel IP54
Actual Value Sensor (standard) flywheel rim D270 (plastic)
Actual Value Sensor (special) WDG100-38-1024/4096 TTL
without WDG100-38-1024 HTL
WDG100-38-1024 Sin/Cos
Operational Brake
Type TW63B
Braking Torque Nm max. 2 x 90
Traction Sheave
Rim width mm 132 132 110 132 96
max. Numerbrs of grooves 8x8 8x8 6x8
8x8
(z x d) 7 x 10/11 5 x 13 7 x 10/11 5 x 10/11
7 x 10/11
6 x 12 6 x 12 4 x 12
Weight kg 50 60 50 70
34 Issue 09/2015
TW-Drives
TW63B
Gears
PERFORMANCE DATA

800 0,63 - 2,0 1:1
1000 0,63 - 1,2 1:1
1000 0,4 - 1,6 2:1
1600 0,4 - 1,2 2:1
2000 0,4 - 0,63 2:1
TW63B, vertical left hand

on machine base frame
down beside
1 Machine centre of gravity

2 Mount of machine on machine
base frame
3 Operation lever for manual
brake release (plug-in)
kproj. = see product catalog
TW-Drives
TW130 With NBS this geared machine

The ideal solution for higher loads

Gears
VVVF-motor (11 up to 42 kW) controlled accurately

Emergency braking system NBS, optional
Traction sheave in shaft with extended traction sheave shaft and
pedestal bearing (SA 9)
Part-Ex proof: wall bearing with vapour-proof shaft duct, extended
drive shaft and suitable machine base frame (SA4)
Reinforced machine mounting for rope pull resultant - horizontal
or vertical pointing upwards (SA1)
TW130 Additional terminal block for intermediate terminal
horizontal right connection (SA12)
Low-wear traction sheave, available in 540, 640, 720 or 900 mm
Technical Data
Gear type TW130
Ratios 52:1 / 42:1 / 35:1 / 45:2 / 43:3
Oil filling L vertical: ca. 25 / horizontal: ca. 20
Backlash 0,02 - 0,06
Weight kg 430
Motor
Motor frequency-controlled
Type of protection - Motor IP 21 IP 55
Hand wheel D270 / 360 (plastic) D270 / 360 (plastic)
Operational brake
Type TW130
Braking Torque Nm max. 2 x 125 / max. 2 x 200 max. 2 x 125
Traction Sheave
Diameter Traction Sheave mm 540 640 720 900
Rim width mm 150
max. Numerbrs of grooves 5 x 16 6 x 12/13,
(z x d) 7 x 12/13, 8 x 10/11, 10 x 8, 9 x 9 7 x 10/11
Weight kg 75 90 140 150

36 Issue 09/2015
TW-Drives
TW130
Gears
PERFORMANCE DATA

1000 0,63 - 2,5 1:1
1300 0,63 - 2,5 1:1
1600 0,63 - 1,0 1:1
1300 0,5 - 2,0 2:1
2200 0,5 - 1,75 2:1
3000 0,5 - 0,8 2:1
TW130
TW-Drives
TW160 With NBS this geared machine

The cart horse for higher loads

Gears
VVF-motor (11 up to 42 kW) controlled accurately

Emergency braking system NBS: braking upwards,
EN81-1/9.10, optional
Traction sheave in shaft with extended traction sheave
shaft and pedestal bearing (SA 9)
Part-Ex proof: wall bearing with vapour-proof shaft duct,
extended drive shaft and suitable machine base frame (SA4)
TW160 Low-wear traction sheave, available in 640, 720 or 800 mm
horizontal right Gear, motor, traction sheave: approx. 925 kg
Technical Data
Gear type TW160
Ratios 50:1 / 42:1 / 35:1 / 57:2 / 51:2 / 41:3
Oil filling L ca. 16,5
Backlash 0,015 - 0,06
Weight kg ca. 540
Type of protection - Motor IP21 IP55
Hand wheel D360 (plastic)
Operational Brake
Type TW160
Trachtion Sheave
Type Standard SA 4/9
Diameter Traction Sheave mm 640 720 800 640 720 800
Rim width mm 180 160
max. Numerbrs of grooves
8 x 13, 7 x 16 7 x 13, 6 x 16
(z x d)
Weight kg 140 160 190 130 150 180
38 Issue 09/2015
TW-Drives
TW160
Gears
PERFORMANCE DATA

1800 0,8 - 2,0 1:1
2000 0,8 - 1,2 1:1
2500 0,63 - 1,6 2:1
3000 0,63 - 1,2 2:1
3500 0,63 - 1,0 2:1
TW160
W-Drives
W263C
For big travel heights & high loads

Gears
VVVF-motor (16 up tp 75 kW) controlled accurately

Horizontal rope departure (SA1)
Traction sheave in shaft with extended traction sheave shaft and
pedestal bearing (SA 9)
Reinforced traction sheave shaft (SA13)
W263C
horizontal right
Double safety by dual-circuit shoe brake
Low-wear traction sheave, available in 540, 640, 700, 740 or 800 mm
Technical Data
Gear type W263C
Ratios 49:1 / 40:1 / 60:2 / 50:2 / 41:2
Oil filling L ca. 20
Backlash 0,021 - 0,05
Weight kg 1250
Type DTE / DTL / 1LA6
handwheel D360 (plastic)
Actual Value Sensor (special) WDG100-38-1024 HTL / WDG100-38-1024 Sin/Cos
Operational Brake
Type W263C
Traction Sheave
Type Standard / SA 9 / SA 4
Rim width mm 160 160 180 215 180 215 160 215 160 215
max. Numerbrs of grooves 8 x 10/11
(z x d) 7x13 8x13 8x13 7x13 8x13 7x13 8x13
6x16 7x16 8x16 7x16 8x16 6x16 8x16 6x16 8x16
5x18 7x18 5x18 7x18
Weight (incl. hub) kg 125 150 160 180 185 210 195 230 225 265
Technische nderungen vorbehalten
40 Issue 09/2015
W-Drives
W263C
Gears
PERFORMANCE DATA

2000 0,8 - 2,0 1:1
2200 0,8 - 1,2 1:1
3500 0,63 - 1,2 2:1
4000 0,63 - 1,0 2:1
4500 0,63 - 1,0 2:1
W263C
horizontal left hand
W-Drives
W332C
The well proven for big loads

Gears
VVVF-motor (16 up to 75 kW) controlled accurately

Horizontal rope departure (SA1)
Traction sheave in shaft with extended traction
sheave shaft and pedestal bearing (SA 9)
Double safety by dual-circuit shoe brake
W332C
Low-wear traction sheave, available in 640, 700, 740 or 800 mm
horizontal right
Technical Data
Gear type W332C
Ratios 63:1 / 47:1 / 59:2 / 46:2 / 57:3
Oil filling L ca. 33
Backlash 0,022 - 0,04
Weight kg 1700
Motor frequency controlled
Type DTE / DTL / 1LA6
handwheel D360 (plastic)
Actual Value Sensor (special) WDG100-38-1024 HTL / WDG100-38-1024 Sin/Cos
Operational Brake
Type W332C
Traction Sheave
Type Standard / SA 9 / SA 4
Diameter Traction Sheave mm 640 700 740 800
Rim width mm 160 180 215 180 215 160 215 160 215
max. Numerbrs of grooves 8 x 10/11
(z x d) 7x13 8x13 8x13 7x13 8x13 7x13 8x13
6x16 7x16 8x16 7x16 8x16 6x16 8x16 6x16 8x16
5x18 7x18 5x18 7x18
Weight (incl. hub) kg 150 160 180 185 210 195 230 225 265
42 Issue 09/2015
W-Drives
W332C
Gears
PERFORMANCE DATA

2800 0,63 - 1,6 1:1
3200 0,63 - 1,2 1:1
4500 0,4 - 1,2 2:1
5500 0,4 - 1,0 2:1
6000 0,4 - 0,6 2:1
W332C
horizontal left hand
Drum Drives
Drum Drives
Gears
TW130 incl. drum
Technical Data
Rated load max. Q [kg] 450 525 800 800 1000 1000 1200
Car weight max. F [kg] 300 400 550 550 700 700 800
Total load F+Q [kg] 750 925 1350 1350 1700 1700 2000
Rated speed [m/s] 0,5 0,63 0,5 0,63 0,5 0,63 0,63
Suspension 1:1
Travel height max. [m] 12
Machine type TW63B TW130 TW160
Ratio 48:1 33:1 42:1 35:1 50:1 41:1 35:1
Drum diameter [mm] 360 360 450 450 520 520 520
Drum length [mm] 240 265 300 300 300 300 300
Number of ropes 2
Rope diameter [mm] 8 9 10 11 11 12 13
Dissipated heat [kJ/h] 1850 2615 3185 4183 4232 5483 6623
Motor output [kW] 6,5 9,3 11,8 14,5 14,7 18,1 22,2
Motor current [A] 14,4 25,5 26,8 44,5 46,0 41,2 52,4
For higher loads the W-series is available on request
MODERN TECHNOLOGY Made in Germany

FOR THE FIRST GENERATION OF ELEVATORS
Also nowadays this kind of machines are used in many buildings.

For providing their service in future we offer our TW-series* for a
smooth operation of your elevator.
The car is directly mounted on the rope and the drive coils the
ropes on the drum. The non-use of counterweights saves space
and the whole shaft cross section can be used for the cabin. The-
refore existing hydraulic elevators and rope elevators in limited TW63B incl. druml
space areas can be modernised easily.
Our whole range of options, for example emergency brake sys-

tem (NBS), Ex-protection or vertical motors) is available for you. If Requirements of the standard EN 81-1:
you cannot find the suitable machine in the matrix above, please - Minimum 2 cables which are wound one layer
contact us, together we will find a solution for higher loads or - D / d (Drum/Rope):> 40
- Rope diameter: 8 mm
special applications.
- Rope safety:> 12
- Speed max. 0.63 m/s
44 Issue 09/2015
Emergency Brake System NBS
Emergency Brake System NBS
Gears
Space saving, simple, cost-
effective
Certified and type approved
according to EN 81-1:A3
Control unit We provide you with a well thought out and cal-
(mounting on machine room wall or
Control System culated package of solutions: Machine with emer-
in control cabinet)
gency brake, overspeed governor including a
switch for overspeed and a separate control-unit.
Together, those components form a closed and
operable system. This systemic solution spares
you time consuming self-made constructions be-
aring unforeseeable costs.
Compact Design
Our emergency brake is mounted on the drive
shaft vis--vis the traction sheave: A configura-
tion, which offers you a space saving solution.
Easy Conversion
To modernize your lift installation the addition of
Additional switch at
the following components to the drive suffices:
overspeed governor an additional safety switch at the overspeed go-
vernor and a separate control unit with a voltage
Terminal box for intermediate control supply for wall-mounted installation in the machi-
-Brake port
-Ventilation monitoring ne room.
-Temperature monitoring
Emergency Brake NBS Continuous Availability

The emergency brake system is optionally availa-
Motor
ble for the following geared drives:
TW 45C, TW63B, TW130, TW160.
Technical Data
Machine Rated Load Q [kg]* Suspension r Brake Torque [Nm]
TW 45C 500/1000 1:1/2:1 1200
TW 63B 1125/2100 1:1/2:1 2200
TW 130 1800/3500 1:1/2:1 4000
TW 160 2200/4750 1:1/2:1 5500
* maximum values depending on speed v
46 Issue 09/2015
Mini-Gearless
PMC- / DAF-Series
Gearless
PMC - DAF Product Description 48
Performance Matrix 49
PMC125 S / M 50
PMC145-2 S/XS 51
PMC145-2 M/XM 52
PMC145-2 L/XL 53
PMC145-2 M/L with TS 320 54
PMC170 S - XL 55
DAF210 M / L 56
DAF270 S / M / L / XL 58
Machine Base Frame for PMC - Gearless 62
Machine Base Frame for DAF - Gearless 63
Modernisation solution 'Geard to Gearless' 64
Mini-Gearless
PMC - DAF EN81-

20/ -50
Product Description -conform
Gearless
Efficient A design version of the brake with life, low vibrations and an extremely
a manual venting lever is possible. smooth running drive for your lift.
With our synchronous gearless
Another option of the PMC series is a
series (PMC and DAF) one of the
handwheel extension. Compact
most compact drives is available
for deployment in energy efficient The compact design is a significant
Complete advantage for using the drives in
modernisation / or system solutions,
ideally suited for energy recovery. We can provide you with the matc- your systems.
These series stand out as excellent hing frequency inverter (MFR: with
value for money. Excellent ef- integrated power regeneration; MFC: Reliable
ficiencies with low energy consump- with braking resistor) in each case Durable, sturdy construction, pro-
tion. for our gearless drives, which feature mising exceptionally long service
all of the drive parameters required. life and availability and sustainable
Safe In this way we guarantee fast, safe economic efficiency.
start-up. Optionally in plug&play
A safety brake is used in all gearless
drives available from LiftEquip, which
version with integrated brake control, EN81 20/-50
line filter, line inductor and contac- Our drives meet all requirements with
is licensed as type-tested safety bra-
tors. regard to the above standards, in par-
ke against excessive speed upwards
In addition, we provide various ticular the approval of safety brakes
in accordance with EN81-1/9.10. EN
machine frames, perfectly adapted and the rope guard.
81-A3 compliant. Rope guard acc. to
to these drives. Special designs are
EN 81-77 up to earthquake category
available on request.
3.
Smooth running
Flexible
The traction sheaves we use are
The drives can be used both in the
precisely manufactured and supplied
shaft (MRL) as well as in the machi-
with hardened grooves. As a result
ne room. The arrangement can be
we guarantee you a long service
configured in 1:1 and 2:1 suspension.
48 Issue 09/2015
Mini-Gearless
Performance Matrix
Gearless
Q [kg]
1:1
DAF270L/XL
1000
DAF270M
630
PMC145-2 L DAF210L
500
DAF210M
PMC145-2 M
PMC145-2 S
Leistungsbersicht Gearless DAF / PMC

[m/s] 1,0 1,5 v [m/s]
Q [kg]
20.05.2015
2:1
2500
DAF270L/XL
2000
DAF270M
PMC170
DAF270M
1500
Q [kg]
1:1
DAF270S
DAF210L DAF270L/XL
1000 1000
PMC145-2 L PMC145-2 XL DAF DAF270M
210L
630 630
PMC125M DAF PMC145-2 L
500 PMC145-2 M PMC145-2 XM 210M 500
PMC125S
PMC145-2 M
PMC145-2 S
PMC145-2 S PMC145-2 XS
1,0 1,5 2,0 3,0 3,5 1,0

2,5
v [m/s]
In the diagrams the range of performance of the

Leistungsbereiche-Gearless_DAF-PMC_2-1_1-1_Darstellung different machines are painted as an approximate value. For the exact assining
- grn.docx
of the machine we advise a technical calculation with the parameter of your installation. For this LEKalk is available.
Mini-Gearless
PMC125 S / M EN81-
20/ -50
-conform
Gearless
PMC125S PMC125M
Technical Data
Type of machine PMC125S001 PMC125M002
Suspension r 2:1
Rated Load Q [kg] 450 630
Mass of Car F [kg] 600 700
Rated Speed max. v [m/s] 1,0
Diameter of Traction Sheave DT [mm] 240
Rim width B [mm] 51 75
Diameter of Ropes d [mm] 6
Number of Grooves max. z 4 6 at groove clearance 12 mm / 7 at groove clearance 10 mm
Groove type seat / vee groove, hardened
Rated Power PN [kW] 2,8 3,8
Rated Torque MN [Nm] 170 230
Permitted radial Shaft Load [kN] 10 12
Weight [kg] 127 137
Number of Switching Operations 120
Duty Cycle % 40
Rated Current IN [A] 7,9 10,2
Output Factor cos 0,89
Braking Torque [Nm] 2 x 210 2 x 300
Designation 2-surface disc brake in double configuration (2 brake circuits)
Brake Monitoring 1 microswith per brake circuit
Protection Class IP 21
Noise level [dB(A)] < 65
MFR 5.5
Frequency inverter type
MFC 21-15, 31-10
50 Issue 09/2015
Mini-Gearless
EN81- PMC145-2 S/XS

20/ -50
-conform
Gearless
PMC145-2S PMC145-2XS
Technical Data
Type of machine PMC145-2S PMC145-2XS
Suspension r 1:1 2:1
Rated Speed max. v [m/s] 1,0 1,6
Number of Grooves max. z 6 at groove clearance 12 mm / 7 at groove clearance 10 mm
Groove type seat / vee groove, hardened
Rated Power PN [kW] 1,59 2,8 4,4
Rated Torque MN [Nm] 190 170 165
Weight [kg] 132 158
Duty Cycle % 50
Rated Current IN [A] 8,4 7,5 9,9
Output Factor cos 0,92 0,91 0,96
Designation 2 x 250 Nm, 2-surface disc brake in double configuration (2 brake circuits)
MFR 5.5
MFC 31-10 31-15
Mini-Gearless
PMC145-2 M/XM EN81-

20/ -50
-conform
Gearless
PMC145-2M PMC145-2XM
Technical Data
Type of machine PMC145-2M PMC145-2XM
Rated Speed max. v [m/s] 1,0 1,2 1,0 1,6 1,75
Diameter of Traction Sheave DT [mm] 240 210 240 210 240
Type of Groove seat / vee groove, hardened
Rated Power PN [kW] 2,38 2,72 2,86 3,91 3,9 6 6,9
Rated Torque MN [Nm] 285 235 205 225 236
Weight [kg] 172 189
Duty Cycle % 40 50
Rated Current IN [A] 11,5 9,5 8,3 14,8 15,6
Output Factor cos 0,93 0,92 0,94 0,97 0,96
Version of Brake 2 x 350 Nm, 2-surface disc brake in double configuration (2 brake circuits)
MFR 5.5 7.5
MFC 31-15
52 Issue 09/2015
Mini-Gearless
EN81- PMC145-2 L/XL

20/ -50
-conform
Gearless
PMC145-2L PMC145-2XL
Technical Data
Type of machine PMC145-2L PMC145-2XL
Diameter of Traction Sheave DT [mm] 240 210 240 210 240
Rated Power PN [kW] 3,69 4,2 4,42 6,01 6 9,4 10,2
Weight [kg] 216 214 216 214 229
Duty Cycle % 40 50
Rated Current IN [A] 18,3 14,9 13 24,7 24,6
Output Factor cos 0,94 0,93 0,92 0,95 0,96
Version of Brake 2 x 550 Nm, 2-surface disc brake in double configuration (2 brake circuits)
MFR 7.5 18
MFC 31-15 31-26
katalog
PMC145-2
Mini-Gearless
PMC145-M
240mm, 210mmProduktkatalog
Treibscheibenseite fr Treibscheibendurchmesser
3
1
Pos.
PMC145-2 M/L EN81-
Ansicht von oben

Ansicht von unten
Bezeichnung
20/ -50
with traction sheave 320 -conform
Antrieb PMC145-2
und 320mm
Gearless
Abb. 2.4-9
PMC145-L
3
1
Pos.
Ansicht von oben
Ansicht von unten
Bezeichnung
Bottom view Sideview View from above

2
Pos.
PMC145-2M
Seitenansicht
Bezeichnung
PMC145-2L
2
Pos.
Technik
Seitenansicht
Bezeichnung
Technik
Technical Data
Type of machine PMC145-2M PMC145-2L
Suspension r 1:1 2:1 1:1 2:1
Rated Load Q [kg] 300 480 500 800
Rated Speed max. v [m/s] 1,0
Number of Grooves max. z max. 5 max. 6
Rated Power PN [kW] 1,79 3,1 2,76 4,7
Rated Torque MN [Nm] 285 245 440 375
Weight [kg] 185 225
Duty Cycle % 40 50 40 50
Rated Current IN [A] 11,5 9,9 18,3 15,5
Output Factor cos 0,94 0,93 0,93 0,92
Version of Brake 2 x 350 Nm 2 x 550 Nm
2-surface disc brake in double configuration (2 brake circuits)
MFR 5.5 7.5
MFC 31-15
54 Issue 09/2015
Mini-Gearless
EN81- PMC170 S - XL
20/ -50
-conform
Gearless
Dimensions
L (mm) D (mm) E (mm) F (mm) H (mm) S (mm) G (kg)
PMC170S 180 613 426 300 706 273 381
PMC170M 240 673 486 360 766 304 423
PMC170L 270 703 516 390 796 319 448
PMC170XL 330 763 576 450 856 350 492
Technical Data
Type of machine PMC170S PMC170M PMC170L PMC170XL
Suspension r 2:1
Number of Grooves max. z 10
Rated Power PN [kW] 9,7 9,8 15,6 17,1 19,5
Rated Torque MN [Nm] 485 781
Permitted radial Shaft Load [kN] 30 42 40 42
Weight [kg] 381 423 448 492
Number of Switching Operations 180 240
Duty Cycle % 50
Rated Current IN [A] 23 27 40 45
Version of Brake 2 x 1200 Nm, 2-surface disc brake in double configuration
MFR 18 --
MFC 31-26 31-40 31-60
Mini-Gearless
DAF210M EN81-
20/ -50
-conform
Gearless
Technical Data
Type of machine DAF210M
Rated Load Q [kg] 450 630 700 630 700 630 700 630
Rated Speed max. v [m/s] 1,0 1,6 1,0 1,6 1,75 2,0
Diameter of Traction Sheave DT [mm] 320 360 320 360 320 360 320 360
Diameter of Ropes d [mm] 8 8/9 8 8/9 8 8/9 8 8/9
Number of Grooves max. z 5 5/4 5 5/4 5 5/4 5 5/4
Rated Power PN [kW] 2,83 4,3 4,2 4,7 6,8 7,3 7,2 7,9 8,0
Rated Torque MN [Nm] 450 430 378 380 382 365 370 360
Permitted radial Shaft Load [kN] 33 ( 75 1/min) / 37 (> 75 1/min)
Weight [kg] 250
Number of Switching Opera- 240 180 240
tions
Duty Cycle % 50 60 50
Rated Current IN [A] 12,5 12,0 10,5 16,1 16,2 17,4 15,4 17,2
Version of Brake 2-surface disc brake in double configuration (2 brake circuits)
MFR 5.5 7.5
MFC 31-15 31-26
56 Issue 09/2015
Mini-Gearless
EN81- DAF210L
20/ -50
-conform
Gearless
Technical Data
Type of machine DAF210L
Rated Load Q [kg] 630 630/900/1000/1125 630/900/1000/1125 1125 1000
Rated Speed max. v [m/s] 1,0 1,6 1,0 1,6 1,75 2,0
Diameter of Traction Sheave DT [mm] 320 520/400/360/320 520/400/360/320 320 360
Diameter of Ropes d [mm] 8 8-13
Number of Grooves max. z 7 5-8
Rated Power PN [kW] 4,10 5,75 4,7/5,9/6,6/6,5/7,5 7,4/9,5/10,5/11,5 11,3/12,4 12,5
Rated Torque MN [Nm] 650 575 610/590/586/520/600 600/595/590/575 580/565 563
Permitted radial Shaft Load for 320-, 360- and 400-traction sheave 38 ( 75 1/min) / 46 (> 75 1/min)
[kN]
for 520-traction sheave 37 ( 75 1/min) / 41 (> 75 1/min)
Weight [kg] 320/325/330
Number of Switching Opera-
240
tions
Duty Cycle % 50
Rated Current IN [A] 16,0 14,0 15,4/15/15,2/13/16,8 23,4/23,2/23,0/25,5 25,7/25,1 25,0
Output Factor cos 0,94 0,95 0,96/0,94/0,95 0,96/0,95/0,95 0,95/0,96 0,96
Version of Brake 2-surface disc brake in double configuration (2 brake circuits)
Brake Monitoring 1 microswith per brake circuits
MFR 7.5 18
MFC 31-15 31-26/40 31-40
Mini-Gearless
DAF270S EN81-
20/ -50
-conform
Gearless
Technical Data
Type of machine DAF270S
Suspension r 2:1
Rated Load Q [kg] 1250
Number of Grooves max. z 10
Rated Power PN [kW] 8 12,6 13,8 15 17,8
Rated Torque MN [Nm] 640 630 600 570
Permitted radial Shaft Load [kN] 43,5
Weight incl. traction sheave [kg] 475
Number of Switching Operations [F/h] 240
Duty Cycle [%] 50
Rated Current IN [A] 23 30,7 29,2 27,8
Output Factor cos 0,94 0,95 0,96
2-surface disc brake in double configuration 2x1700 Nm
Version of Brake
option: with manual release
Protection Class IP20, optional IP54
MFR 18 --
MFC 31-26 31-40 21-50R
58 Issue 09/2015
Mini-Gearless
EN81- DAF270M
20/ -50
-conform
Gearless
Technical Data
Type of machine DAF270M
Rated Load Q [kg] 900 800 1000 900 800 1000 1600 2000 1600 1350 1600 1250
Rated Speed max. v [m/s] 1,0 1,6 1,0 1,6 1,75 2,0 2,5 3,0 3,5
Diameter of Traction Sheave DT [mm] 440 320 440 320 320/440 440
Diameter of Ropes d [mm] 8-11
Number of Grooves max. z 7-9
Rated Power PN [kW] 5,4/7,4 7,8/10,6 10,7 11,4 15,3/14,9 16,3/16,7 18,2 19,5 21,6 21,3 24,8
Rated Torque MN [Nm] 1200/1175 1075/1050 1175 1250 1050/1025 1025/1050 1000 860 950 780
Permitted radial Shaft Load [kN] 43,5/58
Weight incl. traction sheave [kg] 550/570
Number of Switching Ope-
180 240 180 240 180 240 180 240
rations
Duty Cycle % 40 50 40 50 40 50
Rated Current IN [A] 27,5 24,5 24 25 22 30 24 25,5 30/35 35/30,5 38/29 41,5/28,5 31,4 31,2 36,5
Output Factor cos 0,96 0,94 0,92 0,93 0,95 0,94 0,94 0,95/0,94 0,95 0,96/0,95 0,95/0,96 0,96
2-surface disc brake in double configuration 2x1250 / 2x1700 Nm
Version of Brake
MFR 18 --
MFC 31-26/40 31-26 31-40 31-60 21-50R
Mini-Gearless
DAF270L EN81-
20/ -50
-conform
Gearless
Technical Data
Type of machine DAF270L
Suspension r 1:1 2:1 3:1 4:1
Rated Load Q [kg] 1100/1000 2000/2250/2500 2000 2200/2000 1800/2000 3000/4000/3400 4000
Rated Speed max. v [m/s] 1,0/1,6 1,0 1,6 1,75 2,0 2,5 1,0/1,6 1,0
Diameter of Traction Sheave DT [mm] 440 490/440 490 440/490 490/440 490/440 440
Diameter of Ropes d [mm] 8-11 8-12
Rated Power PN [kW] 6,6/10,1 11,7/12,8/14,6 18/20,4/23,3 20 24,6/22,5 26,5/30 17/22,5/30,5 25,1
Rated Torque MN [Nm] 1475/1400 1433/1400/ 1375/1400/ 1400 1350/1375 1300/1325 1385/1650/ 1380
1600 1600 1400
Permitted radial Shaft Load [kN] 58
Weight [kg] 730/740
Number of Switching Ope- 240 240/180 180 240 240/180 180
rations
Duty Cycle % 50 50/40 50 50/40 40
Rated Current IN [A] 26/24,5 25/36/41/28 42,5/43,5/36/ 43,5 41,5/60/ 58/40/59 35/42,5/51,5/ 56
50/41 35/60 62
Output Factor cos 0,96 0,96/0,95 0,96/0,94 0,95 0,96 0,96/0,94 0,96
Version of Brake 2-surface disc brake in double configuration 2x1700
MFR 18 18 / -- -- 18 / --
MFC 31-40 31-60 31-60 / 21-105
60 Issue 09/2015
Mini-Gearless
EN81- DAF270XL
20/ -50
-conform
Gearless
Option: with manual release
Technical Data
Type of machine DAF270XL
Suspension r 1:1 2:1 3:1 4:1
Rated Load Q [kg] 1100/1000 1800/2000/2250/2500 2200 2000 4000/3400 4000
Rated Speed max. v [m/s] 1,0/1,6 1,0 1,6 2,0 2,5 1,0/1,6 1,0
Diameter of Traction Sheave DT [mm] 440 520*/440 440
Diameter of Ropes d [mm] 8-11 8-13
Rated Power PN [kW] 6,6/10,1 12,2/12,8/14,6 17,3/20,4/23,3 24,6 30 22,5/30,5 25,1
Rated Torque MN [Nm] 1475/1400 1400/1600 1350 1325 1650/1400 1380
Permitted radial Shaft Load [kN] 73
Weight [kg] 770/780
Number of Switching Ope- 240 240/180 240 240/180 180
rations
Duty Cycle % 50 50/40 50 50/40 40
Rated Current IN [A] 26/24,5 36/41/28 43,5/36/50/41 41,5/60 59 42,5/51,5/62 56
Output Factor cos 0,96 0,96/0,95 0,96/0,94 0,96 0,93 0,96/0,94 0,96
Version of Brake 2-surface disc brake in double configuration 2x2200
MFR --
MFC 31-40 31-60 31-60 21-105
*see product catalogue DAF270
Mini-Gearless
Machine base frame for PMC - Gearless

Gearless
ModKit MO61 S ModKit MO61 D4
Handrad/-lftung optional
AS
L5
55
- 76
5m
m
For more information see description ModKit MO61S For more information see description ModKit MO61 D4
Technical Data
Frame MODKit MO 61 S* MODKit MO61 D4
Machine PMC145-2 M, L PMC145-2 M, L, XL
Suspension r 1:1 2.1
Rated load Q [kg] up to 675 up to 630 up to 1000
Rated speed v [m/s] 1,0 up to 1,6
Rope departure at drive [mm] from 555 to 765 600 ASL 1400
flexible
Diameter of traction sheave DT [mm] 210 / 240 240
Diameter of ropes d [mm] 6
Number of ropes max. 12
Number of grooves max. z 12
Type of groove seat / vee groove, hardened
Pulley diameter DT [mm] 240
Vibration isolation elements Yes
Integrated rope end fastening points, No (1:1) Yes
rope anchorages
Handwinding wheel, optional Yes
Manual release, optional Yes
Hoist No Yes
* Pre-assemble machine base frame on stock

Machine available from stock
62 Issue 09/2015
Mini-Gearless
Machine base frame for DAF - Gearless
Gearless
DAF210 on TW63B DAF270 on TW130
machine base frame machine base frame
Technical Data
Frame DAF210 on TW63 DAF270 on TW130
machine base frame machine base frame
Machine DAF210M DAF210L DAF270S/M/L
Suspension r 1:1
ASL-dimension flexible* [mm] 481 - 1073 501 - 1097 522 - 1297
Diameter of traction sheave DT [mm] 320 / 360 360 / 400 320 / 360 / 440
Diameter of ropes d [mm] 8 / 10 8 / 10 / 11
Vibration isolation elements Yes
Adapter plat Yes
Rope guard optional Yes
Manual release optional Yes
* ASL-dimension is dependent on the traction sheave
Further special frames on request. Contact us!
Mini-Gearless
Modernisation solution "Geared to Gearless"

Gearless
DAF210 DAF270
A flexible solution, adjustable to the specific situation of the machine room
Existing situation Possible solution
Szenario 1
Geared drive with extended shaft (SA9), A gearless drive is installed in the al-
Traction sheave located in the lift shaft ready existing opening. The machine
and machine room located beside the frame is especially designed to provi-
lift shaft. de support upwards and downwards.
Szenario 2
Geared drive is mounted below the lift The gearless machine frame is es-
shaft, the machine room is located pecially designed for rope departure
under the lift shaft, rope departure in in upward direction. A support with
upward direction. isolations is included.
Szenario 3
Geared drive is mounted above the lift The gearless machine frame is
shaft, the machine room is located abo- especially designed for a rope
vethe lift shaft, rope departure in down- departure in downward direction. A
ward direction. support with isolations is included.
64 Issue 09/2015
Mini-Gearless
Modernisation solution "Geared to Gearless"

Example with DAF210L
Rope departure in downward direction:
Gearless
Rope departure in upward direction:
Advantages of this example:
Energy-efficient Gearless Technology

No additional safety gears required as the brake of the machine
is certified for the overspeed in upward direction
no replacement of the rope pulleys in the lift shaft required
Usage parameters:
Q 630 kg / 2:1 / 1,0 m/s / diameter = 520 mm / 13 mm ropes
66 Issue 09/2015
ModKit
MO61
Solutions with PMC Gearless
Gearless
AS
L5
55
- 76
5m
m
MO61 D4
Techn. specifications 70
Rope suspension 1:1, 2:1
Scope of supply 72
MO61 S
Technical Data 73
Dimensions 74
MO61 CRX
The solution for plastic-coated ropes 75
ModKit
MO61 D4
Product Description
The powerful system solution in the modernisation of installations

Gearless
up to 1000 kg / 1.0 m/s (1:1) or up to 1000 kg / 1.6 m/s (2:1).
Safety Sustainability Scope of supply
Type-approved safety brake Small quantities of lubricants used and Gearless drive:
EN 81-A3 compliant no oil change required Gearless PMC145-2
Integrated device for pulling out of the Rolling bearings, life-time lubrication Machine base frame with elements for
safety gear (optional) vibration isolation
Innovation Additionally for 2:1: integrated rope
Efficiency Well-conceived, flexible solution with suspension and universal diverter pulley
High level of efficiency of up to 92% integrated deflecting pulleys, rope fixing mounting for car and counterweight
provides for low energy consumption points and mountings on elevator car / Protective covers on traction sheave
Ideally suited for energy recovery counterweight and diverter pulleys in acc. with EN 81-1
Drives optimally matched to the lower to inclusive
Comfort middle power segment
Minimal noises and very smooth running Ideal for use in modernisation in ex- Reliability
Outstanding ride comfort, e.g. in com- change for a geared drive in the machine All installed components and parts are
bination with a matched frequency in- room, general without structural adapta- high quality
verter from LiftEquip tions Ensuring a rapid and long lasting spare
parts availability
IAvailable in versions for 1:1 or 2:1 rope suspension:
As a rule the previous ceiling openings can

be used to feed through the ropes with the
machine base frame that can be individual-
ly adapted to the existing project planning.
This avoids costly structural measures.
Suspension 1:1 Suspension 2:1
Available in left- or right-hand version::
Left-hand version Right-hand version
68 Issue 09/2015
ModKit
MO61 D4
Product Description
Powerful and compact particu-larly favourable conditions for long-
Gearless
Exclusively the modern, tried-and-tested life design are therefore satisfied.
synchronous gearless drives of the
PMC145-2 and PMC170 series are used in The PMC gearless drives have a type-
the ModKit MO61. approved safety brake in accordance with
EN 81-1 subclause 9.10 and a protection
The low-noise and low-vibration drives op- device against unintentional elevator car
erate at air-borne noise levels of less than movement in accordance with EN 81-1:
60 dB(A). The efficiency levels extend up to 1988+A3: 2009. This eliminates the need
Gearless PMC145-2 92% and are therefore particularly efficient during modernisation for additional meas-
in both driving and generator operation ures, e.g. retrofits on the elevator car or a
with energy recovery. The PMC drives are rope brake.
designed for 180 trips per hour with a duty
cycle of 50% and can therefore easily cope
with high traffic volumes.
The traction sheaves have a diameter of

240 mm with wearresistant, hardened seat
grooves. Ropes with diameters of 6 mm are
used. The ratio between traction sheave
diameter and rope diameter is thus always
40. In accordance with the standards the
Increase your installation's energy
efficiency with the ModKit MO61
High energy efficiency
The perfect combination: The frequency inverters from LiftEquip are

MFC and MFR frequency inverters specially designed for the strict re-quire-
The ModKit MO61 is rounded off if required ments in elevator construction. The high
by a compact, optimally matched MFC clock frequency and control quality ensure
series frequency inverter in which all the a high degree of smooth running of the
drive parameters of the gearless drive are drive and low noise development.
already stored.
If required, you can operate the drive with

an MFR series frequency inverter with
integrated energy recovery unit. When the
drive is in generator operation, electrical
energy is fed back to the in-house system
and additionally increases the efficiency of
your installation.
MFR frequency inverter,
Webcode 2069from the wide product range
ModKit
MO61 D4 Technical specifications Rope suspension 1:1

with PMC145-2
Gearless
Rope suspension 1:1
(wrap angle on example with RCD =1400)

Openings and load points in the machine room Rope progression
Centre of counterweight Centre of elevator

car frame
Dimensions in mm
Performance chart (rope suspension 1:1)

Nominal load max Q [kg] 320 450 630
Nominal speed v [ms] 0.6 - 1.0 0.6 - 1.0 1.6 0.6 - 1.0
Drive, gearless PMC 145-2M 145-2L 145-2XL 145-2L
Rope suspension r 1:1
Travel height*. FH [m] 33 25
Car weight min./max. FK [m] 300 - 650 400 - 900 650 - 900
Rope clearance dimension SAM [mm] 600 - 1400
Diameter, traction sheave DT [mm] 240
Suspension ropes n x dS [mm] 8x6 12 x 6
Diameter, diverter pulleys DA [mm] 240
Weight, drive mA [kg] 172 216 229 216
Weight, sling mR [kg] max. 150
*approximate value
70 Issue 09/2015
ModKit
MO61 D4, Technical specifications Rope suspension 2:1

with PMC145-2
Gearless
Rope suspension 2:1
Openings and load points P in the machine room Rope progression

(wrap angle on example with RCD = 1250)
Centre of counterweight Centre of elevator

car frame
Dimensions in mm
Performance chart (rope suspension 2:1)

Nominal load max Q [kg] 630 1000
Nominal speed v [mm] 0.6 - 1.0 1.05 - 1.6 0.6 - 1.0 1.05 - 1.6
Drive, gearless PMC - 145-2M 145-2XM 145-2L 145-2XL
Rope suspension r 2:1
Travel height* FH [m] 33
Car weight min./max. FK [m] 600 - 1200 870 - 1450
Rope clearance dimension SAM [mm] 750 - 1400
Diameter, traction sheave DT [mm] 240
Suspension ropes n x dS [mm] 9x6 12 x 6
Diameter, diverter pulleys DA [mm] 240
Weight, drive mA [kg] 172 189 216 229
Weight, sling mR [kg] max. 150
*approximate value
ModKit
MO61 D4
Scope of Supply
We supply a flexible modification set, consisting of the components

Gearless
Permanent-magnet, gearless synchronous machine:

Gearless PMC 145-2
Machine base frame with vibration isolation elements, in acc. with VDI 2566
- for rope suspension 1:1
- for rope suspension 2:1, integrated rope end fastening points, rope anchorages
- Machine base frames are individually manufactured to the desired rope clearance
dimension RCD
- Both versions (1:1 and 2:1) are available in the left- or right-hand version
Integrated plastic rope deflecting pulleys
Variant for rope suspension 1:1:
- Optional: Universal, highly flexible mounting with rope fixing points for car and counter
weight
Variant for rope suspension 2:1:
- Universal, highly flexible mounting with diverter pulleys for car and counterweight
- Complete rope kit: suspension ropes with dia. 6 mm, expert's report, conformity-tested Integrated device for pulling the car out of the safety
with Directive 95/16/EC Lifts / Elevator Directive, all rope accessories gear (optional)
Optional:
- Handwinding wheel
- Device for pulling the car out of the safety gear
- Optimally matched MFC or MFR series frequency inverter
Diverter pulley mounting for car and counterweight

(suspension 2:1)
Universal diverter pulley mounting

The pulley supports are fixed to the top beam of the elevator car sling and to the counter-
weight. The freely rotatable suspension enables the diverter pulley to be mounted to match
the rope suspension so that the ropes are not subjected to twisting.
Mounting on car sling,

variable adaptation dep.
on mounting profiles
Mounting on counterweight,
variable adaptation dep.
on frame profiles
72 Issue 09/2015
ModKit
MO61 S
Technical Data
Gearless
Option:
with handwinding wheel
Option: manual release
AS
L5
55
- 76
5m
m
Technical Data
Type of Machine PMC145-2 M, PMC145-2 L
Suspension r 1:1
Rated load Q [kg] up to 675
Rated speed v [m/s] 1,0
Rope departure at drive flexible ASL [mm] from 555 to 765
Diameter of traction sheave DT [mm] 210 / 240
Diameter of ropes d [mm] 6 / 6,5 *
Groove clearance RA [mm] 10
Number of ropes max. 12
Number of grooves max. z 12
Type of groove seat / v-groove
No. of switching operations 180
Duty cycle ED % 40
Version of brake 2-surface disc brake (safety brake)
Brake monitoring with microswitch
Protection class IP 21
Pulley diameter DT [mm] 240
* 6,5 mm ropes with special diverter pulley
Pre-assembled machine frame on stock
Machine available from stock
ModKit
MO61 S
Dimensions
Gearless
max.
1
1064 mm
y = 461 mm
2
555 ASL 765 (TS 240 mm)

540 ASL 750 (TS 210 mm)
3
4
External dimension
PMC 145-2 M/L
min. 800 mm
Position of the rubber elements

5
Scope of supply machine frame:

1 Rope cover
2 Console
3 Rubber element
4 Frame telescopable
5 Axle, diverter pulley
74 Issue 09/2015
ModKit
MO61 CRX
The solution for plastic-coated ropes
Compared to steel ropes with the same diameter, plastic-coated
Gearless
ropes have a higher friction coefficient and higher breaking
strength. Thanks to the higher friction coefficient, the forces
required can be transferred at a lower wrap-around angle.
Due to the lower D/d ration when using this rope, it is possible
to use smaller diameter traction sheaves. This means given
the same drive power, greater torque is available with a smaller
traction sheave diameter. An economic solution is possible with
fewer ropes and a smaller drive by using plastic-coated ropes.
EN 81-1 and EN 81-20 only describe the use of steel ropes with
a nominal diameter of at least 8 mm and a D/d ratio of at least
40.
Given the corresponding authorisation and type approval test, it

is possible to deviate from this standard if the measures descri-
bed in the authorisation conditions for use and the requirements
demanded for operation are complied with.
The trend to increasingly small traction sheaves makes it ne-
cessary to look for corresponding solutions with regard to the
traction capacity.
The solution here is the ModKit MO61 CRX for plastic-coated ropes
It consists of the PMC 145-2 drive, with a traction sheave diameter of 150 mm for up to 11 ropes with 6 mm diameter
(manufacturer Drako PTX 300) or up to 6 ropes with 8,1 mm diameter (manufacturer Brugg CTP 8.1 G2). The machi-
ne-frame is telescopic and as a result can be adjusted to the required ASL dimension. Insulation elements and rope
protection according to EN 81-20 are included in delivery.
Technical Data
Type of Machine PMC 145-2
Suspension r 1:1
Rated load Q [kg] 630
Mass of car F [kg] 900
Rated speed v [m/s] 1,0
ASL-Ma [mm] 500 ASL 1400
Diameter of traction sheave DT [mm] 150
Diameter of ropes d [mm] 6 8,1
Number of ropes max. 7 6
Type of rope DRAKO PTX 300 Brugg CTP 8.1 G2
Number of grooves max. z 11 6
Groove-type Round groove
(Sample configuration)
ModKit
MO61 CRX
Gearless
Technical notes on the use of plastic-

coated steel ropes
The requirements for the area of use,

ambient conditions and state of wear are
described in the particular type approval
certificate for the rope. Among other things,
the replacement criteria depend on a speci-
fied number of travels or duration of use. For
this purpose it is necessary that the travel
number (change of direction) is recorded by
a manipulation-proof trip meter and that the
lift is immobilised upon reaching this travel
number. The ropes must be checked for
wear and damage; here too the discard cri-
teria defined in the type approval certificate
must be observed.
The traction sheaves and rope pulleys have

a groove profile corresponding to the infor-
mation of the rope supplier.
Calculation of the traction capacity must be

performed according to the requirements in
EN 81.
The advice of the rope supplier provided on

storage, transport, handling, mounting and
operation of the ropes must be observed. In
particular, the ropes must be secured against
twisting and the special information of the
rope supplier regarding diagonal pull com-
plied with
76 Issue 09/2015
Compact-Gearless
SC-Series
Gearless
SC300/400
Compact-Gearless
SC300 and SC400 EN81-

20/ -50
-conform
Gearless
SC300 SC400
The synchronous COMPACT-Gearless is available in several power classes Super Quiet Machine
SC 300 is our workhorse for superior ranging from 19.4 kW up to 48.6 kW and Thanks to its excellent efficiency the SC 300
lifts. Capable of rated loads up to IP20 as standard protection class. can pass on an additional ventilation. This
1600kg with 2:1 suspension or for results in a comfortable low sound-pressure
operating speeds up to 3.5m/s. level.
The synchronous COMPACT- Compact Design
Gearless SC 400 is the drive for As synchronous machine with a mono-
bloc housing the SC-Series is very space- Package Solution
high-speed lifts and heavy loads.
saving in both the S- an the M-version. High precision machine frames facilitate
Capable of rated loads up to 2750 kg the construction of lifts with double wrap. If
with 2:1 suspension or for operating desired you can also obtain a frame for single
speeds up to 4.0 m/s. Double Safety wrap.
The type-tested dual-circuit disc brake
ensures safety at the best. This device is
Excellent Motor Control certified as safety brake according to the Maintenance-Free
The vector controlled, synchronous European standard for lifts EN 81-A3. An Due to its design our COMPACT-Gearless has
machines with permanent magnet exci- additional and costly braking system for a small number of mechanical components.
tation are known for outstanding driving upwards braking operation is thus not In addition, since no oil is needed, a posi-
comfort. They are available in several tive effect on maintenance and product life is
necessary.
power classes ranging from 10 kW up achieved.
to 24.8 kW and as standard in protec-
tion class IP 43 for SC300. The SC400
Rated load Rated speed Rated load Rated speed Traction

Machine Suspension Machine Suspension
Q [kg] v [m/s] Q [kg] v [m/s] sheave
1)
1000 1,0 - 2,5 SC400S 1000 4
SC300S 1350 2,5
900 3,0 1:1
SC400M 1250 3
2:1 1800 1,0
1000 4
SC300M 1600 1,6 - 2,5 2000 2
1250 3,0 - 3,5 SC400S 1700 3 560
1400 4
Machine Drive with Traction sheave [kg] 2:1 2750 2
SC300S ca. 565 kg 2500 2,5
SC400M
SC300M ca. 665 kg 2000 4
SC400S ca. 1230 kg 1600 4
1) Reduced travel height
SC400M ca. 1315 kg
78 Issue 09/2015
Compact-Gearless
SC300 and SC400
Gearless
Produktkatalog Technische Daten - Compact gearless
SC300 on
Compact gearless Machine frame
.4.2 Mablatt Maschine SC300M

SC300
duktkatalog Technische Daten - Compact gearless SC400

mpact gearless SC400
Mablatt
SC400
Abbildung 3-2: Mablatt SC300M
Positionsbeschreibung zu Abbildung 3-2

1 mit Option 2.Geber 2 Handlftung Bremse
3 Mitte Treibscheibe - Schwerpunkt
80 Issue 09/2015
External Rotor Gearless
DAB-Series
Gearless
DAB 450, 530
DAB450 EN81-
20/ -50
-conform
Gearless
Technical Data DAB450*

Machine DAB450S DAB450L DAB450S DAB450L
Rated load Q [kg] 1150 1600 2400 2000 2400 2200
Rated speed v [m/s] 3,5 / 4,0 3,0 - 4,0 2,5 3,0 3,5 4,0
Diameter Traction Sheave DT [mm] 600 660
max. Numbers of Grooves z 16 x 13/14 // 16 x 1/ 2
Type of Groove seat / vee / semicircular groove
Rated Power PN [kW] 27,5 / 30,3 28,5 / 38,8 40 52 54
Rated Torque MN [Nm] 2340 / 2280 2840 / 2920 2400 2200 2445 2220
permitted radial Axle Load [kN] 360
Weight [kg] 2300 2650 2300 2650
Number of Operations 240
Duty Cycle % 60
Rated Current IN [A] 56 / 56 57 / 76 72 97 96
Output Factor cos 0,77 / 0,83 0,78 0,84 0,77 0,81
Version of Brake external dual circuit shoe brake
Brake Monitoring temperature monitoring
Protection Class IP20
* Standard values
82 Issue 09/2015
EN81- DAB530
20/ -50
-conform
Gearless
Technical DataDAB530*
Machine DAB530L DAB530XL
Rated load Q [kg] 2400 2250 5000 4500 4700 4100
Rated speed v [m/s] 3,5 4,0 2,0 2,5 3,5 4,0
Diameter Traction Sheave DT [mm] 700 740
max. Numbers of Grooves z 20 x 16 // 20 5/8 // 14 x 18
Type of Groove seat / vee / semicircular groove
Rated Power PN [kW] 50,6 57,5 64,0 77,3 88,5
permitted radial Axle Load [kN] 450
Weight [kg] 4000 4300
Number of Operations 240
Duty Cycle % 60
Rated Current IN [A] 103 106 115 132 169 164
Output Factor cos 0,77 0,82 0,83 0,86 0,77 0,8
Version of Brake external dual circuit shoe brake
Brake Monitoring temperature monitoring
Protection Class IP20
* Standard values
Colouring
Colouring for all Drives

and machine frame
Drives
RAL 7021 Black grey RAL 7005 Mouse grey
Colour of the machine base frames
The paintwork of drives is the environmentally friendly The machine base frames will continue to be supplied
hydro-paint in the colour RAL 7021 (Black grey). with a high-quality powder coating in a colour similar
to RAL 7005 (Mouse grey). A polyester epoxy powder
Advantages of the new hydro-paint: mix with a coating thickness of approx. 60 m is used.
Two-component water-based paint with higher Galvanised add-on parts are not painted.
impact strength
Complies with the VOC Directive (Volatile This changeover means that the drives and the optional
Organic Compounds) and thus very environ- machine base frame will consistently have a technologi-
mentally compatible cally superior and environmentally compatible surface
Resistant to solvents, alkaline solutions and coating. It will also lend the entire drive unit an even
synthetic oils more attractive appearance.

84 Issue 09/2015
Drive Accessories
Drive Accessories
Drive Assessories
Brake control for operational brakes 86
BS3 87
BSV2 and BSV4 88
BSV1 89
UCM-Modul incl. Shaft Encoder 90
Drive Accessories
Brake Control for Operational Brakes and NBS

In gearless and geared drives
Drive Assessories
The operational brakes and NBS systems of the gearless and geared drives are closed in de-energised condition.
To enable the brake to be opened, the brake magnets of the two brake circuits must be energised. Depending on the
brake design, the brake is opened with high-speed excitation and kept open with reduced voltage. There are also
brakes that are opened without high-speed excitation.
Selection of the brake control for different brakes depends on the high-speed excitation voltage and holding voltage
required and the current needed.
The table below shows the assignment of the drives with brakes to the different brake controls:
Overview Drive accessories

BS 3 (50-60 Hz) BSV 2 BSV 2 (60 Hz) BSV 4 (207/144V) BSV 1 (50-60 Hz)
6510 000 9263 65 100 27 68 0 6510 000 9262 6510 000 92 65 65 000 06 67 0
Gear Brake: Gear Brake: Gear Brake: PMC 125/145-2

Warner/Kendrion Warner/Kendrion Warner/Kendrion (electrical brake release) SC 400
(not W332C) (not W332C) (not W332C) PMC 170
DAF (210/270) DAF (210/270)

DAF (Mini Gearless)
only ships only ships DAF270 (2x2200 Nm)
(not DAF270 2x2200 Nm)
(not DAF270 2x2200Nm) (not DAF270 2x2200Nm)
SC 300 SC 300 SC 300 W332C

PMC (manually PMC (manually
PMC (manually
released) released) DAB 450/530
released)
only ships only ships
PMC (electrical brake
release 207/144V)
When using the drives with the MFC 30/31-xx inverters in plug&play design or MFR, the brake control is integrated in
the inverter.
The different brake controls with their technical data are described below.
86 Issue 09/2015
Drive Accessories
BS3
Drive Assessories
Brake control 3 serves to activate brake magnets for ele-
vator drives.
Design
Brake control 3 consists of a control board, an integrated
power filter and the
connection terminals for mounting on a top hat rail.
Operation
The direct voltage required for the brake magnets is ge-
nerated via a bridge
rectifier and downstream pulse width modulation with
output filter. A varistor
protection circuit is provided at the output.
An integrated power filter ensures compliance with the
EMC limit values.
Technical Data
Part number: 6510 000 9263
Nominal system voltage: 230 V AC
Line fuse
230V F,4AT
(glass fuse on the PCB)
Frequency of system voltage: 48-63 Hz

180/90V
207/103V
Braking voltages: 207/144V
overexcitation continously on 180V or 207V
additional freely programmable braking voltage
Nominal output current: 1,5 A
Maximum output current: 3 A (for overexcitation time, max. 2 sec.)
Switch ON duration: 100 % ED; 60% ED with continuous overexcitation
Level of protection: IP20
Ambient operating temperature: 0 - 50C
Relative air humidity: no condensation 1095%r.H., annual mean 70 %
Max. site altitude above sea level: 1000 m without derating
EMC check: compliance with EN 12015 and EN 12016
Mounting: top hat rail
Dimensions (LxBxH) 170 x 125 x 78 mm
Weight approx. 1,00 kg
Drive Accessories
BSV2 and BSV4

Drive Assessories
The brake control 2 and 4 is used to activate brake

magnets for elevator drives with rated currents of
0.25 - 1.25 A
Structure
The brake control 2 and 4 consists of a control
board, a power filter and the connection terminals.
The components are mounted on a steel bracket
and covered with a perspex sheet to prevent human
contact with live parts.
Operation
The direct current for the brake magnets is genera-
ted via a semi-controlled bridge rectifier. The bridge
rectifier is activated by a phase-control module. The
bridge rectifier is equipped with a free wheeling diode as well as a varistor protection circuit at the output. An integra-
ted power filter ensures compliance with the EMC limit values. After applying the mains voltage (230 V AC), there is
an output voltage according to Table 1 at the output of terminal 10 - and terminal 20 + . Connecting connections 10
and 22 reduces the output voltage after approx. 1 second to approx. retentive voltage.
Technical data Brake control 2 and brake control 4

Brake control 2 Brake control 2 60Hz Brake control 4
Part number 65 100 27 68 0 6510 000 9262 6510 0009265
Nominal system voltage: 230VAC
Line fuse
230V F 3,15A
(glass fuse on the PCB)
Frequency of system voltage: 50Hz 60Hz 50Hz
Output voltage (retentive voltage)* 90V 90V 144V
Overexcitation voltage* 180V 180V 200V
Output current max. 2,5A
Activation period 100% ED
Type of protection IP00
Ambient operating temperature 0 - 50C
Relative air humidity: max. 70%
max. site altitude amsl 2000m without derating (derating above this to 3500m: derating 1% pro 100m
EMV check The requirements of EN 12015 and EN 12016 are complied with
Dimensions L*B*H 180mm*120mm*103mm
Weight 1,1 kg
* all data refer to the rated connection voltage
88 Issue 09/2015
Drive Accessories
BSV1
Drive Assessories
The brake control BSV1 is designed for activating
brake magnets at rated currents of 2.0 A to 7.8 A.
With BSV 1 the preselected current will always
flow independent of line voltage fluctuations. The
effective force of the brake magnets and conse-
quently their noise response during activation can
be influenced by means of the current to be set
through jumpers.
Configuration
The brake control BSV1 consists of the power part,
the control board and the filter board. All parts are
mounted on a heat sink, including the terminals
for the main connections. The heat sink is isolated
from the remaining assemblies and is applied to
protective earth potential (PE). The heat sink is
also used for fastening the assembly in the control
cabinet.
Mode of operation
BSV1 is designed as current controller and has PI characteristic. The reference current value is generated on the
control board. The desired continuous current (which normally corresponds to the holding current of the brake re-
lease magnets) is preselected by means of jumpers J1 and J2 in increments of 0.2 A in the range of 2 A to 7.8 A.
Technical data of BSV1
Part number 65 000 06 67 0
230 V AC 15% to 400 V AC + 10%, 2- phase or phase N (note operating
Nominal system voltage:
conditions of connected brake release magnets)
Frequency of system voltage: 50 Hz bzw. 60 Hz
Supply voltage for internal power
230V AC + 10% / - 15%, 50/60 Hz
supply:
Continuous (stabilized) current is equivalent to holding current of brake: 2A
Output current:
to 7.8 A, to be preselected in increments of 0.2 A.
(Stabilized) pick-up current: Twice the value of the preselected continuous current for one second
Mode of operation: S4
Activation period: 75% ED
Max. operating frequency: 260 circuits / hour
Type of protection: IP00
Ambient operating temperature: 0C to 45C
Relative air humidity: max. 70%
2000 m without derating derating of 1% per 100m above
max. site altitude amsl:
2000 m to 3500 m
compliance with requirements of EN 12015 (interference) and
EMV check:
EN 12016 (immunity).
Dimensions L*B*H: 165 x 200 x 93 mm
Weight 2,2 kg
UCM-Modul
Incl. Shaf Encoder

Drive Assessories
Control
The twin encoder is mounted in the shaft.

Our mounting-set consists of:
An universal fixing for the guide rails

Toothed belt (length depends on the travel height) for the encoder drive
Diverter pulleys for the shaft pit.
The UCM-module has to be integrated in to the control. Due to the small

dimensions of the module the installation is very easy and doesnt pose any
problems.
For the operation with an overspeed governor an additional emergency

power supply is neccessary. Therefore the governor doesnt stop the machi-
ne in case of power breakdown unless there is no error message.
Gearless machine Geared machine incl. NBS Geared machine without NBS Hydraulic
1:1
- Bucher DSV-A3 valve
- Stopping the machine - Stopping the machine
stopps the flow at the
- Activating the UCM - Activating the UCM
piston
brake device brake device
- Stopping the machine

- activates locking
device
- activates safety gear 2:1
- activates locking device
- activates safety gear
90 Issue 09/2015
UCM-Modul
Incl. Shaft Encoder
Drive Assessories
With our type-examination tested combination of UCM-module and twin shaft
encoder, fulfillment of EN81-A3 is very easy.
This solution can be integrated very fast and easy in rope elevators and also in
hydraulic elevators.
Thanks to its autonomous operation the module can be used universally with
almost any controller and EN81/A3 certified emergency stop facilities.
Technical data
Supply voltage 24V
Power consumption 4W
Safety circuit voltage 230V
Triggering speed max. 0,2 m/s
Triggering distance max. 100 mm
Triggerung time max. 50 ms
Speed max. 3,5 m/s
Type of incremental encoder HTL-1024 Imp./U.
Travel height 55 m (higher travel heights on request)
And thats how it works:
The device monitors the movement of the car through two independent evaluation channels. The
speed and traveling distance are monitored as from the start of the travel operation. As soon as
the door contact is interrupted and the speed exceeds a value of 0.2 m/s, or the covered distance
is greater than 100 mm, safety relays will be turned off.
The redundant encoder system consists of two encoders and has a belt crack monitoring incl.
safety switch.
92 Issue 09/2015
Frequency Inverter
MFC and MFR
Frequency Inverter
MFC 20/21, Product description 94
MFC 30/31, Product description 96
MFR 5.5, 7.5, 18, with Regeneration
Plug & Play Cable sets 101
Frequency Inverter
MFC 20/21
Frequency Inverter
Current vector-controlled frequency inverters from LiftE-

quip are designed for controlling asynchronous (MFC 20) or
synchronous (MFC 21) drives.
Frequency inverter package

In addition to the inverter, it contains the mains filter and the
power choke for connecting to TN, TT and IT power supply sys-
tems. The connection is established via the parallel or the DCP
interface. The braking resistor is supplied in a separate housing.
Safe evacuation and maintenance

In the event of failure of the power supply, a single-phase UPS
(uninterruptible power supply) enables emergency operation. If,
during maintenance, the controller is switched-off and the opera-
tional brake of a synchronous gearless machine is released, an
optional coasting device limits the car speed to safe values by
connecting an additional resistor.
Fast start-up
The data sets of our motors are stored entirely in the device. You
can thus easily and quickly select the relevant motor. Special and
time-consuming motor parameterisation is thereby avoided. The
motor data of third-party motors is determined through autotun-
ing.
Simple parameter entry

The MFC 20/21 inverter is equipped with a control panel with
a two-line LCD display. Parameters such as speed, accelera-
tion, jerk, rated motor speed, number of encoder marks, traction
sheave diameter, etc., can be entered directly in physical values
94 Issue 09/2015
Frequency Inverter
MFC 20/21
Frequency Inverter
Technical data
Inverter type MFC 20/21-... 15 32 48 60 105
Motor power [kW] 7,5 14 24,5 28,5 49
INPUT DATA (MAINS SIDE)
Line voltage range [V] 3 AC 380, -10 % bis 415, +10 %
Nominal input current [A] 16 27 43 52 92
Maximum input current [A] 26 42 64 95 145
Line fuses AFF (external)* [A] 25 40 63 80 125 **
Conductor cross section [mm] 2,5 6 10 16 25
OUTPUT DATA (MOTOR SIDE)
Nominal output voltage [V] 3 AC 350
Nominal output current, Irated [A] 18 32 50 60 115
Maximum output current for 10 s, Imax [A] 30 48 75 110 180
Nominal output power [kVA] 11 20 31 36 70
Maximum output power for 10 s [kVA] 18,5 30 46 60 110
Conductor cross section [mm] 2,5 6 10 16 35
Loss at rated power [W] 350 600 900 1200 2100
Total efficiency 0,97 0,97 0,97 0,97 0,97
MECHANICAL DATA
Width [mm] 305 305 330 334 440
Height [mm] 345 345 460 523 900
Depth [mm] 207 207 223 295 278
Additional for connector [mm] + 70 + 70 + 70 0 0
Minimum top / bottom clearance [mm] 100 / 100
Fan power, free blowing [m/h] 140 140 360 360 620
Weight [kg] 17 18 26 35 59
* Duty class gR
** Line fuse internal class gRL
Frequency Inverter
MFC 30/31
Frequency Inverter
Plug&Play current vector-controlled frequency inverters from

LiftEquip are the optimal addition for controlling asynchronous
(MFC 30) or synchronous (MFC 31) drives.
Ready-to-install inverter package

In addition to the inverter, it contains the brake controller, the mains
filter, the power choke and the travel contactors completely wired
and integrated in the housing for connection to TN, TT and IT power
supply systems. The connection is established via the parallel or the
DCP interface. The braking resistor is supplied in a separate housing.
EN81-A3
With integrated speed monitoring and the standard HSD circuit board,
our MFC 30/31 frequency inverter, when used together with a suit-
able controller, is ideal for satisfying the requirements of EN81-A3.
Safe evacuation and maintenance

In the event of a power failure, emergency operation is possible via
a UPS (uninterruptible power supply). If, during maintenance, the
controller is switched-off and the operational brake of a synchronous
gearless machine is released, an optionally available coasting device
limits the car speed by connecting an additional resistor.

The MFC 30/31 inverter is equipped with a control panel with a two-
line LCD display. Parameters such as speed, acceleration, jerk, rated
motor speed, number of encoder marks, traction sheave diameter,
etc., can be entered directly in physical values.
Additional safety
Our inverter package controls the release of the operational brake
via the integrated control unit. The brake monitoring switches of our
drives (version SA3) for evaluating the brake condition must be con-
nected to the controller in accordance with EN 81. The integrated
travel contactors are also monitored for "switching of the contactors
after change of run direction" as set out in EN 81.
Fast start-up
The data sets of our motors are stored entirely in the device. The mo-
tor data of third-party motors is determined through autotuning.
96 Issue 09/2015
Frequency Inverter
MFC 30/31
Frequency Inverter
Technical data
Inverter type MFC 30/31-... 10 15 26 40 60 50R 100R 155R 310R
Motor power [kW] 5 7,5 11 18 28,5 18 36 60 105
Input data (mains side)
Line voltage range [V] 3 AC 380, -10 % bis 415, +10 %
Nominal input current [A] 10 16 23 34 52 36 72 105 180
Maximum input current [A] 17 26 38 55 95 85 170 315 630
Line fuses AFF (internal) [A] 25* 25 40 63 80 80 135 315 400
Conductor cross section [mm] 2,5 2,5 4 6 16 10 25 35 95
Output data (motor side)
Nominal output voltage [V] 3 AC 350 - 10 3 AC 440 3 AC 450
Nominal output current, Irated [A] 12 18 27 42 60 35 64 104 180
Maximum output current for 10 s, Imax [A] 18 30 43 67 110 75 150 225 450
Nominal output power [kW] 7,2 11 16 25 36 24 48 81 140
Maximum output power for 10 s [kVA] 11 18,5 26 40 60 51 102 187 375
Conductor cross section [mm] 2,5 2,5 4 10 16 6 16 35 95 / 2x35
Loss at rated power [W] 220 330 500 800 1200 1500 3000 6000 6000
Total efficiency 0,97 0,97 0,97 0,97 0,97 0,94 0,94 0,94 0,94
Mechanical data
Width [mm] 244 309 309 333 344 401 600 1000 1400
Height [mm] 387 715 715 1090 1263 1105 1950 2200 2200
Depth [mm] 260 263 263 270 340 284 470 600 600
Fan power, free blowing [m/h] 80 140 140 360 360 360 700 1000 1000
Weight [kg] 19 35 38 55 81 80 195 460 750
* Line fuses AFF (external), duty class gR
Frequency Inverter
MFR 5.5, 7.5, 18

with regeneration
Frequency Inverter
A very compact device for inverter and regenerative mode
The patented, energy-regenerating MFR frequency invert-

ers from LiftEquip are the optimal addition for the energy-
efficient control of synchronous drives.
Ready-to-install inverter package
The MFR frequency inverters include energy recovery, elec-
tronic brake controllers, mains filter, power choke and the
electronic travel contactors. Control takes place via parallel,
DCP or CANopen interface.
EN81-A3
Electronic travel contactors and an electronic brake control-
ler (within the standard scope of supply) enable a uniquely
fast shutdown time of the drive. With our integrated speed
monitoring and a suitable controller, you have the safest
and fastest solution for satisfying EN81-A3.
Energy-saving function
In addition to energy recovery, our MFR inverters also offer
the possibility to further save energy in standby mode (ap-
prox. 17 watt).
The MFC inverter is equipped with a control panel with a
two-line LCD display. Parameters such as speed, accelera-
tion, jerk, rated motor speed, number of encoder marks,
traction sheave diameter, etc., can be entered directly in
physical values. Remote parameterisation via DCP and
CANopen is possible.
Additional safety
Our inverter package controls the release of the operational
brake via the integrated control unit. The brake monitoring
switches of our drives, for evaluating the brake condition,
can be connected to the inverter in accordance with EN 81.
Interfaces
Fast start-up
The data sets of our motors are stored entirely in the device. CANopen
Third-party motors can be matched to the inverter by enter- - Position Mode
ing the motor data. - Velocity Mode
DCP
- 03
- 04
Parallel
The motor parameters can be programmed on re-

quest.
98 Issue 09/2015
Frequency Inverter
MFR 5.5, 7.5, 18

with regeneration
Frequency Inverter
Technical data
Inverter type MFR 5.5 7.5 18
Motor power [kW] 5,5 7,5 18,5
INPUT DATA (MAINS SIDE)
Line voltage range [V] 3 AC 380, -10 % up to 460, +15 %
Line frequency [Hz] nominal 50, range 48 ... 63
Continuous input current (thermal) [A] 10 14 36
Maximum input current [A] 20 30 75
OUTPUT DATA (MOTOR SIDE)
Nominal output voltage [V] 3 AC 0input voltage (max. 340 V
for motor design)
Nominal output current, Irated [A] 12 18 42
Maximum output current for 3 s, Imax [A] 21,8 33,5 75
Maximum output power for 3 s [kVA] 11,5 17,5 35
Conductor cross section [mm] 2,5 2,5 10
Loss at rated power [W] 350 500 1200
Total efficiency 0,95 0,95 0,95
Type of protection IP21
MECHANICAL DATA
Width [mm] 330 330 353
Height [mm] 614,5 614,5 971,8
Depth [mm] 196 196 207,5
Minimum top / bottom clearance [mm] 0/100 100/100
Fan power, free blowing [m/h] 140 140 300
Weight [kg] 18,4 18,4 43,5
Radio interference (emission) according to EN12015

Immunity to EN12016
Power dissipation in standby mode max. 17 W
PlugPlay device (complete inverter with regeneration)
100 Issue 09/2015
Plug & Play Cable sets
Accessories MFC 30/31
Frequency Inverter
Cable W1 Cable W2 Cable W3
Cable W5 Cable W10 Cable W11
DIN-rail plug XE1, XE2, XE3 Shield clamps 4mm, 7mm, 8mm
Do you want to save assembly time?
Do you want to avoid unnecessary error diagnostic caused by clamp faults?
Use our Plug&Play cable sets
With these completely ready-for-use cable sets our MFC frequency inverters are ready for operation
at your installation rapidly. You can connect DCP3/DCP4 and the parallel interface with your control
system fast and safely. All necessary accessories, such as DIN-rail plugs and shield clamps, are
included in our cable sets.
Content Cable Sets (Length: 10 meter)

Type of interface Parallel DCP 03/04 Lisa
8807 308 10 200 8807 308 10 100 8807 308 10 300
Cable W1 Control Voltage X X X
Cable W2 X1a X X X
Cable W3 X1b X X X
Cable W5 DCP --- X ---
Cable W10 Floor Selection --- --- X
Cable W11 Brake --- --- X
DIN-rail plug XE1 10-pin female connector X X X
DIN-rail plug XE2 7-pin female connector X X X
DIN-rail plug XE3 14-pin male connector X X X
shield-clamps 4mm, for Cable W5 --- X ---
shield-clamps 4mm, for Cable W10 --- --- X
shield-clamps 7mm, for Cable W3 X X X
shield-clamps 8mm, for Cable W2 X X X
102 Issue 09/2015
Car Sling
Car Sling TCS

The flexible one for medium loads
Car Sling
TCS25/40/60
Weight mass 105
Car Sling
TCS 25/40/60
Product Description
Car Sling
Our car sling TCS is designed for

safety gear masses mges up to High Safety
a maximum of 6500 kg depending

on cabin width, operating speed
and car sling type. Progressive Safety
Gear, upwards
Great Stability
Multiple bent sheet steel profiles in
the top and bottom beam ensure the Progressive Safety Gear, Down
required stability. Polyamide-pulleys

are used with suspension 2:1.
Variable Height Adjustment Variable

Height Adjustment
The side beams consist of 2 sheet
Quick and
steel profiles which are screwed to- Easy Assembly
gether. They are fixed at the top and
the bottom beam and a punched grid
allows their length to be adjusted in Optimal Adjustment
to Your Lift
steps of 25 mm.
Excellent Driving Comfort

The cabin is bedded on compression
Excellent
springs, which are mounted in a spe-
Driving Comfort
cially isolated U-profile. This results
in an outstanding vibration isolati-
Great Stability
on. Roller guides instead of sliding
Car Sling TCS 25
guides can be supplied on demand.
Compact Design
With safety gears mounted in the Optimal Adjustment to Your Lift Special Versions
top and the bottom beam compact A great variety of configuration - Load sensor for overload
overall dimensions of the car sling alternatives make an optimal custo- - Rope pulleys for 2:1 suspension fixed
are possible misation to many requests possible. in a pulley carrier on the top beam
Special versions are shown overleaf. - Rope pulley isolation (SA 9)
High Safety - Braking system (upwards, SA 10)
The complete car sling as well as its Colour - Without car isolation for goods lifts
single parts were calculated on the The products shown are available in - Buffer plates in addition
computer with the finite elements mouse-grey - RAL 7005 - as stan- - Extended governor rope end (SA 1)
method (FEM). They are therefore dard and with zinc coated parts. - Travelling cable mounting (SA 11)
verifiably safe! - Compensation chain mounting (SA 11)
Quick and Easy Assembly

The true to size production of all
parts and a small number of com-
ponents permit an easy and quick
assembly in next to no time.
104 Issue 09/2015

Car Sling
TCS 25/40/60
Weight Mass
Car Sling
Car Sling TCS - Gradation in following sizes
TCS 25 TCS 40 TCS 60
Rated load Q [kg] 1600 2000 3200
v [m/s] 1,6 2,5 2,5
mges [kg] 3000 5000 6500
Car width [mm] 900 1600 900 1900 900 2500
Car height [mm] 2200 up to 2700 in a raster of 25 mm
Car Sling TCS 25 CW 900 CW 1100 CW 1300 CW 1600

Suspension 1:1 kg 156 167 178 195
Rope attachm. + Hitch plates kg 40
Suspension 2:1 kg 150 161 172 189

2 Stk. rope pulley 360 - PA/steel kg 39 / 91
Safety gear, buffer plates,

kg 79
sliding guides, car isolation
Braking system SA 10 kg 20

Suspension 1:1 kg 253 267 289 311
Suspension 2:1 kg 241 256 277 299

2 Stk. rope pulley 540 - steel kg 196

kg 144
Braking system SA 10 kg 40

Suspension 1:1 kg 416 446 491 551
Suspension 2:1 kg 416 446 491 551

2 Stk. rope pulley 540 - steel kg 196

kg 144
Braking system 10 kg 40
106 Issue 09/2015
Counterweight
GTK 700/1050/1370
The variable solution for many installation situations
Counterweight
GTK 700/1050/1370
Special Versions 109
Counterweight
GTK 700/1050/1370
Product Description
For a counterweight mass of up to 6460 kg in various versions

Counterweight
The counterweight frames High Safety

calculated for an overall mass
up to 6240 kg (special fillers).
The various necessary widths,
gauges between rails and Quick and Easy
suspensions (1:1 and 2:1) are Assembly
available in the modular sys-

Governor rope anchorange,
tem: top beam Variable Filling
Optimum adjustment to your

installation
With the variations in length,
width and gauge between rails,
the counterweight is an optimum
fit for the most diverse project
planning dimensions. In the stan-
dard versions, the counterweight
frames with rope attachment for
1:1 arrangement or rope pulleys
are available for 2:1 arrange- Great Stability
ment. Besides the standard
gauge between rails of 700, 1050
and 1370 mm, other clearance Optimal Adjustment
dimensions can be produced as to Your Lift
well.
Counterweight frames GTK
Additional options
Various special versions such EN81-1, adjusted to the mass of the shaft.
as sliding and pulley guides, the counterweight, is available in
and a safety gear on the coun- the program. High level of safety
terweight can be selected. For The frame construction of angu-
aesthetic purposes, the counter- Variable filling lar sheet metal profiles in the top
weight can be encased in a glass The two lengths for a multilayer and bottom beams and rein-
shaft. Diverse accessories for filling with max. 30 or 40 levels forced knot junctions and their
the mounting of compensation (a layer is 60 mm) and various connections were calculated and
chains and compensating ropes filler materials such as Gusso- optimised with the Finite Element
are selectable. The path cover in lith, steel and lead allow variable Method (FEM), whereby the
the pit area in compliance with adjustment to the dimensions of necessary proofs of solidity were
also provided.
Counterweight (CW) GTK - Data table 2:1 Filler materials

Width of CW [mm] Total Mass [kg]1 Pulleys [mm] Steel
GTK 700 135 1650 360 Gussolith
GTK 1050 135 2435 360 Concrete
GTK 1050 200 3630 450 / 540 Lead
GTK 1370 270 6240 540
Total Mass (filler+frame)
1
108 Issue 09/2015

Counterweight
GTK 700/1050/1370
Special Versions
Counterweight
Drawing for 2:1 Counterweight Mass
The following approximated values do include
the masses of the counterweight frame, the
hitch plate or the rope pulley, one or two buffer
plates and the sliding guides:
GTK 700/135: 159 kg, 1:1 suspension;
187 kg, 2:1 suspension;
422 kg, 2:1 suspension.
Colour
The products shown are available in mouse-
grey - RAL 7005 - as standard and with zinc
coated parts.
The variable gauges are:

GTK 700/135: 612 gauge 700 mm
GTK 1050/135/200: 701 gauge 1050 mm
GTK 1370/270: 1051 gauge 1370 mm

Special Versions
Roller guides
Rope pulleys for 2:1 suspension fixed
in a pulley carrier on the top beam
Progressive safety gears
(type 0, 1 and 2)
Buffer plates additionally
Panelling of counterweight on one or
on both sides
Compensation chain or compensation
rope mounting
110 Issue 09/2015
Safety Gears
Progressive safety/Braking system
Safety Gears
6071/0 bis /3
Safety Gears
6071/0 bis /3 EN81-

Product Description 20/ -50
-conform
Safety Gears
The safety device can be deployed

as a progressive safety gear or
braking device. They are 2 iden-
tical components but turned in
their installation position by 180,
and depending on how they are
deployed they have a set braking
or gripping force.
In everyday language, the safety
device is also referred to as a jaw.
Functional description
In the event of overspeed, the safety
gear rope connected with the grip
wedge on the safety gear frame is
blocked. The grip wedge is held in
place while the elevator car continues
to move. A transport roller in the grip
wedge draws the grip wedge in the with rated load at the guide rails and Operating mode (dry, oiled)
direction opposing the moving direc- to hold it there (this also applies in
tion of the elevator car on a chamfer Distinction by deployment accor-
the event of failure of the suspension
on the jaw body between the rail and gear). ding to the application
jaw body. In doing so, it expands the The regulations of EN 81-1:98 are to
Safety device / progressive safety
spring range of the jaw body. be adhered to. gear (AFV) for safety gear operation
The jamming effect of the jaw body is downwards.
configured in such a way that the fric-Safety device with function as bra- Progressive safety gears are type
tional forces between the grip wedge, king system (ABV) approved safety devices with type
counter wedge and rail decelerate the On the elevator car, a safety braking approval marking and CE marking
elevator car to a standstill. The jaw is
device is prescribed that takes effect in accordance with EN 81-1:98.
released by moving the elevator car in the upward direction as a protec- The progressive safety gear on the
in the opposite direction. Here, the tion device against overspeed for elevator car may only take effect in
jaw body slips back over the chamfer the elevator car moving upwards. On a downward direction and must be
on the counter wedge until the coun- reaching the tripping speed on the able to brake the loaded elevator car
ter wedge is pressed by the return speed governor, this must be able to from the tripping speed of the speed
spring into its initial situation and thus
brake the empty elevator car at the governor and hold it in place.
releases the rail. guide rails.
The regulations of EN 81-1:98 are to In country-specific certifications you
Safety device with function as pro- be adhered to. hesitate to contact us..
gressive safety gear (AFV)
On the elevator car and when re- Distinction by construction size
quired on the counterweight, a safety In ascending order according to
braking system is prescribed that power output (0, 1, 2, 3), corre-
takes effect in the downward direction sponding to the characteristics:
as a safety device against the risk Mass of car and load
of falling. On reaching the tripping Speed
speed on the speed governor, this Guide rail dimension and surface
must be able to brake the elevator car (drawn, machined)
112 Issue 09/2015

Safety Gears
6071/0 bis /3
Product Description
nleitung Technik
Safety Gears
gvorrichtung/Bremseinrichtung 6071
Technik Item Designation Item Designation

1Jaw body 2Seal wire
Abmessungen 3Seal 4Threaded bolts

5Counter wedge 6Fork element
Matabelle Fangzange 7Guide plate 8Stop bolt
Rechtsausfhrung Linksausfhrung 9Guide bracket 10 Flat countersunk nib bolt
11 Safety gear roller 12 Limit stop
13 Grip wedge 14 Compression spring
15 Spacer sleeve 16 Split pin

17 Slotted nut 18 Spring plate
19 Mounting borehole 20 Name plate

Abb. 4.1-1
g
h
1
Item Designation
f
1Rail blade thickness

2Guide blade width
e
k
i
l m
n
Pos. Bezeichnung
Type a b c Pos. dBezeichnung
e f g h i k l m n
1 Schienenkopfdicke
0, 1 50 64 31 2 106 Schienenkopfbreite
~ 70 81 15 179 13 22 4 170 192
Abb. 4.1-2 2 50 64 31 106 70 94 15 179 13 22 4 170 192
a b 3c d 60 e 82f g40 h 132 i k85 l 138 m 20
n 216 16,5 28 11,5 195 233
50 64 31 106 ~ 70 81 15 179 13 22 4 170 192
50 64 31 106 ~ 70 94 15 179 13 22 4 170 192
60 82 40 132 ~ 85 138 20 216 16,5 28 11,5 195 233
BFV_6071_14_de
Tab. 4.1-1 Assignment of the safety devices to the rail blade thickness
Part number
Type 6071/
Krupp Aufzugswerke Rail blade
22 thickness [mm] Version 09/2014
Safety gear Braking System
0 9 - 16 60 710 59 03 0 60 710 63 03 0
1 9 - 16 60 710 60 03 0 60 710 64 03 0
2 9 - 19 60 710 61 03 0 60 710 65 03 0
3 16 - 35 60 710 62 03 0 60 710 66 03 0
114 Issue 09/2015
Overspeed Governor
GBTK 6023, 6023F, 6024 and Accessories
Overspeed Governor
GBTK 6023 116
GBTK 6023 F 118
GBTK 6024 300S 119
Governor tensioning weight D200/D300 120
Overspeed Governor
GBTK 6023 EN81-

20/ -50
-conform
Overspeed Governor
Technical data
Pulley diameter D mm 300 250*
Rated speed vrated m/s 2.5 2.0
Tripping speed vT m/s 0.6 - 3.13 0.5 - 2.6
*with test groove diameter 170 mm
Standard version as shown side on

Options:
- Remote tripping (blockable rocker with voltage)
- Blocking device (blockable rocker without voltage)
- Bracket with final limit switch OFF
- Many other functions on request vN 2,5 m/s
1 2 3 4
Version by EN 81-20/-50
11
10
9
7
1 Cam disc 7 Lever with rubber ring and locking plate
2 Governor pulley 8 Locking position switch
3 Captive-type adjusting screw 9 Limit stop
4 Cast-on lug 10 Latch on rocker
5 Cap spring 11 Non-locking position switch
6 Pulley with rubber ring on rocker
116 Issue 09/2015

Overspeed Governor
EN81- GBTK 6023 in EN81-A3

20/ -50
-conform
Overspeed Governor
Inductive sensor for monitoring
the plunger position
Magnet 12V
100 % duty cycle
Rocker
Safety contact Blocking device - Blockable
- optional rocker without voltage
Safety contact with pre-

switching and electrical reset
- optional
Technical data
vN 2,5 m/s
Pulley diameter D mm 300
FHmax= 175 m
Rated speed vrated m/s 2.5
Tripping speed vT m/s 0.6 - 3.13
Use as a tripping element as part of the protection device
against unintended movements of the elevator car in acc. Max. engaging time of magnet ms 39
with EN811:1998+A3:2009-9.11. Max. total travel mm 310
GBTK 6023 in EN81-A3 compliant

EX Explosion proved
and EX version
vN= 1,0 m/s
Technical data
Use as a tripping element as part of the protection device
against unintended movements of the elevator car in acc. with Tripping speed vT m/s 1.2 - 1.3
EN811:1998+A3:2009-9.11. Max. engaging time of magnet ms 39
The EX evaluation of this component is conducted within the
Max. total travel mm 310
framework of the overall EX evaluation of the installation.
Overspeed Governor
GBTK 6023 F EN81-

20/ -50
-conform
Overspeed Governor
Standard version with electrical remote reset

- Hardened groove (wear-resistant)
- Finish-wired and tested
- Connections to system plug connector
- Specially developed for MRL installations
Options:
- Remote tripping (blockable rocker with voltage)
- Blocking device (blockable rocker without voltage)
- Many other functions on request
Technical data
Rope diameter d mm 6.5
Tripping speed vT m/s 0.7 - 2.09
GBTK 6023 in EN81-A3 compliant version
Inductive sensor for monitoring

the plunger position
Magnet 12V
100 % duty cycle
Blocking device -
Blockable rocker
without voltage
Rocker
Safety contact
- optional
Safety switch with pre-

switching
and electrical reset
Use as a tripping element as part of the protection device Bracket with integrated final limit switch OFF
against unintended movements of the elevator car in acc.
with EN811:1998+A3:2009-9.11.
Max. engaging time of magnet 40 ms

Max. total travel 205 mm
Technical details as for above version
118 Issue 09/2015

Overspeed Governor
EN81- GBTK 6024 300S

20/ -50
-conform
Overspeed Governor
vN = 2,00 - 4,00 m/s
300S: 379 mm
300
S: 4
88 m
m
View with encoder mounting,

left-hand version 300S: 102 mm
- Left- / right-hand version available

Technical data
- Encoder mounting optional
Type 300S
Pulley diameter D with 8 mm Drako 300T mm 304
Axle load FA max N 12.000
Rated speed vrated m/s 2,0 - 8,0
Tripping speed vT m/s 2,35 - 10,5
Braking force FB N 400 - 2100
11
12 1 Cover for encoder 7 Rope slip-off guard
10
2 Shaft cover 8 Cam, downwards
9
Connection for Tripping wheel for
1 3 9
encoder rope brake
2 8
3 Tripping wheel for
7 4 Type plate 10
pre-switching
6
5 Electr. connection 11 Cover plate
4 6 Cam, upwards 12 Governor pulley
Overspeed Governor
Governor tensioning weight D200

Accessories
Overspeed Governor
Technical data
Tension force 500 N
Governor rope diameter 6.5 mm
Governor tensioning pulley D=200/ 6.5-PA
Rated speed vrated 1.6 m/s
Travel height, TH 100 m
Type of protection, rope
IP 54 (optional IP67)
breaking switch
Rope engagement point
40 mm
(back of rail)
Distance X
T70 T89 / T90 T125 / T127
Guide rail
150 mm --- ---
200 mm
250 mm
- Galvanised sheet metal design

- Mounting in left- and right-hand versions possible
On-site modification possible!
- Bracket for mounting the overspeed governor to the guide
rail available
120 Issue 09/2015

Overspeed Governor
Governor tensioning weight D300

Accessories
Overspeed Governor
Technical data
Tension force 648 N / 870 N
Governor rope diameter 6.5 mm / 8.0 mm
Governor tensioning pulley D=300: 6.5-PA / 8.0-PA
Rated speed vrated 2.5 m/s
Travel height, TH 175 m
Type of protection, rope IP 67
breaking switch or EEx d IIc T6
right
Rope engagement point (back
40 mm
of rail)
T89 / T125 / T140-1 /

Rail width T70
T90 T127 T140-2
150 mm --- --- ---
-E
asy to install thanks to individual attached Distance X 200 mm ---
weight plates
250 mm ---
Distance X 300 mm --- ---

with exten- 350 mm --- ---
sion 400 mm --- ---
122 Issue 09/2015
Buffer
Oil and Spring Buffers
Buffer
Oil Buffers 01 - 03 124
Oil Buffers 04 - 05 125
Spring Buffers 126
Buffer Uprights 128
Buffer
Oil Buffers O1 - O3 EN81-

20/ -50
-conform
Buffer
124 Issue 09/2015

Buffer
EN81- Oil Buffers O4 - O5

20/ -50
-conform
Buffer
Buffer
Spring Buffer EN81-

20/ -50
-conform
Buffer
Spring Buffer
P1 P2 P2-SA1
Height H mm 120 210 220
Travel h mm 110 200
Buffer hub max. hmax mm 100 180
Diameter of Buffer D mm 140
Rated speed max. m/s 0,7 1,0
applied load kg
1,0 -- 500- 2600
Permissible total load v 0,7
(P+Q) min.-max. m/s 0,63 500 - 3200 500 - 2962
0,4
Dimensions mm
d --
d1 --
d2 14
L 215
L1 165
Part No. 60 219 02 03 0 60 219 03 03 0 60 219 08 03 0
126 Issue 09/2015

Buffer
EN81- Spring Buffer

20/ -50
-conform
Buffer
Spring Buffer
100 * 80 A 165 * 80 C 165 * 80 C-SA1
Height H mm 85 86 92
Travel h mm 80
Buffer hub max. hmax mm 72
Diameter of Buffer D mm 100 165
Rated speed max. m/s 1,0
applied load kg
1,0 190 - 1000 568 - 2534
Permissible total load v 0,7 190 - 1344 568 - 3300
(P+Q) min.-max. m/s 0,63 190 - 751 520 - 2978
0,4 112 - 996 434 - 3958
Dimensions mm
d 35
d1 18
d2 18
L 205
L1 165
Part No. 6021 000 0572 6021 000 0594 6021 000 0595
Buffer Uprights
Buffer Uprights
Buffer
12
Part number. Type Spring buffer perm. Oil bufer perm. d in mm

Q+P 2600 kg L Q+P 3020kg L
6010 000 9441 FK 715<L1115 315<L815 82.5
6010 000 9440 GG 715<L1115 315<L815 82.5
60 100 45 56 0 FK 73<L715 73<L315 76.1
60 100 46 56 0 GG 73<L715 73<L315 76.1
128 Issue 09/2015

Buffer Uprights
Telescopic Buffer Uprights
Buffer
Telescopic Buffer Upright
Buffer Upright 530 Buffer Upright 930
Heights 330 mm - 530 mm 570 mm - 930 mm
Adjustable Range 200 mm (40mm-steps) 360 mm (45mm-steps)
Steel thickness 4 mm 4 mm
Part No. 6010 000 9403 6010 000 9400
maximum load: 2600 kg (each buffer upright)

speeds of up to max. 1 m/s
suitable for spring buffer P2 and P1
Mounting advantage
The height can be adjusted to the shaft pit

to compensate tolerances
to adjust the height when speed has changed
130 Issue 09/2015
Guides
Roller Guides and Sliding Guides
Guides
Roller Guides ARO D60 / RTK 100 132
Roller Guides RT 18 / RTK 300 133
Roller Guides WRG 134
Sliding Guides I, PUR I, Eco, Ultramid, PUR II 136
Sliding Guides II, Nylon, Aclamid, GG-25I / II 138
Lubricators for Sliding Guides 140
Guides
Roller Guides
ARO D60 / RTK 100
Guides
AR0 D60 RTK 100 Roller Guide

Roller Guide Car (FK) &
Counterweight (GG) Counterweight (GG)
Roller Guide AR0 D60 Roller Guide RTK 100

6073078010 60730002940
Speed vn max. -> FK --- Speed vn max. -> FK 1,75 m/s
Speed vn max. -> GG 2,5 m/s Speed vn max. -> GG 3,0 m/s
Width of guide blade SKB [mm] 5 - 16 Width of guide blade SKB [mm] 9 - 16
Counterweight Force G [kN] 35 Conterweight Force G [kN] 50
Guiding Force Pstat [N] 1250 // 1350
Guiding Force Pdyn [N] 500 // 600
132 Issue 09/2015

Guides
Roller Guides
RT 18 / RTK 300
Guides
RT 18 RTK 300
Roller Guide Roller Guide
Car (FK) Car (FK)
Roller GuideRT 18 Roller Guide RTK 300

6073008010 60730002079
Speed vn max. -> FK 3,0 m/s Speed vn max. -> FK 10 m/s
Speed vn max. -> GG --- Speed vn max. -> GG ---
Width of guide blade SKB [mm] 16 Width of guide blade SKB [mm] 16 // 19 // 28,6
Guiding Force Pstat [N] 2500 Guiding Force Pstat [N] 3000
depends on spring
Guiding Force Pdyn [N] 800 Guiding Force Pdyn [N] calibrationg
Guides
Roller Guides
WRG
Guides
WRG 125
Roller Guide WRG 150
Car (FK) Roller Guide
Car (FK) & Counterweight (GG)
134 Issue 09/2015

Guides
Roller Guides
WRG
Guides
WRG 200
Roller Guide
Car (FK)
WRG Roller Guides

WRG 80 WRG 100 WRG 125 WRG 150 WRG 200
60730009208 60730009209 60730009210 60730009206 60730009211
Speed vn max. -> FK --- --- --- 3,5 m/s 5,0 m/s
Speed vn max. -> GG 2,5 m/s 3,5 m/s 7,0 m/s 7,0 m/s ---
9 9 9 16 16
Width of the guide blade SKB [mm]
16 16 16 19 19
Counterweight Force G [N] 100 100 100 100 ---
Guiding Force Pstat [N] --- --- --- 3000 3000
Guiding Force Pdyn [N] --- --- --- 900 900
Dimensions
A [mm] 80 100 125 150 200
B [mm] 126 143,5 151 200 250
C [mm] 175 150 150 220 220
D [mm] 200 228 266 300+SKB 555
Guides
Sliding Guides I
PUR I, Eco
Guides
Sliding Guide: Car (FK)

Eco
Sliding Guide: Counterweight (GG)

PUR I
Sliding Guides PUR I Sliding Guides Eco

6073073010 60730009222 60730009204
Speed vn max. -> FK --- Speed vn max. -> FK 1,0 m/s 1,0 m/s
Speed vn max. -> GG 1,75 m/s Speed vn max. -> GG --- ---
Width of guide blade SKB [mm] 5 Width of guide blade SKB [mm] 9 16
Counterweight Force G [kN 20 Guiding Force Pstat [N] 1700 1700
Guiding Force Pdyn [N] 600 600
136 Issue 09/2015

Guides
Sliding Guides I
Ultramid, PUR II
Guides
Sliding Guide:
Car (FK) & Counterweight (GG)
Ultramid
Sliding Guide: Car (FK)

PUR II
Sliding Guides Ultramid Sliding Guides PUR II

6073069010 6073063010 6073027010 6073066010
Speed vn max. -> FK --- 1,75 m/s 1,75 m/s Speed vn max. -> FK 1,75 m/s
Speed vn max. -> GG 3,5 m/s 3,5 m/s --- Speed vn max. -> GG ---
Width of guide blade SKB [mm] 5 9 16 Width of tguide blade SKB [mm] 16
Counter Weight Force G [kN] 50 100 --- Guiding Force Pstat [N] 2000
Guiding Force Pstat [N] --- 1700 1700 Guiding Force Pdyn [N] 800
Guiding Force Pdyn [N] --- 600 600
Guides
Sliding Guides II
Nylon, Aclamid
Guides
Sliding Guide: Car (FK) Sliding Guide: Car (FK)

Nylon Aclamid
Sliding Guide Nylon Sliding Guide Aclamid

6073047010* 6073046010 6073068010
Speed vn max. -> FK 2,0 // 2,5 m/s 2,0 // 2,5 m/s Speed vn max. -> FK 1,0 // 1,75 m/s
Width of guide blade SKB [mm] 16 16 Width of guide blade SKB [mm] 16
Guiding Force Pstat [N] 2500 // 2000 2500 // 2000 Guiding Force Pstat [N] 6000 // 5000
Guiding Force Pdyn [N] 1000 // 800 1000 // 800 Guiding Force Pdyn [N] 3000 // 2500
* inkl. Befestigungsteile fr Schmierapparat 60 740 04 01 0
138 Issue 09/2015

Guides
Sliding Guides II
GG-25I, GG25 II
Guides
Sliding Guide: Car (FK) Sliding Guide: Car (FK)
GG-25 I GG-25 II
06240 13242
a 205 280
b 250 480
c 200 400
l 280 300
n 92 130
Sliding Guide GG-25 I Sliding Guide GG-25 II

6073214240 6073206240 6073213242
Speed vn max. -> FK 0,63 m/s Speed vn max. -> FK 0,63 m/s 0,63 m/s
Width of guide blade SKB [mm] 16 Width of guide blade SKB [mm] 16 28,6
Guiding Force Pstat [N] 8000 Guiding Force Pstat [N] 18000 34000
Guiding Force Pdyn [N] 3500 Guiding Force Pdyn [N] 7000 13000
Guides
Lubricators for Sliding Guides

Guides
Lubricator
60740009201 Lubricator
for Sliding Guides 6074004010
PUR I 6073073010 for Sliding Guides
Ultramid 6073069010 Nylon 6073046010
Ultramid 6073063010 Nylon 6073047010
Ultramid 6073027010 GG-25 I 6073214240
GG-25 II 6073213242 GG-25 II 6073206240
140 Issue 09/2015

Guides
Lubricators for Sliding Guides
Guides
Sliding Guide Car Lubricator AK10 Oil drip receptacle (SKB = 5-16 mm)
With guide shoe HSM 6074009010 60160006205
6073208250 For sliding guide car
And Aclathan inserts
6073217240 (9 mm)
6073216240 (16 mm)
(Mounting on bottom beam)
OPTIONAL:
Mounting elbow for mounting the
lubricator AK10 above/below the
car sling 60748902980
(Lubricator AK10 is available for
every type of sliding guide)
Sliding Guide
6073208250 (Guide shoe)
inkl. insert
Speed vn max. -> FK 0,5 - 2,0 m/s
Speed vn max. -> GG ---
Width of guide blade SKB
5-16
[mm]
142 Issue 09/2015
Rope Pulleys
Rope Pulleys and Accessories
Rope Pulleys
Cast iron-/Polyamid-Pulleys 144
Accessories 145
Rope Pulleys
Cast iron-/Polyamid-Pulleys
Roller bearings
Rope Pulleys
Highest precision and smoothness

Extremely resilient
Extremely attractive price / performance
ratio
D [mm] Ropes z* RA [mm] Bp35 [mm] Axle Bearing Type Part number
150 7x6 12 110 X 6310 2RS 6072 000 9255
150 10x6 12 145 Y 6310 2RS 6072 000 9229
150 12x6 10 145 Y 6310 2RS 6072 000 9265
2401 12x6 10 132 Z 6310 2RS 6250 000 0057
2601 6*6,5 11 82 0 6310 2RS 6072 000 7798
3201 8*8 14 130 1 NSK 6310 6072 000 9341
3601 7*8 14 127 1 6310 2RS 60 720 76 42 0
360 7*8 15 118 2 6310 2RS 6072 000 3603
360 7*8 18 140 3 6310 2RS 60 720 54 42 0
3602 7*8 18 140 3 NJ 310 E 60 720 60 42 0
3603 z*d - 140 3 6310 2RS 60 720 71 42 0
3604 z*d - 140 3 NJ 310 E 60 720 71 42 0
400 4*10 18 90 4 6310 2RS 60 720 67 42 0
4001 8*10 18 163 5 6312 2RS 6072 000 9342
4501 7*10 18 160 5 6312 2RS 6072 000 4885
4501 7*10 20 160 5 6312 2RS 6072 000 4884
450 7*10 18 160 5 6312 2RS 60 720 68 42 0
450 7*10 20 160 5 6312 2RS 60 720 55 42 0
4502 7*10 20 160 5 NJ 312 E 60 720 62 42 0
450 8*10 18 160 5 6312 2RS 60 720 58 42 0
4503 z*d - 160 5 6312 2RS 60 720 72 42 0
4504 z*d - 160 5 NJ 312 E 60 720 72 42 0
540 7*8 18 160 6 6216 2RSR 60 720 69 42 0
540 7*13 20,5 160 6 6216 2RSR 60 720 65 42 0
5402 7*13 20,5 160 6 NJ 216 E 60 720 44 42 0
5403 z*d - 160 6 6216 2RSR 60 720 73 42 0
5404 z*d - 160 6 NJ 216 E 60 720 73 42 0
540 8*13 20,5 190 7 6216 2RSR 60 720 66 42 0
5402 8*13 20,5 190 7 NJ 216 E 60 720 59 42 0
5403 z*d - 190 7 6216 2RSR 60 720 73 42 0
5404 z*d - 190 7 NJ 216 E 60 720 73 42 0
6404 z*d - 240 8 NJ 2218 6072 000 0984
7404 z*d - 240 9 NJ 224 6072 000 0976
Specialty: 1Polyamide-pulley, 2High load, 3Variabele*, 4Variabele* and High load, 5Overall width of rope pulley, incl. bearing
*Variabele with grooves (z), groove diameter (d), groove distance (RA) .
144 Issue 09/2015

Rope Pulleys
Accessories
Rope Pulleys
Axles for Rope Pulleys
Axle1 -Axle Length Part number

X 147 mm 6072 000 9240
Y 182 mm 6072 000 9234
Z 200 mm 6250 000 0058
0 111 mm 6072 000 8541
1 50 mm 166 mm 60 723 53 32 0
2 135 mm 6072 000 3604
3.0 190 mm 60 723 34 32 0
3.1 240 mm 60 723 50 32 0
4 132 mm 60 723 37 32 0
216 mm 60 723 35 32 0
5 60 mm
240 mm 60 723 51 32 0
6 230 mm 60 723 47 32 0
80 mm
7 260 mm 60 723 32 32 0
8 90 mm 305 mm 6072 000 0981
9 120 mm 310 mm 6072 000 0980
1)
relevant axle-numers see page before
Axle Brackes
For Rope Pulley Part number

240 mm 40x3x65 6250 000 0059
360 mm 00 981 03 61 0
400 mm 00 981 03 61 0
450 mm 00 981 03 61 0
540 mm 00 981 04 61 0
640 mm 00 981 04 61 0
740 mm 00 981 05 61 0
Pedestal Bearing for Deflection Pulley Fixed on Concrete Foundation (including axle)
For Axle Part number
3 61 720 07 25 0
5 61 720 08 25 0
6 60 720 64 25 2
8 60 720 65 25 2
146 Issue 09/2015
Comfort Door
S8A / K8A
Doors
Product Benefits 148
General Notes 149
Landing Door S8A 150
Car Door K8A 151
Project planning 152
Steel sheet/stainless steel doors - surfaces 154
Steel sheet/stainless steel doors - fire protection 155
Glass Doors 156
Door Sills 158
Door safety lock system 159
F9 Door Drive 160
Technical Information 161
Special versions 162
Structure of the landing door 164
Layout of the car door 165
Modernisation for Door Drive F9 167
Comfort Door
S8A / K8A EN81-

Product Benefits 20/ -50
-conform
Doors
Design Flexibility
Panelling in numerous surface designs, Very wide and finely graded range of
glass door panels, aluminium and stain- options for door dimensions, with door
less-steel door sills and surrounding in- widths from 700 to 2500 mm and door
visible sill guides enable individual adap- heights from 2000 to 2500 mm
tation to the design requirements in the One-side opening, double-panel tele-
building scopic door (M2T) for optimum door
width in a narrow shaft
Safety Centre-opening, double-panel door
Compliance with currently valid EU (M2Z) for short door running times and
standards EN 81-1/2 and national safety high handling capacity
regulations Centre-opening, four-panel telescopic
High-quality door safety lock systems door (M4TZ) for maximum door widths
and short door reversal times for the with good utilisation of space
safety of passengers and to protect the Comprehensive range of options and
technology against damage special versions for individual adaptation
Efficiency Innovation
Time-saving installation resulting from Optimum utilisation of space and short
clever, installation-friendly mounting so- floor-to-floor distances possible as a
S8A M2Z, stainless steel, leather surface
lutions for short downtimes result of compact design of the door
Short door opening and closing times header
reduce waiting periods and increase the Stable, single-leaf landing door panels
handling capacity of the installation in sandwich design with low weight and
without weld seams
Comfort
Low noise of 55 dB(A), measured one Reliability
metre in front of the landing door Safe and robust mechanical construction
Excellent smooth running properties and with powerful door drive
isolation from structure-borne sound as a Long service life as a result of the exclu-
result of mounts protected from vibration sive deployment of proven and tested
on the elevator car (SA 79) materials and components
Harmonious and smooth door move- Ensuring a rapid and long lasting spare
ments as a result of frequency-controlled parts availability
door drive with adjustable running char-
acteristic curves
Scope of Supply
Doors complete with required fasten-
ing material, basic body of the door
sill, guide rail profile of the door sill and
toeguards
Rasterising of the door height and door
widths in increments of 50 mm possible S8A M2T, glass door with frame, stainless steel
(SA 20); grain 220
with door type M4TZ with DW 1400 mm

in increments of 100 mm
SA special version
148 Issue 09/2015

Comfort Door
S8A / K8A
General Notes
Doors
Range of application Fire protection safety standards
The S8A / K8A comfort elevator doors are The landing doors are fire-tested in line
used in passenger and freight elevators with DIN EN 81-58 with regard to fire resis-
with high standards with regard to quiet tance. This means the door can be used in
running, handling capacity and comfort. the majority of export markets if fire protec-
Door type M2T, opening to the left tion safety standards are required for the
The 2-panel, side-opening telescopic landing doors.
sliding door (M2T) is used mainly in pas- DIN EN 81-58 is included in building regu-
senger elevators to achieve a door width lations list A, part 1 of the German Institute
that is as large as possible in relation to for Building Technology. This means that
the shaft width. the landing doors with this fire resistance
Door type M2T, opening to the right
test can be deployed in Germany.
The 2-panel, centre-opening sliding door
(M2Z) is conceived for passenger elevators The S8A landing doors in the correspond-
with a short door running time and high ing special version (SA) also comply with
handling capacity. other fire protection requirements such as
BS476 (GB) and GOST (RU-UKR).
Door type M2Z, centre-opening The 4-panel, centre-opening telescopic The S8A glass doors are not available with
sliding door (M4TZ) is mainly used in pas- a fire protection safety standard and are
senger and freight elevators with a high therefore not suitable for the partitioning of
handling capacity and large door widths fire-protected zones.
with small shaft dimensions.
Door type M4TZ, centre-opening
Compliance with special requirements
Planning recommendation The comprehensive range of options
Elevators should be planned in such a way (SA special versions) means the door is
that they can also be used without difficulty suitable for deployment with special
by elderly and disabled persons. The mini- requirements consisting of special stand-
mum dimensions for elevator doors stipu- ards and regulations, for example in ac-
lated in the standard DIN 18040 (formerly cordance with
DIN 18024/18025) for barrier-free con- EN 81-70 Accessibility of elevators for
struction are 900 mm door width and persons, including disabled persons
2000 mm door height. DIN EN 81-71 Protective measures
In the case of modernisation measures, against wilful destruction (vandalism),
these minimum dimensions should be categories 0 or 1 only after consultation
complied with, circumstances in the build- DIN EN 81-72 Fire service elevators
Mounting of the suspension gear with wall plugs ing permitting.
Noise
The noise characteristics of the door de-
pend on the door dimensions, door panel-
ling, installation conditions and door run-
ning times. At a distance of 1 metre to the
landing door, an airborne noise level of
55 dB(A) can be assumed.
SA special version
Mounting of the base door sill support Securing bracket with large adjustable ranges
for anchor rails with wall plug fixture (SA 38)
Comfort Door
S8A Landing Door

Doors
Door panels
The door panels are single-leaf, manufac-
tured using noise-inhibiting sandwich
design and offer outstanding corrosion
protection. The basic body consists of
2 mm galvanised steel plate and is either
laminated with 0.6 mm galvanised steel
plate or with 0.8 mm stainless steel plate.
Powder coating of the galvanised version is
also possible.
The lower door panel guide in the door sill
for each door panel consists of two adjust-
able sliders. Rubber buffers are fitted to the
closing edge to buffer impacts and reduce
noise.
In the case of landing doors that lead
out-doors, we recommend the use of door
panels clad with stainless steel.
In the case of fire resistant doors with heat
insulation criterion, the door panels are
filled with an additional technical heat insu-
lation.
Door frame
The door frame comprises:

the upper suspension gear made of
folded 2.5 mm galvanised steel plate;
the side door posts made of folded
1.5 mm galvanised steel plate;
and the lower door sill made of folded
2 mm galvanised steel plate with bolted-
on aluminium or stainless steel profile
S8A M2Z, hook lock with contacts Suspension gear with stable,
profiled guide rail
Flooring
The customer-fitted flooring can be laid

directly up to the outer door panel facing
the hallway.
Even more elegance is created with the
door sill with surrounding guide of the
door panels (SA 18): the flooring can be
laid up to the shaft edge. The same possi-
bility applies to the car door (SA 18).
Precisely adjustable gap of the door panels Sill with encompassing guide (SA 18)
to one another
150
150 Issue 09/2015
Comfort Door
K8A Car Door
Doors
Door panels
The structure of the door panels with the
door panel guides corresponds to the high-
quality technical designs described for the
landing door. In the case of elevator car
doors, on the other hand, no door panels
with fire protection safety standards and
heat insulation are deployed.
Door drive
The door drive that is used is a high-
qality, gearless and frequency-controlled
asynchronous motor with integrate control
device. The power transmission to the door
panels is low-noise by means of a belt drive
that is highly resistant to wear. The machine
is very compact and does not protrude
beyond the projection area of the suspen-
sion gear. It is mounted on the suspension
gear of the car door and protected from
vibration.
Door mounting
The sheet metal casing of the suspension

gear of the car door is bolted directly onto
the car roof using brackets. Mounting that
is protected from vibration is available as
an option (SA 79). The elevator car can be
up to 300 mm higher than the door height
(optionally up to 500 mm, SA 40). The car
door portal is not included in the scope of
delivery of the car door.
The landing doors are coupled by means

of a widening cam fastened to the car door.
This is operated and moved by the toothed
belt of the machine.
The type of protection for the entire door

is IP20. An IP54 version is available as an
option (SA 13).
SA special version
Mounting of the suspension gear on the elevator car
Non-insulated mounting using a number of brackets
directly with the car roof.
Insulated mounting (SA 79) with rubber insulation to
reduce the transmission of vibrations to the car roof.
Comfort Door
S8A / K8A
Project Planning
Doors
Door type M2T (2-panel, one-sided telescopic opening)
68
(150 with SA 27)
30 + BT
CDT TB ++ 25
1,5 x DW 25 30 + BT
CDT
(1,5 x DW + 45 for SA 18)
DH DW 700 - 750 800 - 850 900 - 1400

2000
140
2100
295
2200
125
2300
CDT

BT
2400
2500
DH and DW in the grid of 100 mm, optionally in the grid of 50 mm.
125 DW
TB 125
1,5 x DW
TB ++ 50
20
Door type M2Z (2-panel, centre-opening)
30
30++CDT
BT 22xxDW
TB + 50 30 + CDT
BT
DH DW 700 - 750 800 - 850 900 - 1400

2000
85 120
235
2100
2200
CDT

BT
2300
2400
125 DW
TB 125 2500
22xxDW DH and DW in the grid of 100 mm, optionally in the grid of 50 mm.
TB + 100
Door type M4TZ (4-panel, telescopic centre-opening)

3030+ +CDT
BT 1,5 xx DW
1,5 TB + 50 30 + CDT
BT
(1,5 x DW + 70 with DW < 900 mm)
DH DW 800 - 950 1000 - 1150 1200 - 1350 1400 - 1500 1800 - 2500

125 140
2000
295
2100
2200
2300
BT
CDT
2400
125 DW
TB 125
2500
DH and DW in the grid of 100 mm, optionally in the grid of 50 up to DW 1400 mm.
1,5
1,5 xx DW
TB ++ 100
100
All mass in mm; DH door height, DW door width; CDT construction dimension tolerance / deflection from plumb ( 25 mm); SA special version
152
152 Issue 09/2015
Comfort Door
S8A / K8A
Project Planning
Doors
Installation options for the landing doors
Detail A (M2T/M4TZ) Detail A (M2Z)

85
FFL UFL FFL UFL 125 6
6 6
40 36
40 36 34 Door architrave
Trzarge
Door architrave
40 x 40
40 x 40
SD SD (SA 19)
(SA 19)
FFL
OFF
6
FFL
6
100
100
72
72
100
100
190
300
300
Sill profile Schwellenprofil
Sill profile
Basic body Grundkrper

Basic body
= DH + 450 for SA 12)
= DH + 450 for SA 12)
M16
M16
Mounting bracket Mounting bracket
Befestigungswinkel
Toeguard Toeguard
Schrze
= DH + 590
= DH + 590
Detail B (M2T/M4TZ) Detail B (M2Z) 85

min.
min.
125 6
min.
min.
6 6 40 36
STWH
STWH
Door architrave
Trzarge
40 36 34
Door architrave
DH
DH
(STWH
(STWH
40 x 40
40 x 40 (SA 19)
(SA 19)
FFL
OFF
6
FFL
6
72
72
90
90
190
190
Recess Sill profile
Sill profile Nische Schwellenprofil
Basic body
Basic body Grundkrper
90
90
M16
Mounting bracket M16
Befestigungswinkel
Mounting bracket
Toeguard Toeguard
Schrze
A A B B
Recess
Installation in the shaft Installation in recess / in the landing

The landing doors are fastened to the shaft In the interest of economical utilisation of If your requirements or wishes go beyond
wall by means of brackets. The brackets space, the landing door can be installed in the range of options described, please
are secured to the wall optionally with wall a recess. Recesses with greater depth are contact our experienced sales team.
plugs or with securing bolts on anchor rails possible as an option (SA 60).
(measurement in concrete in line with CEN/ The different recess depths are specified in
TS 1992-4:2009) that are cast into the the table below.
shaft wall or welded onto a shaft scaffold.
Recess depth
Without recess With recess With deep recess

Door type
SA 11 Standard SA 60
M2T S8A 0 mm 55 mm 100 mm
M2Z S8A 0 mm 20 mm 60 mm
M4TZ S8A 0 mm 55 mm 100 mm
All mass in mm; DH door height; STWH floor height; SD shaft depth; UFL unfinished floor level;
FFL finished floor level; SA special version
Comfort Door
S8A / K8A
Steel sheet / stainless steel doors surfaces
Doors
Door panels
Surface versions
The door panels of the landing and eleva-
tor car doors consist of 2 mm galvanised
steel plate and are clad either with 0.6 mm
galvanised steel plate or with 0.8 mm stain-
less steel plate. For the galvanised version,
an additional powder coating is also pos-
sible. Door panel, front / visible side Door panel, back
The same applies to the surface versions
for the door frames and front walls of the
elevator shaft.
Standard version Standard version Stainless steel

Electrolytically galvanised steel plate sur-
faces for painting on site.
Electrolytically galvanised steel

surface Leather / stainless steel
Painting Painting
Different types of painting are possible with
a high-quality powder coating method
(60 m):
Basic colour shade Mouse Grey
RAL 7005 / powder coating
Linen / stainless steel
Traffic White RAL 9016 /
powder coating Mouse Grey RAL 9016 /
powder coating
White Aluminium RAL 9006 /
powder coating
Colour RAL / powder coating
Rhombus / stainless steel,

ferritic or austenitic,
only available for landing door
powder coating
Stainless steel
Panelling with 0.8 mm stainless steel plate:
Leather / stainless steel
Linen / stainless steel
Rhombus / stainless steel,
Grain 220 / stainless steel,
ferritic or austenitic, ferritic
White Aluminium RAL 9006 /
only available for landing door powder coating
Grain 220 / stainless steel, ferritic
Grain 220 / stainless steel, austenitic
Colour RAL / Grain 220 / stainless steel,

powder coating austenitic
Other versions available on request.
154
154 Issue 09/2015
Comfort Door
S8A / K8A
Steel sheet / stainless steel doors fire protection
Doors
Doors with fire protection safety stan-
dards
The standard versions of the landing doors
comply with the requirements of the type
approval in accordance with EN 81-1/2.
In addition to this, other criteria in line with
in part country-specific guidelines and regu-
lations such as EN 81-58, BS 476 and
GOST apply to the special fire protection
versions.
Door panel with fire protection safety standards
(back)
Fire protection classifications M2T M2Z M4TZ

for S8A landing door
DW 700 1400 mm DW 800 2500 mm

DH 2000 2500 mm DH 2000 2500 mm
E120 EN 81-58 Standard
galvanised, powder coated, galvanised, powder coated,
panelled with stainless steel panelled with stainless steel
DW 700 1400 mm DW 800 2000 mm

DH 2000 2200 mm DH 2000 2200 mm
EW30 EN 81-58 SA 104
DW 700 1100 mm DW 800 1100 mm

EW60 EN 81-58 SA 105 DH 2000 2200 mm DH 2000 2200 mm
DW 700 1400 mm DW 800 1400 mm DW 800 2500 mm

DH 2000 2500 mm DH 2000 2500 mm DH 2000 2500 mm
EI60 EN 81-58 SA 106
galvanised, powder coated, galvanised, powder coated, galvanised, powder coated,
panelled with stainless steel panelled with stainless steel panelled with stainless steel
DW 700 1400 mm
DH 2000 2500 mm
EI120 EN 81-58 SA 109 - -
galvanised, powder coated,
panelled with stainless steel
DW 700 1400 mm DW 1400 2500 mm

GOST DH 2000 2500 mm DH 2000 2500 mm
EI120 SA 101
(RU and UKR) galvanised, powder coated, galvanised, powder coated,
DW 700 1400 mm DW 800 2500 mm

DH 2000 2500 mm DH 2000 2500 mm
2h-Integrity BS 476 SA 100
DW 700 1400 mm
GOST DH 2000 2500 mm
E30 SA 100 -
(only RU) galvanised, powder coated,
panelled with stainless steel
Not all combinations of door height / door width are available; details on request.
SA special version
Comfort Door
S8A / K8A
Glass Doors
Doors
Glass door panels

The S8A / K8A comfort glass door panels
are designed with a surrounding door panel
frame on all sides at a width of 50 mm.
Fully glazed door panels are also available
on request (SA 41).
The glass door panel frames have a basic

coating and can be given any surface finish
which is available for sheet metal door pan-
els. The glass panes are fitted flush with
the door panel frame. The glass panes are
made of composite safety glass (TVG and
VSG-V) and are transparent.
The gap between the glass door panel and

door post or portal is limited to a maximum
of 4 mm to safeguard against the danger of Glass door panels with frame (SA 31) Fully glazed door panels (SA 41)
children's hands being drawn in.
In the case of the centre-opening doors

(M2Z, M4TZ), the closing edge is optionally
designed as a 25-mm-wide frame (SA 33),
so that the closed door visually has a frame
width of 50 mm at the closing edge. The
other three sides of the frame have also a
width of 50 mm, giving the door an even
more elegant appearance.
In the case of glass doors, we recommend Panelling of the suspension gear on the shaft side, Panelling of the suspension gear on the shaft side,
optional optional
for reasons of visual appearance that the
light grid be mounted as stationary on the
car door at the end of the running rail and
at the end of the guide rail profile.
On glass door panels, the cam elbows of

the widening cam of the elevator car door
protrude into the visible area. If this is not
visible, a shortened version of the widen-
ing cam (SA 30) can be selected. On this
version, however, levelling with opening
doors is not possible.
SA special version
156 Issue 09/2015

Comfort Door
S8A / K8A
Glass Doors
Doors
Glass door panels with available dimensions
Door width Door width
50
50
50
Frame glass door panels (SA 31)

100 DH [mm] DW [mm]
Door height
Door height
Fully lazed door panels (SA 41)

2000 700 - 1200
2100 700 - 1200 DH [mm] DW [mm]
50
2200 700 - 1100 2000 700 - 1200
6 mm
50
6 mm
2300 700 - 1050 2100 700 - 1200

DH and DW in the grid of 100 mm, DH and DW in the grid of 100 mm,
optionally in the grid of 50 mm. optionally in the grid of 50 mm.
Closing edge
50
Closing edge
Door type M2T (2-panel, one-sided telescopic opening), glass door panels with frame (Fig. on left) and fully glazed door panels (Fig. on right)
Door width Door width
50
50
50
DH [mm] DW [mm]
Door height
Door height
Fully lazed door panels (SA 41)

2000 700 - 1200
2100 700 - 1200 DH [mm] DW [mm]
1)
2x25 2200 700 - 1100 2000 700 - 1200
6 mm
6 mm
2)
2x50 2300 700 - 1050 2100 700 - 1200
DH and DW in the grid of 100 mm, DH and DW in the grid of 100 mm,
optionally in the grid of 50 mm. optionally in the grid of 50 mm.
Closing edge Closing edge
50
50
Door type M2Z (2-panel, centre-opening), glass door panels with frame (Fig. on left) and fully glazed door panels (Fig. on right)
Door width
Door width
50

50
DH [mm] DW [mm]
50
100
2000 1300 - 2200
Door height
Door height
2100 1300 - 2200 Fully lazed door panels (SA 41)

2200 1300 - 2200 DH [mm] DW [mm]
1)
2x25 2300 1300 - 2100 2000 1400 - 2200
6 mm
6 mm
2) DH and DW in the grid of 100 mm,

2x50 2100 1400 - 2200
optionally in the grid of 50 mm.
Foe door sill without visible guide DH and DW in the grid of 100 mm,
(SA 18) as of DW 1400 mm. optionally in the grid of 50 mm.
Closing edge Closing edge

50
50
Door type M4TZ (4-panel, telescopic centre-opening), glass door panels with frame (Fig. on left) and fully glazed door panels (Fig. on right)
1) For glass door panels (SA 31), combined with narrow frame (SA 33). 2) For glass door panels (SA 31). Edge protection with width 15 mm available as an option for solid glass doors (SA 47).
SA special version. All specified dimensions in mm.
Comfort Door
S8A / K8A
Door Sills
Doors
Door sills
The basic body of the shaft door sill is
made of angled steel plate. As default, sill
profiles made of aluminium with permit-
ted wheel loads of 280 kg are mounted.
Alongside these, stainless steel door sills
for 500 kg (SA 15) and 1500 kg (SA 16)
wheel loads are also available.
Aluminium door sill Stainless steel door sill

for permitted wheel loads up to 280 kg for permitted wheel loads up to 500 kg,
as standard version profiled stainless steel guide (SA 15)
Wheel load QRL on

the door still
Distance
between
wheels a
Door width DW
Max. wheel
Max. overall sill load
Door sill load
QRL a < 400 mm a 400 mm
Aluminium
(standard)
280 kg 280 kg 560 kg Stainless steel door sill (only for M4TZ) Door sill with surrounding guide
Stainless for permitted wheel loads up to 1,500 kg, the flooring can be laid up to the shaft edge
500 kg 500 kg 1000 kg
steel (SA 15) solid stainless steel profile (SA 16) (SA 18);
Stainless optionally with flat stainless steel profile
1500 kg 1500 kg 3000 kg
steel (SA 16)
(SA 17)
Surrounding
500 kg 500 kg 1000 kg
guide (SA 18)
DW door width, QRL wheel load, SA special version
a distance between wheels.
158 Issue 09/2015

Comfort Door
S8A / K8A
Door Safety Lock System
Doors
Door safety lock systems
The doors can be equipped with different,
opto-electronic systems for door safety:
- Standard light grid
- High-resolution light grid (SA 26)
- High-resolution 3D light grid with motion
detection system (SA 45)
- Motion detection system (SA 25)
The systems are always equipped with the
electronic evaluation system required in
each case.
The standard light grid is a no-contact

opto-electronic door safety system. Trans-
mitter and receiver units are integrated in
the door panels. Between the two, a light
grid is created up to a height of 180 cm;
this has 18 parallel and 84 crossed light
beams. Interrupting one or more of the light
beams triggers reversing of the door drive.
The device works with invisible alternating
light in the infrared range.
Standard light grid High-resolution light grid (SA 26)
A high-resolution light grid (SA 26) with
particularly high protective effect is available
as an option: 40 parallel and 194 crossed
beams up to a height of 180 cm guarantee
the highest sensitivity (suitable for installa-
tions in accordance with EN 81-70).
Even more comfort is provided by a high-

resolution light grid with integrated motion
detection system (SA 45). The closing
operation of the door then reversed when
persons or objects approach the door. This
light grid cannot be used for glass doors.
Monitoring ranges of the high-resolution light grid with
integrated motion detection system (SA 45) In addition, a facility for monitoring the area
in front of the door with body heat detection
can be installed in the car door portal
(SA 25). Only rapid changes in tem-
perature are detected, which means that
changes in the ambient temperature or
stationary persons have no influence on the
system.
SA special version
High-resolution light grid with integrated motion detection Monitoring range of the motion detection system
system (SA 45) (SA 25)
Comfort Door
S8A / K8A
F9 Door Drive
Doors
F9 door drive
The F9 door drive is a compact unit con-
sisting of a gearless, frequency-controlled
asynchronous motor with integrate control
device. It is mounted vertically and pro-
tected from vibration on the suspension
gear of the car door. A horizontal arrange-
ment is possible as an option.
A high-resolution encoder supplies the

drive with all the necessary information with
regard to position and speed of the door
panels at all times. This means that no limit
switches are required to detect the door
position.
The power transmission to the door panels

is linear and low-noise by means of a belt
drive that is highly resistant to wear. The Additional features / functions Running characteristic curve setting / pa-
door panels of the landing door are moved Automatic commissioning as well as and rameterisation
by a widening cam without play. functional test, including automatic learn- The control system electronics calculate
ing of door mass, closing force limitation the running characteristic curve depend-
Automatic commissioning takes place via a of 150 N, limitation of kinetic energy, ing on the path travelled.
convenient teach-in function. door width, opening direction, running The running characteristic curve con-
characteristic curve generation for door tains a special profile for operation of the
At high ambient temperatures, the motor movement. door cam by the door drive.
and control device can be placed in sepa- Approaching a detected obstacle: if the All the parameters of the running charac-
rate units (on request). door strikes an obstacle on closing that teristic curve for opening, closing,
was not detected by the light grid (e.g. nudging and reopening can be defined
due to a stone in the door sill), it is re- independently.
opened. The previously determined rise Learning the maximum possible closing
Technical description in force causes the door drive to deceler- force (moment teach-in).
Motor: six-pole asynchronous motor ate in the next closing operation even be-
Control device: integrate frequency fore the position of the obstacle. Conse- Running characteristic curves (over time t)
inverter, clock frequency 16 kHz, V/f quently, there is a significant reduction in
1
characteristic the levelling speed. If no other obstacle 1
6
Type of protection: IP54 is detected, the door drive accelerates 6
2
2
EMC: in accordance with EN 12015/16 again to normal speed after reopening to 5
Interfaces: 24 V logic level, potential the position of the obstacle. 5 3 3
separation, programmable special output Partial opening: after reopening, the 4

on opening on closing
4
Parameterisation: via PC opening width of the door can be re-

Diagnosis: event stack duced if desired. Maximum speed v
Connection voltage: 230 V, 50/60 Hz The door drive has an event stack that Deceleration
Approach speed
Ambient conditions stores errors and warnings in non- Widening cam operation (can be deactivated)
10 C to + 50 C volatile form with date and time. Widening cam speed
Dimensions: (as of flange area) Other activation options, see operating Acceleration
W x H x D = 260 x 200 x 115 mm manual.
160 Issue 09/2015

Comfort Door
S8A / K8A
Technical Information
Doors
Technical details
M2T M2Z M4TZ

S8A landing door / K8A car door
Permitted dimensions for steel plate doors 1)

Door width DW [mm] 700 1400 / 100 mm grid 800 2500 / 100 mm grid
Door height DH [mm] 2000 2500 / 100 mm grid
Materials for steel plate doors
Suspension gear Steel plate 2.5 mm, galvanised
Door posts Steel plate 1.5 mm, galvanised
Basic body: folded steel plate 2.0 mm, galvanised
Door sill
Guide rail profile: made of aluminium or stainless steel (SA), bolted on
Structure: single-leaf, manufactured using noise-inhibiting sandwich design
Basic body: folded steel plate 2.0 mm, galvanised
Door panels Panelling: steel plate 0.6 mm, galvanised or
stainless steel plate 0.8 mm or
steel plate 0.6 mm, galvanised with powder coating
K8A car door (technical details for selected combinations of door width x door height)
Door width x door height DW x DH [mm] 700 x 2000 - 2200 700 x 2000 - 2200 800 x 2000 - 2100
Door running time s2) t open / t close [s] 2.00 / 2.50 1.70 / 2.20 1.90 / 2.40
Weight (with DH 2100) 3)
galv./stainl. steel/glass [kg] 107 / 111 / 180 106 / 110 / 176 134 / 139 / -
Step-on area [m2] 0.056 0.056 0.064
Step-on area [m2] 0.064 0.064 0.072
Step-on area [m2] 0.072 0.072 0.088
Step-on area [m2] 0.080 0.080 0.096
galv./stainl. steel/glass [kg] 148 / 155 / 254 147 / 154 / 237 194 / 202 / 304
Step-on area [m2] 0.088 0.088 0.112
galv./stainl. steel/glass [kg] 158 / 165 / 268 157 / 164 / 252 233 / 244 / 398
Step-on area [m2] 0.096 0.096 0.144
galv./stainl. steel/glass [kg] 178 / 186 / - 177 / 185 / - 304 / 318 / -
Step-on area [m2] 0.112 0.112 0.200
Available combinations of door width / door height, see page 6. Available combinations of door width / door height for landing doors with fire protection safety standard, see page 9.
1)
Available combinations of door width / door height for glass doors, see page 10. Door dimensions (DW and DH) optional (SA 20) in the 50 mm grid, available as option with door type
M4TZ up to DW 1400 mm. For door types M2T and M2Z, operating and indicator elements are only possible in the door frame up to DW 1300 mm. 2) The opening and closing speeds can
be adjusted separately from each other. The specified values are the default settings where the noise development is 55 dB(A) and the door has very good running proper-ties. 3) Weight
determination of car door with the following equipment: galvanised = door panels covered with 0.6 mm galvanised steel sheet, without special equipment; stainless steel = door panels
covered with 0.8 mm stainless steel, without special equipment; glass = glass door panels (SA 31 / frame door panels with 0.8 mm stainless steel panelling or SA 41 / fully glazed door
panels), with special version 79 / insulated suspension gear mounting and insulated supports).
SA special version
Comfort Door
S8A / K8A
Special Versions
Doors
Special versions
Special S8A landing K8A car

Description
versions door door
SA 4 - Display "No Entry" complying with DIN EN 81-73
SA 5 - Round opening (l 35.6 mm) for indicator elements
SA 6 - Round opening (l 35.6 mm) for control elements
SA 7 - Square opening (Y 36.8 mm) for control elements; key switch not possible with M2Z and M4TZ
SA 8 - Square opening (Y 36.8 mm) for indicator elements
SA 11 - Door installed in shaft without recess
SA 12 - Low height between floors STWH up to min. DH + 450 mm
SA 13 Type of protection IP 54 (example of use: for door leading outdoor)
SA 14 - EX version (ATEX), explosion-proof version
SA 15 Stainless steel sill profile, profiled, permitted wheel load (QRL) up to 500 kg
SA 16 Stainless steel sill profile, solid, permitted wheel load (QRL) up to 1,500 kg, door sill cast in, only available for M4TZ
SA 17 Stainless steel profile for SA 18, if flooring us not to go all the way to the sill edge
SA 18 Door sill with surrounding guide of door panels, floor covering thickness up to 40 mm
SA 19 - Profile between the door posts; material: aluminium or stainless steel
SA 20 Door dimensions in the 50 mm grid for door width (DW) and door height (DH), on M4TZ only up to DW 1400 mm
SA 21 Sill heating only in conjunction with door sill SA 18
SA 24 - Intermediate profile for control panel in the recess, only available with insulated mounting (SA 79)
SA 25 - Motion detection system with infrared sensor, deployment in addition to a light grid, installation in the car door portal
SA 26 - High-resolution light grid with 40 parallel / 194 crossed beams, up to 1800 mm height, suitable for installation in acc. with EN 81-70
SA 27 Mechanical car door lock complying with DIN EN 81-1/2, if distance between shaft wall and car door sill > 150 mm
SA 30 - Short widening cam for panoramic elevators, cam base plate / cam bracket not visible, levelling with opening doors not possible
SA 31 Glass door panels with surrounding door panel frame width of 50 mm, flush-fitted glass panel, stationary mounting of light grid
SA 32 - Mounting in the shaft scaffold with M 16 screw, without anchor rails and without wall plugs
SA 33 Glass door panels with door panel frame width at the closing edge of 25 mm, available for M2Z and M4TZ
SA 34 - Panelling of the suspension gear on the shaft side and door posts
SA 35 - Gap cover for plastering
SA 37 - Rubber strip at closing edge
SA 38 - Wall plug fixture
SA 39 Halogen-free cables for landing and elevator car door
SA 40 - Mount for 300 mm < (car height door height) 500 mm
SA 41 Fully glazed door panels
SA 42 - Widened toeguard, up to outer edge of the suspension gear (suspension gear width)
SA 43 - Panelling for the entire suspension gear sheet metal casing, for glass shaft
SA 44 S8A: delivery device, special toeguard of bottom landing door; K8A: folding toe guard
SA 45 - High-resolution 3D light grid (height up to 1800 mm) with integrate motion detection system (door width up to 1900 mm)
SA 47 Protection of closing edge for solid glass doors, U-profile made of stainless steel
SA 49 - Widened toeguard up to outer edge of the door posts (width of door post)
SA 51 - Monitoring of emergency unlocking, locking, only with M2T
SA 52 - Type of protection IP x3 / fire service elevator
SA 53 - Additional lock for second, faster door panel on M2Z and M4TZ
SA 54 Vision panel in acc. with sample high-rise guideline and EN 81-1, no fire protection with EN 81-58 included
For technical reasons, not all special versions can be combined with one another, details on request.
162 Issue 09/2015

Comfort Door
S8A / K8A
Special Versions
Doors
Special versions
Special S8A landing K8A car

Description
versions door door
SA 55 Double-leaf door panels
SA 56 - Labyrinth at the closing edge, only in conjunction with SA 55 and only for M2Z and M4TZ
SA 57 - Recess in the door post for cover plate, not for M2Z with front wall of the elevator shaft
SA 60 - Deep recess of 100 mm (M2T, M4TZ) or 60 mm (M2Z), for aluminium door sill with permitted wheel load (QRL) up to 280 kg
SA 65 - Additional switch mounting for monitoring, protection type IP20
SA 67 - Version without shaft door toeguard; a clamping bracket is used instead
SA 69 - Cam mounting for SA 27 in conjunction with an elevator car door of another generation
SA 71 - Door suitable for instal. complying with DIN EN 81-71, (available from conversion to DIN EN 81-20/-50)
SA 74 - Hook lock with weight (version for example for China), available for M4TZ as of DW 1400 mm
SA 75 - Monitoring of emergency unlocking, scanning, only with M2T
SA 79 - Insulated car installation, suspension gear on elevator car and supporting bracket with insulation element
SA 100 - Fire protection class 2-h-Integrity complying with BS 476 (GB) and E30 complying with GOST (RU)
Fire protection class EI60 complying with GOST for Russia, Kazakhstan, Belarus.
Fire protection class EI120 complying with GOST for Ukraine.
SA 101 Special version for Russia is available only in combination with SA 55 (in this case not possible with powder coating).
Special version for Belarus is available only for door types M2T and M2Z.
SA 104 - Fire protection class E120, EW30 complying with DIN EN 81-58
SA 105 - Fire protection class E120, EW60 complying with DIN EN 81-58
SA 106 - Fire protection class EI60 complying with DIN EN 81-58
SA 109 - Fire protection class EI120 complying with DIN EN 81-58, door width DW = 800-1400 mm and door height DH = 2000-2700 mm
For technical reasons, not all special versions can be combined with one another, details on request.
Comfort Door
S8A / K8A
Structure of the Landing Door
Doors
Suspension gear
Shaft securing bracket,

to anchor rail or secured with wall plugs
Door post mounting,

secured with wall plugs
Carriage
Hook lock,
landing door lock (optional)
Sheet metal casing
Running rail
Opening post
Door panels
Closing edge door post
Basic body of shaft door sill,

made of steel plate
Guide rail profile,

made of aluminium or stainless steel
Shaft securing bracket,

to anchor rail or secured with wall plugs
Lower door panel guides
Shaft door toeguard
164 Issue 09/2015

Comfort Door
S8A / K8A
Layout of the Car Door
Doors
Suspension gear
Door drive motor with control device,

F9
Car installation, rigid

or insulated (SA 79, not shown)
V-groove belt
Toothed belt
Carriage
Widening cam
Sheet metal casing
Running rail
Supporting bracket
(SA 79, not shown)
Door panels
Light grids
Basic body of car door sill,

made of steel plate
Guide rail profile,

made of aluminium or stainless steel
Insulation for supporting bracket

(SA 79, not shown)
Lower door panel guides
Car door toeguard

(not shown)
SA special version
166 Issue 09/2015
Door Drive
Modernisation for Door Drive F9
Doors
gearless, frequency-controlled asynchronous motor drive programmable special output (virtual switch, clo-
quiet operation sing force limitation, additional end positions
maintenance-free and compact unit of motor and controller signal)
Controller with clock frequency of 16 kHZ Power limitation according to EN81
high-resolution shaft encoder Diagnostics and Parameterisation automatically
high car heights or via Laptop
vibration-free drive Mains voltage: 230V (+10% / -15%) AC voltage,
Protection type IP54 50/60Hz signal voltage
Door width 700-2500 mm ambient temperature range: -10C to + 50C
after reserving, the width that opens the door relative humidity max. 70%
can be reduced if desired EMV tested according to EN12015/16
24V logic level
Door-Modernisation Kits:
The modernisation solution has been specially designed for the different doors
Transmission from the drive to the door through a belt
The modernisationkits are independent from the doorwidth, as they can be adjusted on site
No necessity for limit switches
Haushahn, TSS72K:
This modernisation kit consists of a
console that can be adjusted accor-
ding to the door width and a special
cam that fits to the old door.
Thyssen, M2TD4:
This Modernisation Kit consists of the doordrive F9
which replaces the old telescopic arm by the belt.
Furthermore it has a console that can be adjusted
according to the existing door width and an instruction
manual with drawings.
Thyssen, M3TK/2:
With this solution the old doordrive is
replaced by the F9 door drive with a
belt.
Thyssen, M2Z/ M2T/ M4TZ (D1,G1,D2,W1,W2,W3,W7):

This Modernisation Kit consists of the F9 door motor, a simple
bracket that fits to the above listed old door drives and a drawing
for the installation.
Further Modernisation Kits are available for:

Schindler QKS6/QKS8/QKS9/QKS11
For more type of doors that can be modernised, please do not hesitate to contact our sales team.
168 Issue 09/2015
LEA
LEA
- Family
The Lift Family
Kits
Functionality at its finest
MRL, 450 1000 kg, 1,0 m/s
LEA Standardized dimensions
The Kits of LiftEquip PMC 145-2, MFC or MFR
Variabel and functional
Well thought solution LEA MRL, 450 1000 kg, 1,0 m/s
Adaptable dimensions
Flexible PMC 145-2, MFC or MFR
Individually for your application The allrounder
LEA MRL, 450 5000 kg, 0,5 2,0 m/s

Custom applications
Secure and reliable quality products Comfort DAF210 / DAF270, MFC / MFR
Robust and reliable
Perfectly coordinated components LEA MR, 1800 6000 kg, up to 1,0 m/s
Planning according to customer
Cargo requirements
Door width up to 3000 mm
Competent advice Personally and individually
LEA Gulliver and Orion, accord. to 2006/42/EG

Up to 5 stops, 0,15 m/s, 15 m TH
Home Over 70 platform variants and

design options
LEA 173
LEA Flexible 185
LEA Comfort 189
LEA Cargo 193
LEA Home 209
Technical Report
LEA
- Family
The Lift Family
PROdukTE und FACHbERICHTE / PROduCTS And TECHnICAL REPORTS

Technical Report - LEA-Familiy
LEA die Aufzugfamilie

LEA the lift family
LiftEquip ist seit vielen Jahren erfolgreich in Wohn und Geschftsgebuden. Die LiftEquip has for many years been suc-
mit Aufzugkomponenten und Komponen- Fahrkrbe in Edelstahldesign, verschiedene cessfully represented on the market
ten-Sets weltweit im Markt vertreten. Mit Beleuchtungsoptionen und die Mglichkeit worldwide with lift components and
der LEA Familie (LiftEquip Aufzug) mchte die Rckwand in Glas auszufhren und component sets. The company intends
das Unternehmen einen noch strkeren auch Glastren einzusetzen, machen den to emphasise the area of construction
Fokus auf den Bereich der Baustze und Aufzug zu einem attraktiven Produkt fr sets and systems even more with the LEA
Systeme legen, da der Markt in den ver- jeden Aufzugsbauer. Wirtschaftlichkeit und family (LiftEquip Aufzug = lift), since the
schiedenen Segmenten wie Neuanlage und Qualitt werden nicht nur bei der Her market in the various segments such as
Modernisierung nach Komplettlsungen stellung grogeschrieben, optimierte new lifts and modernisation, demands
fragt. Hier ist nicht nur die Lsung aus einer Montageablufe reduzieren die Kosten complete solutions. Here what counts is
Hand wichtig, hier ist auch die kompetente bei Einbau und Inbetriebnahme. In Bezug not just having solution from one source,
Beratung bei schwierigen Einsatzbedin- auf die Energieeffizienz knnen hier in but also expert advice in the event of dif-
gungen gefragt. Abhngigkeit von der Nutzungskatego ficult conditions of use.
rie Aufzge nach Energieeffizienzklasse
Das Spektrum der Aufzugsfamilie LEA A nach VDI 4707 gebaut werden. Einen The spectrum of the LEA lift family ranges from
reicht vom Standard MRL Bausatz fr die wichtigen Beitrag zur Energieeffizienz leis the standard construction kit for lifts without ma-
unterschiedlichen Marktsegmente bis chine rooms for the various market segments to
hin zu den Systemen im Bereich der the area of special lifts and cargo lifts as well as lifts
Sonderanlagen und Lastenaufzge without machine rooms and conventional lifts
LiftEquip (2)
sowohl als MRL Systeme als auch als with a machine room. Here there are no off-the-
konventionelle Anlage mit Triebwerks peg solutions, what is called for are engineering
raum. Hier gibt es nicht die Lsung von and individual planning.
When it comes to these construction sets, we
der Stange, hier sind Engineering und
supply all mechanical modules together with
individuelle Planung gefragt.
the drive technology and converter as well as all
Bei diesen Baustzen liefern wir alle safety components. The interfaces for the controls
mechanischen Baugruppen mit An available on the market are clearly defined, as
triebstechnik und Umrichter sowie al a result of which lift builders can choose freely
len Sicherheitsbauteilen. Die Schnitt and select the electrical components for overall
stellen zu den am Markt verfgbaren system according to their requirements.
Steuerungen sind klar definiert, damit The LEA Home occupies a special position in this
hat der Aufzugbauer die freie Auswahl series, as Gulliver and Orion according to the Ma-
und kann nach seinen Anforderungen chinery Directive. The complete system is avail-
die elektrischen Komponenten fr das able optionally complete with shaft framework
or for installation in an existing shaft.
Gesamtsystem auswhlen.
The overview of the LEA family shows the condi-
Eine Sonderstellung nimmt in dieser
tions of use of the different systems.
Reihe der LEA Home, als Gulliver und In its standard version the company provides
Orion nach Maschinenrichtlinie, ein. the LEA as a construction kit for a lift without
Das Komplettsystem kann wahlweise machine room, which can be used in the per-
komplett mit Schachtgerst oder zum formance range 450 kg, 630 kg and 1000 kg
Einbau in einem bestehenden Schacht and 1 m/s. Solutions with reduced protective
angeboten werden. spaces for optimal exploitation of the shaft can
Die bersicht der LEA Familie zeigt be realised here. Through-loading is also pos-
die Einsatzbedingungen der unter sible from 630 kg upwards. Consequently, this
schiedlichen Systeme. LEA is especially suitable for use in residential
and business buildings. Lift cars in stainless
Mit dem LEA in seiner Standardver
steel design, different lighting options and the
sion bietet das Unternehmen einen
option to produce the back wall in glass as well
Bausatz fr einen MRL Aufzug, der im as with glass doors, make the lift an attractive
Leistungsbereich von 450 kg, 630 kg product for any lift builder. Economic efficiency
und 1000 kg und 1 m/s einsetzbar ist.
Lsungen mit reduzierten Schutzru
men fr eine optimale Ausnutzung
des Schachtes sind hier realisierbar. LEA: Das System auch mit
Ab 630 kg ist auch Durchladung reduzierten Schutzrumen
machbar. Dieser LEA ist damit be LEA: The system with
sonders geeignet fr den Einsatz reduced protective spaces
18 Liftjournal 2/2015
170 Issue 09/2015

Technical Report
LEA
- Family
The Lift Family
PROdukTE und FACHbERICHTE / PROduCTS And TECHnICAL REPORTS
Technical Report - LEA-Familiy

tet hier der Gearlessantrieb PMC1452 and quality are not just priorities in production;
sowie der Frequenzumrichter MFR mit optimised assembly processes reduce the costs
integrierter Rckspeisung. during installation and start-up. With regard
to energy efficiency - depending on the use
Der LEA basiert auf einem baumus
category it is possible here to build as energy
tergeprften System und kann in der
efficiency class A according to VDI 4707. The
Abwandlung mit einer freien Steuerung gearless drive PMC145-2 and MFR frequency
auf Basis des geprften Systems durch converter with integrated regenerative brak-
Einzelabnahme in Verkehr gebracht ing make an important contribution to energy
werden. efficiency.
Mit dem LEA bietet LiftEquip eine The LEA is based on a type-tested system and can
uerst wirtschaftliche Lsung fr den be put into operation in the version with a free
Volumenmarkt an. Sollten individuelle control based on the tested system by individual
Lsungen gefordert sein, stehen der inspection and acceptance.
LEA Flex und der LEA Comfort als LiftEquip has an extremely economic solution for
the volume market with the LEA. If individual so-
weitere MRL Baustze zur Verfgung.
lutions are needed, the LEA Flex and LEA Comfort
Da alle verwendeten Komponenten
are available as additional construction sets for
am Markt frei zugnglich sind, ist auch lifts without machine rooms. Since all the com-
fr den Betreiber die maximale Flexibi ponents used on the market are freely available,
litt und Langlebigkeit der Anlage in maximum flexibility and durability of the lift with
Bezug auf zuknftige Modernisierung regard to future modernisations are also available
gegeben. to the operator.
Volker Lenzner Volker Lenzner
Technischer Leiter Technical Director
LiftEquip GmbH LiftEquip GmbH
www.liftequip.de Die LEA Familie / The LEA family www.liftequip.de
Liftjournal 2/2015 19
Anz_Lift-Journal_01-15_210x151mm_RZ_PFAD.indd 1 12/15/14 9:05 PM
172 Issue 09/2015
LEA
LEA
Kits
Functionality at its finest
MRL, 450 1000 kg, 1,0 m/s
Standardized dimensions
PMC 145-2, MFC or MFR
System description and advantages 174

Technical overview 175
Technical Details 176
Car Design 178
Main components 180
Scope of supply and planning information 181
Performance programme and options 182
LEA
System Description and Advantages

Kits
LEA for your customers Safety

With the LEA elevator kit, LiftEquip offers System corresponds to DIN EN 81-1:
you a future oriented system solution for 1998+A3, for commencement of
residential and office buildings. As a operation per individual inspection with
functional machine-room-less passenger EC Type Test Certificate as basis
elevator, it has an elaborate layout with Efficiency
optimal shaft usage and proven, high Modern, highly efficient gearless machine
quality components. (PMC Gearless)
Variable frequency control (V3F)
Use a control system of your choice! with power regeneration as an option
You can configure LEA into a bespoke Energy saving LED lighting
product from your company by combining
Economic efficiency
it with a control system of your choice. It is
Excellent price/performance ratio
also possible to integrate further options of
Efficient maintenance options
operating and indicator elements that are
freely available on the market. Reliability
High reliability resulting from deployment
LEA provides maximum flexibility for the of proven components (e.g. doors)
shaft height dimensions, you can design High quality materials
the type-approved system optionally with
Design
reduced headroom and/or reduced pit
Modern elevator car design with many
depth. If there is more space available, equipment options
simply plan with conventional shaft height Glass doors and glass rear wall in the
dimensions some additional safety elevator car as an option
measures can then be omitted. As of
630 kg, an open through entrance is also Comfort
possible. Low-noise
Gentle ride quality and precise stops
The elevator car design of LEA is highly Innovation
presentable as you can choose from a wide Machine-Room-Less
range of ceiling lightings, wall versions, With / without reduced headroom and pit
flooring materials and hand-rails. The depths
LED lighting systems are very appealing
and economical. Further options such as Scope of supply
glass doors and a glass rear wall are also Short delivery times
Common options available
possible in the elevator car.
Flexibility
In all cases, LEA is a very economical Configurable into an elevator system Not included in the scope of supply of the LEA are:
system. The initial purchase offers a from your company by deploying Control system, control box with measures for rescue of
very good price-performance ratio and your preferred control system and the passengers, operating and indicator elements, external
control panels, mounted control panels in the elevator
it is optimised for rapid installation. The operating and indicator elements you car, emergency call system, travelling cable, shaft
deployment of a modern, gearless machine wish to have. selector, shaft wiring, shaft lighting, inspection control
makes it highly energy efficient during and emergency stop switch.
operation.
Energy efficiency
LEA provides you with a modern, attractive With LEA, you can configure an elevator system A
elevator system with all the advantages of that achieves a high energy efficiency class.
series manufacturing. You thereby make a significant contribution to the
B
reduction of ongoing operating and energy costs
and lowering CO2 emissions.
On an installation with 630 kg, 4 landings, 8.6 m travel height,
LED lighting, automatic shutdown of the car lighting and power
regeneration, it has been possible to verify energy efficiency
class "A" in the usage category 1 in accordance with VDI 4707.
174 Issue 09/2015

LEA
Technical Overview
Kits
Two-panel telescopic sliding door (M2T)
Rated Load [kg] 450 630 1000 (deep)

Speed [m/s] 1.0
Max. travel height 1) [m] 45
Number of passengers 6 8 13
Dual entrance no no yes no yes
Max. number of landings 16
Car width CW [mm] 1000 1100
Car depth CD [mm] 1250 1400 2100
Car height CH [DH+100] or [DH+200] [mm] 2100 / 2200 / 2300 / 2500
Door width DW [mm] 800 800 / 900
Door height DH [mm] 2000 / 2100 / 2300
Shaft width SW with DW 800 [mm] 1500 1600
Shaft width SW with DW 900 [mm] 1600
Shaft depth ECD/D11 door in shaft [mm] 1650 1785 2010 2485 2710
Shaft depth ECD/D11 door in recess (recess = 80 mm) [mm] 1580 1715 1870 2415 2570
Shaft depth ECD/D11 door on landing (recess = 100 mm) [mm] 1550 1685 1810 2385 2510
Shaft depth S8A/D11 door in shaft [mm] 1655 1790 2020 2490 2720
Shaft depth S8A/D11 door in recess (recess = 55 mm) [mm] 1600 1735 1910 2435 2610
Shaft head height red. shaft head [CH+500] with ECD [mm] 2600 / 2700 / 2800 / 3000
Shaft head height red. shaft head [DH+800] with S8A or glass door [mm] 2800 / 2900 / 3100
Conventional shaft head height [CH+1300] [mm] 3400 / 3500 / 3600 / 3800
Schaft pit depth with reduced shaft pit 2) [mm] 400
Conventional shaft pit depth [mm] 1100 1850
Min. floor-to-floor-distance [DH+550]; (min. 200 with offset dual entrance) [mm] 2550 (with ECD) / 2590 (with S8A)
Two-panel central opening door (M2Z)

Rated load [kg] 450 630 1000 (deep)
Speed [m/s] 1.0
Max. travel height 1) [m] 45
Number of passengers 6 8 13
Dual entrance no no yes no yes
Car width CW [mm] 1000 1100
Car depth CD [mm] 1250 1400 2100
Car height CH [DH+100] [mm] 2100 / 2200 / 2300 / 2500
Door width DW [mm] 800 800 / 900
Door height DH [mm] 2000 / 2100 / 2300
Shaft depth S11/D11 door in shaft [mm] 1610 1745 1930 2445 2630
Shaft depth S11/D11 door in recess (recess = 80 mm) [mm] 1540 1675 1790 2375 2490
Shaft depth S11/D11 door on landing (recess = 100 mm) [mm] 1510 1645 1730 2345 2430
Shaft depth S8A/D11 door in shaft [mm] 1575 1710 1860 2410 2560
Shaft depth S8A/D11 door in recess (recess = 20 mm) [mm] 1560 1695 1830 2395 2530
Conventional shaft head height [CH+1300] [mm] 3400 / 3500 / 3600 / 3800
Conventional shaft pit depth [mm] 1100 1850
Min. floor-to-floor-distance [DH+550]; (min. 200 with offset dual entrance) [mm] 2550 (with S11) / 2590 (with S8A)
1)
With a travel height from 33 m to 45 m, no reduced shaft pit possible.
2)
With elevator car flooring material thickness of up to 3.5 mm, shaft pit depth of 425 mm with flooring material thickness of up to 25 mm.
LEA
Technical Details
Kits
Technical and electric data

Rated load Q [kg] 450 630 1000
Synchronous gearless machine type PMC145-2S PMC145-2M PMC145-2L
Frequency controller (V3F) type MFC 21/31 MFC 21/31 MFC 21/31
with energy recovery (optional) type MFR 5.5 MFR 5.5 MFR 7.5
Number of travel per hour max. [s/h] 180
Rated output of motor [kW] 2.8 3.9 6.0
Operating input power 1), 2) [kVA] 3.6 4.7 7.2
Nominal operating current 1), 2) [A] 5.1 6.7 10.4
Starting current 1), 2) [A] 7.8 10.0 15.1
Rope suspension 2:1
Suspension rope (steel) n x ds [mm] 5/6 x 6 6/7 x 6 9/10 x 6
Guide rails Elevator car T70
Counterweight T-50/A
Counterweight with safety gear T70
At 400 Volt / 50 Hz. 2) Data for the elevator control unit have to be added.
1)
During the planning phase, please consider all applicable regulations stipulated by the relevant notified body and all applicable national regulations.
Specified loads in the shaft pit

Rated load Q [kg] 450 630 1000
Load points / elevator car guide rails P7 [kN] 16 20 29 P10
x P8*
Load points / elevator car buffer P8 [kN] 48 59 86
P9
Load points / counterweight buffer P9 [kN] 37 44 62 P7 P7
Load points / counterweight guide rails P10 [kN] 16 19 27
SD
P8
Extraordinary loads:
P10
- Load points / machine base frame P11 [kN] 4 x 3.5 4 x 4.5 4x6 x P8*
- Load points / rope fixing points P12 [kN] 4 x 2.5 4 x 6.5 4 x 3.5 4 x 9.0 4 x 6.0 4 x 13.5
The loads P7 to P10 never occur simultaneously.
* Two buffers in the case of reduced shaft pit depth. With a conventional shaft pit depth, only one buffer, central between
the elevator car guide rails.
DW + 240 70 (DW = 800)
1040 (DW = 800) 50 (DW = 900)
1140 (DW = 900)
SW
Shaft layout with side-opening door (M2T) Shaft layout with central opening door (M2Z)
CD
CD
CD
CD
SD
SD
SD
SD
(optional)
(optional)
(optional)
(optional)
Recess
Recess
Recess
Recess
DW DW DW DW
CW CW CW CW
SW SW SW SW
Shaft layout is also possible as mirror-inverted, with position of the counterweight on the opposite shaft side.
176 Issue 09/2015

LEA
Technical Details
Kits
Door installed in shaft Shaft vertical section with
The landing doors are fastened to the reduced headroom and / or conventional headroom and
shaft wall by means of brackets and drill or reduced pit depth conventional pit depth
(only available with telescopic door)
fixings. Door type S8A can optionally be
mounted with securing bolts on anchor
rails (measurement in concrete according
to CEN/TS 1992-4:2009) that are cast into
the shaft wall or welded onto a shaft steel
structure.
mm mm
CW
SH = 3400/3500/3600/3800
CD
SD
SH = 2600/2700/2800/3000 mm
mm
SK = 2900/3000/3100/3300
2100/2200/2300/2500 mm
mm
KHCH= =2100/2200/2300/2500
2000/2100/2300 mm
DH==2000/2100/2300
DW
SW
OFF ORF
TH
FFL UFL
Door installation in recess

In the interest of optimal utilisation of
space, the landing door can be installed in
a recess.
CW
CD
SD
UFL FFL OFF ORF

FFL UFL
Recess = 55 mm (S8A/M2T)
Recess = 20 mm (S8A/M2Z)
(bei S8A)
mm
mmS8A)
= 45
= 45
Recess = 80 mm
DW mm (with
max.
FHmax.
/ 2590
SW
TH
2590
mm /mm
1 min. = 2550
Door installation in the story with

1 min. = 2550
shaft front wall UFL FFL

Installation of the landing door on the story
HST
mm
200 mm
. .
HST
with the shaft front wall is also possible.

min
HST 22min
== 200
This stretches across the entire shaft width.

HST
OFF ORF
FFL UFL
From the point of view of construction, this
SP = 400 mm
=400 mm
SP = 1100 mm
means no special door opening is required.

SG
CW
CD
SD
ST
Recess = 100 mm
SD
DW
SW
LEA with reduced dimension for LEA with conventional dimension for
Front wall of elevator shaft headroom and/or pit depth headroom and pit depth
Ideal for very narrow space available and for reduction In the basic version, LEA is designed with conventional
of the construction costs. With LEA, there is the choice headroom and conventional shaft pit. Even then, the
DH - door height TH - travel height of only the headroom, only the pit depth or both dimen- space requirement is very low.
DW - door width HST - floor-to-floor-distance sions reduced. The reduced dimensions for head room In this case, no additional protective measures need to
CH - car height SH - shaft headroom and pit depth are only possible in conjunction with the be implemented.
CW - car width SP - shaft pit depth telescopic door (M2T). Please observe all applicable
CD - car depth FFL - finished floor level regulations stipulated by the relevant notified body and
SW - shaft width UFL - unfinished floor level all applicable national regulations.
SD - shaft depth
LEA
Car Design
Kits
Equipment features of the design lines

Colours / materials
Available colours
colour-line
Electrolytically Traffic White White Aluminium Sand Yellow Ocean Blue Pastel Green Pastel Grey
galvanised (RAL 9016) (RAL 9006)
wood-line stainless-line
Kiruna Bird Rich Cherry Natural Oak Erable Chocolat Stainless Steel, Stainless Steel Stainless Steel
(beech) (dark cherry) (light oak) (black ash) grain 220, Linen Elephant Skin
Ground and
Brushed
False ceilings and lighting
Honeycomb Spot Constellation Domino SlimLED PANEL* Imola (l=320 mm) Polymero (l=310 mm)
LED lighting LED lighting LED lighting Lighting directly in with energy-saving with energy-saving
possible possible possible the car ceiling lighting lighting
* on request
Flooring material
Light Grey Dark Grey Black Blue Traffic Wood Traffic Attila Without flooring material lowered
(6525, Natural (6527, Natural (6530, Natural (3391, Vinyl) (2691, Vinyl) by 3.5 or 25 mm for customer-fitted
Rubber) Rubber) Rubber) flooring material
Handrails Bumber rails
Stainless Steel, Stainless Steel, Stainless Steel, PVC Wood

grain 220, grain 220 , grain 220, 127 x 27 mm 120 x 30 mm
l 40 mm l 40 mm Curved ends 140 x 18 mm
(acc. to EN 81-70)
Skirting Mirror Glass rear wall Glass door
Stainless Steel, Aluminium On rear wall of car, with In Stainless Steel, frame Glass door panels with
grain 220 aluminium strips profile with aluminium frame
178 Issue 09/2015

LEA
Car Design
Kits
Elevator cars
colour-line wood-line stainless-line
Glass versions (optional)

DH 120 mm
DH
0.5 x DW 62 mm
DW
Glass door panels with frame Glass surface in the glass door panel Glass rear wall
(telescopic door, opening to the right)
LEA
Main Components
Kits
Gearless machine Gearless PMC145

The synchronous gearless PMC145-2 Type-approved safety brake in
is one of the most compact machines accordance with EN 81-1 Section 9.10
worldwide and is perfectly suited for and protective device against unintended
deployment in the LEA elevator system movement of the elevator car in
without a machine room. accordance with EN 81-1: 1998+A3:2009
High efficiency EN 81-A3 compliant
Low noise as there is no forced UCM verification using the safety brake of
ventilation and very smooth running the machine and considering the switching
Safe and comfortable electromagnetic times of the control system
brake release Rope guard in accordance with
Anti-friction bearings with life-time EN 81-77 up to earthquake category 3
lubrication
Ideally suited for energy recovery
PMC145-2
Frequency inverter MFC 21/31 Inverter MFR Inverter (optional)

The power-vector-controlled LiftEquip The MFR frequency inverter with energy
frequency inverter is optimised for the recovery capability is the optimal
PMC145-2 synchronous machine. technology for the creation of an energy
efficient elevator.
Inverter with brake activation, power
In addition to features of the MFC 21/31:
filter and power choke
With travel contactor (MFC 31) Inverter with electronic brake activation,
Brake resistor in the separate housing power filter, power choke and electronic
Motor parameters stored travel contactors
Rapid commissioning via Plug&Play Integrated power regeneration, which
Emergency power mode possible in the means no brake resistor is required
event of a power failure via UPS Possibility for activation of a standby and
(uninterrupted power supply) sleep mode to improve energy efficiency
Integrated speed monitoring for Possibility for remote parameterisation
compliance with EN81-A3 (for MFC 31) via parallel interface, DCP03/04 and
in conjunction with suitable control CANopen
system
MFC 31 MFR (optional)
Parallel interface and DCP03
Doors Door Type ECD/D11 and/or S11/D11 Door Type S8A/D11 (optional/on request)
Landing door ECD and/or S11 Landing door S8A
Fire-tested in compliance with Fire-tested in compliance with
DIN EN 81-58 DIN EN 81-58
Door panels at top with rollers and Door panels at top with large rollers and
counterrollers, two gliding felt strips counterrollers, adjustable sliders
Telescopic door (M2T): door type ECD The door panels are single-leaf and made
Central door (M2Z): door type S11 in noise-inhibiting sandwich design
Car door D11 (door drive RT301) Comprehensive range of options
Voltage-controlled machine with toothed
belt drive Car door D11 (door drive VF400)
Automatic learning function Frequency-controlled machine with
Adjustable opening / closing times toothed belt drive
Collision detection Automatic learning function
Landing door with stainless steel panelling
Adjustable opening / closing times
(telescopic door, opening to the left)
Collision detection
180 Issue 09/2015

LEA
Scope of Supply and Planning Information
Kits
Scope of supply LEA elevator system Not included in the scope of supply are:
Machine Landing door (ECD and/or S11) / Control system with control box and
Gearless machine PMC145-2, car door (D11) measures for the rescue of passengers
with motor cable Door panels and door architraves made Operating and indicator elements
BSV4 for brake activation of electrolytically galvanised sheet metal External control panels
Encoder (BISS-C, NDAT, etc.) with cables with primed front (RAL 7005) Mounted control panel in the elevator car
Positioned on drive bracket in the shaft Car door panels single-leaf, made of Emergency call system
headroom, supported by bearings and austenitic stainless steel, grain 220 Car distributor box
protected from vibration Door drive with DC-current control, power Travelling cable
transmission with toothed belt, closing Shaft selector
Frequency inverter Shaft wiring and lighting
force limitation
MFC21 / MFC31 inverter without power Inspection control, emergency stop switch
Light curtain
regeneration, with chopper resistor Integration of the inverter
Aluminium shaft door sills
MFR inverter (optional) with power rege- Connection of the elevator car lighting, of
neration Progressive safety gear the elevator car fan and of the overload
Progressive safety gear for downwards sensor
Elevator car
direction, integrated in the car floor Load measurement system (occupied,
Self-supporting elevator car, two plastic
Protection in upward direction: full load, overload)
diverter pulleys (l 240 mm) on the
monitored operational brake according All of the above components must be
bottom, suspension 2:1, car railing
to EN 81-1, 9.10 provided by the installation firm and/or a
Vibration insulation with steel springs
Ventilation in the door portal Speed governor control system supplier.
l 200 mm, with remote tripping, Control box of the control system
Counterweight
positioned in the shaft headroom at The control box with control system is not
Steel plate frame with diverter pulley
the rail end included in the scope of supply. It must
Filler weights: steel, Gussolith (type 3.8 /
Governor rope l 6.5 mm be provided by the installation firm. The
5.0), concrete, in variable ratio
Tensioner device control box is mounted preferably in the top
Counterweight compensation 40 %
Buffer landing of the entrance area. Installation
Guides on elevator car / counterweight in the landings below this is possible.
Counterweight: driving on the frame
Moving plastic guides The nearest landing door must be located
Elevator car: in the shaft pit
Optional pulley guides within calling distance of the control box
With reduced shaft headroom (optional) and be visible from the control box. If the
Guide rails
Opening monitoring for all landing doors control box is installed in an adjoining
For elevator car: T70
with reset for normal travel room, the room must be equipped with an
For counterweight T50/A, with safety
Speed governor with positive effect* intercom system in accordance with
gear on counterweight: T70
of control system EN 81-1:1998+A3, Section 14.2.3.4.
Rope system Monitored, automatic pivot stops on the
Steel ropes l 6.0 mm (1770 N/mm) car roof and step protection monitoring Legal information
Rope fixing points in the shaft headroom, Monitored, pivoting railing The LEA elevator system has been
suspensions insulated with rubber / steel granted an EC Type Test Certificate in
With reduced shaft pit (optional) accordance with Point 5, Paragraph B,
springs
Opening monitoring for the landing doors Appendix V (Module B) of the 95/16/
Compensation chain as of travel height
in top and bottom floors with reset for EC Directive. Before the commencement
> 33 m
normal travel of operation, the installation firm must
Shaft equipment Speed governor with positive effect* have the elevator system per inspected /
Two-part sliding shackles made of of control system approved in an individual inspection with
powder-coated, painted or galvanised Monitored telescopic car door toeguard danger analysis. The existing EC Type Test
steel plate with electrical operation Certificate can be used as the basis for this.
Monitored buffer support for connection During the planning phase, please consider
Painting/priming
in the shaft pit all applicable regulations stipulated by the
Steel parts mainly with powder coat-
ing (similar to RAL 7005) or priming relevant notified body and all applicable
(RAL 7031 and/or RAL 7005), layer national regulations. Patents have been
thickness approx. 60 m; galvanised granted for the LEA elevator system. On
* "Positive effect" means that the speed governor is in the an order-related, LiftEquip will issue a
parts remain galvanised pre-triggered position in the event of a power failure.
System is to be safeguarded with a battery. quota licence.
LEA
Performance Programme and Options

Kits
LEA: technical data, landing door
Design lines colour-line wood-line stainless-line

Technical data
Rated load
Q = 450 / 630 / 1000 kg (with 1 entrance) / /
Q = 675 / 1050 kg (with open through entrance) /
Speed v = 1.0 m/s
Travel height TH max. = 45 m
Car height CH = 2100 / 2200 / 2300 / 2500 mm / / /
Door types
M2T Side-opening, double-panel telescopic opening door
M2Z Centre-opening, double-panel sliding door
Door width DW = 800 / 900 mm /
Door height DH = 2000 / 2100 / 2300 mm / /
Shaft headroom SH
Min. 3400 mm (CH + 1300 mm)
Reduced: min. 2800 mm (DH + 800 mm, with door type S8A (M2T) with VF400)
Reduced: min. 2600 mm (CH + 500 mm, with door type ECD (M2T))
Shaft pit depth SP
Min. 1100 mm
1100 1850 mm
Reduced: min. 400 mm + flooring material thickness (available up to TH < 33 m),
only available with telescopic door (M2T)
Reduced: 450 1100 mm (available up to TH < 33 m),
only available with telescopic door (M2T)
Rail bracket fixing
with drill fixing
to anchor rails
Compatible supports for calcium silicate walls (not for Germany)
Safety gear on the counterweight
Pulley guide on the elevator car
Roller guide on counterweight
Halogen-free wiring
Landing door
Installation in shaft / in recess (80 mm) / in landing (recess = 100 mm)
[ECD and/or S11] / /
Installation in the shaft / in recess (with M2T = 55 mm; with M2Z = 20 mm) [S8A] /
Installation in landing with shaft front wall, shaft width = 1600 1800 mm
Fire protection safety standard E120 / EW60 in accordance with EN 81-58
Fire protection safety standard EI60 acc. to EN 81-58
Fire protection safety standard E30 acc. to GOST
Fire protection safety standard EI120 acc. to GOST
Design of door panels and door frame
Primed (RAL 7005) / electrolytically galvanised / /
Stainless Steel, grain 220 / Linen / Elephant Skin / / / /
Aluminium door sill (max. wheel load 190 kg) / Stainless Steel (max. wheel load 350 kg) /
Profile between the door frames made of aluminium
Gap cover primed (RAL 7005) / electrolytically galvanised /
Gap cover Stainless Steel, grain 220 / Linen / Elephant Skin / /
Wall plug fixture
Floor-to-floor-distance landing min. = DH + 360 mm
Glass door panels with frame (door type ECD/D11 and/or S11/D11)
l in the standard, optional, not available. Please contact our sales consultants regarding the availability of options.
182 Issue 09/2015

LEA
Performance Programme and Options
Kits
LEA: car door, elevator car equipment
Design lines colour-line wood-line stainless-line

Car door
Door security system (closing-edge monitoring)
Light curtain (94 crossed beams)
Door panel design
Electrolytically galvanised
Primed (RAL 7005)
Painted Traffic White 1) / White Aluminium 2) /
Stainless Steel, grain 220
Stainless Steel, Linen
Stainless Steel, Elephant Skin
Car opening panel
Electrolytically galvanised / Traffic White 1) / White Aluminium 2) / /
Stainless Steel, grain 220 / Linen / Elephant Skin / /
Aluminium door sill
Mechanical car door locking, acc. to EN 81-1/2
Elevator car equipment

Wall panels
Electrolytically galvanised
Traffic White 1) / White Aluminium 2) / Sand Yellow / Ocean Blue / / /
Rich Cherry 3) / Natural Oak 4) / Kiruna Bird 5) / Erable Chocolate 6) / / /
Pastel Green / Pastel Grey /
Stainless Steel, grain 220 / Linen / Elephant Skin / /
Car ceiling in Traffic White 1)
Elevator car lighting
Honeycomb / Spot / Constellation / Domino / Imola / Polymero / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
SlimLED PANEL 7) / LED-Beleuchtung (bei Spot / Constellation / Domino) /
Hand-rail
Type Stainless Steel, grain 220, diameter 40 mm with curved ends
Type Stainless Steel, grain 220, diameter 40 mm
Bumper rails
Skirting (Aluminium / Stainless Steel, grain 220) / /
Flooring material
Light Grey 6525 / Dark Grey 6527 / Black Blue 6530 (all natural rubber) / / / /
Traffic Wood 3391 / Traffic Attila 2691 (all vinyl) /
Floor recessed by 3.5 mm / 25 mm (flooring material supplied by the customer) /
Mirror on side wall of car opposite car operating panel / on rear wall of car /
Glass rear wall (basic)
Folding seat (surface-mounted version)
Fan in car ceiling with automatic switching on/off as well as after-run function
1)
RAL 9016, 2) RAL 9006, 3) Cherry dark, 4) Oak Bright, 5) Beech, 6) Ash Black, 7) on request
l in the standard, optional, not available. Please contact our sales consultants regarding the availability of options.
LEA
Reducing energy consumption

This well balanced system and LED lighting option enables LEA to make an obvious
contribution to reducing regular operating costs and CO2 emissions.
Energy recovery
The deployment of the MFR frequency inverter with integrated power regeneration can
further enhance the overall efficiency of the installation. By taking account of the usage
category in accordance with VDI 4707, energy efficiency class "A" can be achieved.
Technology with a secure future

Quality Made in Germany Quality Made by "LiftEquip":
on a level with international standards and appreciated worldwide.
Low-noise ride quality

The deployment of our high-quality and perfectly balanced components make LEA
a very quiet and comfortable elevator system.
Environmentally friendly production

Throughout the production of LEA, we ensure that the environment is protected.
184 Issue 09/2015

LEA
Flexible
LEA
Flexible
Kits
Variabel and functional
MRL, 450 1000 kg, 1,0 m/s
Adaptable dimensions
PMC 145-2, MFC or MFR
Basic package 186

Technical Data 187
Floor Plans 188
LEA
Flexible
Basic Package
Kits
Your Choice:
Basic package
(independent of travel height):
Gearless PMC145-2
Frequency inverter MFC or MFR
Machine frame
Ropefixing frame
Overspeed governor
Counterweight
Rope anchorages
Panelling of counterweight in liftshaft
Governor tension pulley
Buffer supports
Optionen:
Car beams
Counterweight beams
Car guide rails
Counterweight guide rails
Fishplates
Traction ropes
Governor ropes
Counterweights inserts
Cabin
Shaft doors
Cabin doors
186 Issue 09/2015

LEA
Flexible
Technical Data
Kits
Technical Data
Rated load Q [kg] 320 400 450 630 800 1000
Rated speed max. v [m/s] 1,0
Suspension r 2:1
Car internal dimensions 900 1100 1000 1000 1100 1350 1100 1750 1600 2100
(CW x CD) [mm] x x x x x x x x x x
1000 1000 1200 1250 1400 1400 2100 1300 1400 1100
Cabin height clear [mm] 2200
Door width (M2T) DW [mm] 700 800 900 1100 1200
Door height DH [mm] 2000
Clear shaft (W x D) 1450 1650 1650 1900 1650 2300 2150 2650
without dual entrance [mm] x x 1550 x 1600 x x x x x x
1500 1500 1800 1800 2500 1700 1800 1600
Shaft pit SP [mm] 1350
Headroom HR [mm] 3500 (KH + 1300)
Travel height TH [m] 45
LEA
Flexible
Floor Plans
Kits
Headroom Shaft pit
Shaft layout

ST
Konstruktionsbro
Gnter Bttner
Tel.: 07022 - 949444
Load specifications Px are determined during configuration.

For dual entrance will change
the shaft depth, depending on the type of door.
188 Issue 09/2015

LEA
Comfort
LEA
Comfort
Kits
The allrounder
MRL, 450 5000 kg, 0,5 2 m/s
Custom applications
DAF210 / DAF270, MFC / MFR

Project planning data 191
LEA
Comfort
Product Description
Kits
Machine-room-less gearless technology with cen-

trally suspended car (2:1) precisely adapted to your
requirements is also available for solutions with
front and rear entrance. With suspension (4:1) load
capacities up to 5000 kg are possible. We assist you
in your project planning works and provide the tech-
nical calculation for your special requirements.
Installations with speeds less than 1 m/s can be
also designed with reduced shaft pit.
Drive package
MINI-Gearless machines DAF210 to DAF270 equipped with
safety brake acc. to EN 81-1/9.10 and frequency
inverter MFC21 or MFC31 (Plug & Play). The drive package is
designed adapted to your installation parameters. The machine
has isolated supports for wall mounting and rope suspensions.
Optional MFR inverter with integrated regeneration.
Sling
/ safety gear
TCS25 and TCS40 with gauge KB + 50 mm or TCS40
or TCS60 with gauge KB + 110 mm including safety gear, over-
load sensor, car isolation and sliding or roller guides.
Governor
With remote tripping and electrical remote reset as well as ten-
sioning weight and fastenings.
Car and landing door

Comfort S8A/K8A as telescopic or center-closing door
Counterweight
With fillers and safety gears with sliding or roller guides and
travel path cladding, if necessary.
Buffer

Plastic and oil buffers acc. to
calculation and design drawings.
Shaft
equipment
Rail brackets for car and counterweight including
fastenings, car and counterweight rails with fishplates and rail
Ropes

Suspension ropes with
clips.
attachments and governor rope.
Performance data with 2:1 suspension and center-guided rails

Q [kg] v [m/s]
450 kg / 475 kg 0,50 m/s v 2,0 m/s
630 kg / 675 kg 0,50 m/s v 2,0 m/s
1.000 kg / 1.050 kg 0,50 m/s v 2,0 m/s
1.600 kg / 1.650 kg 0,63 m/s v 2,0 m/s
2.000 kg / 2.250 kg 0,63 m/s v 2,0 m/s
2500 kg 0,63 m/s v 2,0 m/s
5000 kg (4:1) 0,5 m/s
190 Issue 09/2015

LEA
Comfort
Project Planning Data
Kits
1)
Shaft plan Shaft head
We offer:
Assistance in planning
Technical planning works for approval

drawings and documentation
Documentation and operating manuals for all

components
Information for your risk analysis
A3 detection (UCM) for your configuration
By Piece license to use the patents of the

system
Legal certainty
Machine base frame
Technical data for selected performance levels

Suspension 2:1 4:12)
Bearing force [kg] 450 630 1000 1600 1600 1600 2000 2000 2000 2500 5000
Cruise [m/s] 1,0 1,0 1,0 1,0 1,6 2,0 1,0 1,6 2,0 1,0 0,5
Shaftdepth [mm] 1500 1800 2500 2800 2800 2800 3100 3100 3100 3100 3900
Shaftwidth 1) [mm] 1650 1650 1650 2150 2150 2150 2250 2250 2250 2700 3900
Shafthead [mm] 3550 3550 3550 4000 4150 4200 4100 4250 4300 3850 4000
Shaftmine [mm] 1150* 1150* 1150* 1150* 1250 1400 1250* 1250 1400 1250 1500
Car width [mm] 1100 1100 1100 1400 1400 1400 1500 1500 1500 1800 2500
Car depth [mm] 1100 1400 2100 2400 2400 2400 2400 2700 2700 2700 3500
TB = 900 mm; TH = 2100 mm; KH = 2200 mm; * reduced shaft pit design available
1)
Sheet metal frame Q 1050kg; Distance wall to center counter weight 130mm
2)
Please contact us for an individual planning
192 Issue 09/2015
LEA
Cargo
LEA
Cargo
Kits
Robust and reliable
MR, 1800 6000 kg, up to 1,0 m/s
Planning according to customer
requirements
Door width up to 3000 mm
System Description and Advantages 194

Technical Overview 195
Planning Drawings: Elevator Shaft 197
Planning Drawings: Doors 198
Planning Data: Doors 199
Robust Elevator Car Equipment 200
Main Components 201
Scope of Supply an Planning Information 203
Range of Geared Machines 204
Range of Gearless Machines 206
Options 207
LEA
Cargo
System Description and Advantages

Kits
LEA Cargo elevator system Safety

LiftEquip offers you with the LEA Cargo System complies with DIN EN 81-1:
elevator assembly kit a modern, adaptable 1998+A3
solution for demanding transport opera-
tions in shopping centres and in industry Efficiency
applications. It is a robust passenger and Variable frequency control (VVVF) with
freight elevator with machine room offering power regeneration as an option
either a proven geared machine or an Energy-saving LED lighting as an option
efficient gearless machine. The choice of
machine type depends on the rated load Economic efficiency
and speed. Only proven and high-quality Equipped either with a robust geared
components are used. machine or with a highly efficient ge-
arless machine
Use a control system of your choice!
In order to be able to offer LEA Cargo to Reliability
your customers, combine it with a control High reliability resulting from the use of
system freely available on the market and robust components (e.g. solid doors)
with operating and indicator elements of High-quality materials
your choice. This ensures that you can
configure LEA Cargo for your customers Design
into a product from your company. Functional, durable car design
Robust wall materials and load-bearing
LEA Cargo exhibits the ultimate in flexi- flooring materials, bumper rails optional
bility when it comes to the doors: you can
use two-, four- or six-panel centre-opening Comfort
doors or one side-opening three-panel Door width can be designed up to the car
door. All the door systems are suitable width for easy loading and unloading
for operation in the freight elevator under
heavy-duty conditions. The modular system Scope of supply
is offered with an entrance and open Wide range of door types and door
through entrance. dimensions from ThyssenKrupp or
Meiller; further door makes can be used
The door width can be designed to extend on request
up to the car width. This provides the Common options available The following are not included in the LEA Cargo scope
perfect conditions for loading and unloa- Safety components in IP54, Teil-Ex (par- of supply:
ding. The complete range of wall and floor Control system with control cabinet, operating and indi-
tial explosion protection) and Ex (explosi- cator elements, external control panels, built-in control
materials or the optional use of additional on protection) available on request panel in the car, emergency call system, car distribution
bumper rails prevents damage to the func- box, travelling cable, shaft selector, shaft wiring, shaft
tionally elegant elevator car. lighting, inspection control, emergency stop switch,
Flexibility integration of the inverter, connection of the car lighting
Configurable into an elevator system and the overload sensor, load measurement system and
LEA Cargo is a highly variable, economical from your company by deploying your electrical installations in the machine room.
and durable elevator system with a modern preferred control system and the opera-
Energy efficiency
machine. By using a frequency inverter with ting and indicator elements you wish to With LEA Cargo you can configure an elevator
optional power regeneration it provides the have system that achieves a high energy efficiency class.
perfect preconditions for energy-efficient You thereby make a significant contribution to the
Engineering services reduction of ongoing operating and energy costs and
operation.
At your request LiftEquip also offers lowering CO2 emissions.
engineering services in the planning of
elevator systems:
Configuration and selection of compo-
nents, preparation of the general arrange-
ment drawing (GAD).
This enables you to circumvent capacity
bottlenecks or resort to additional areas of
competence.
194 Issue 09/2015

LEA
Cargo
Technical Overview
Kits
Project planning (freight traction elevator with machine room above the shaft 1:1 suspension)
1:1
Rated load Q [kg] 1600 2000 2500 2800
Rope suspension 1:1
Speed v [m/s] 0.63 1.0 1)
Travel height min. max. 2)
TH [m] 2.5 40
Machine Geared Standard
Gearless
Open through entrance optional
Car width CW [mm] 1400 1400 2150 1600 2550 1600 2600
Car depth CD [mm] 2400 1900 2950 1900 3000
Car height CH [mm] 2000 2500
Door width 3) DW [mm] 800 1400 800 2150 800 2550 800 2500
Door height 3) DH [mm] 2000 2500
Distance, shaft wall - car (cw side) B1 [mm] 570 850 585 850 700 1000
Distance, shaft wall - car B2 [mm] 300 850 300 1000
Shaft headroom height min. Min. SH [mm] CH + 1300 4) / CH + 1900 5) CH + 1450 4) / CH + 1900 5)
Shaft pit depth min. Min. SP [mm] 1250 1400 6) 1650 6)
Specified loads
Forces on the machine room floor
During normal operation P1 P5 [kN] 120 159 192 227
Unusual load 7) P1 P5 [kN] 382 474 614 724
Forces in the shaft pit
Max. forces in the shaft pit P7 P10 [kN] 169 210 274 309
1)
Speed v = 1.6m/s available on request.
2)
The travel height decisively determines the elevator and shaft parameters. Exact planning specifications depend on the configuration of the elevator system in each case. Deviating
dimensions are possible on request. Our sales advisers will be glad to provide information regarding the creation of exact planning data for your specific system configuration.
3)
Standard dimensions DW and DH in increments of 100mm. 4) Car roof/guard rail height of 700mm. 5) Car roof/guard rail height of 1100mm.
6)
Shaft pit depth increases at v > 1.0m/s. 7) These loads occur at least once a year during the annual check of the installation (safety gear test).
Details on determining the shaft depth dependent on the door type, see page 7.
LEA
Cargo
Technical Overview
Kits
Project planning (freight traction elevator with machine room above the shaft 2:1 suspension)
2:1
Rated load Q [kg] 1600 2000 2500 3000 3500
Rope suspension 2:1
Speed v [m/s] 0.63 1.0 1)
Travel height min. max. 2) TH [m] 2.5 40
Gearless optional
Car width CW [mm] 1400 1400 2150 1600 2550 1900 2500 1600 3000
Car depth CD [mm] 2400 1900 2950 1900 3000 2150 4050
Car height CH [mm] 2000 2500 2000 2800
Door width 3) DW [mm] 800 1400 800 2150 800 2550 800 2500 800 3000
Distance, shaft wall - car (cw side) B1 [mm] 570 850 585 850 700 1000
Shaft pit depth min. Min. SP [mm] 1250 1400 6)
1650 6)
Specified loads
During normal operation P1 P5 [kN] 120 159 192 227 220
Unusual load 7) P1 P5 [kN] 382 474 614 724 703
Max. forces in the shaft pit P7 P10 [kN] 169 210 274 309 337
Rated load Q [kg] 4000 4500 5000 5500 6000

Rope suspension 2:1
Speed v [m/s] 0.63 1.0 0.3 0.5
Travel height min. max. 2)
TH [m] 2.5 30
Gearless
Car width CW [mm] 1600 3000 1600 2750 1800 2500 2000 2300
Car depth CD [mm] 2400 4550 2400 5000 2550 4950 4100 4800 4500 5250
Car height CH [mm] 2000 2800
Door width 3) DW [mm] 800 3000 800 2750 800 2500
Distance, shaft wall - car (cw side) B1 [mm] 700 1000 850 1000
Shaft pit depth min. Min. SP [mm] 1650
Specified loads
During normal operation P1 P5 [kN] 241 264 290 360 380
Unusual load 7)
P1 P5 [kN] 673 735 808 994 1037
Max. forces in the shaft pit P7 P10 [kN] 380 417 460 570 620
1)
Speed v = 1.6m/s available on request.
2)
The travel height decisively determines the elevator and shaft parameters. Exact planning specifications depend on the configuration of the elevator system in each case. Deviating
dimensions are possible on request. Our sales advisers will be glad to provide information regarding the creation of exact planning data for your specific system configuration.
3)
Standard dimensions DW and DH in increments of 100mm. 4) Car roof/guard rail height of 700mm. 5) Car roof/guard rail height of 1100mm.
6)
Shaft pit depth increases at v > 1.0m/s. 7) These loads occur at least once a year during the annual check of the installation (safety gear test).
Details on determining the shaft depth dependent on the door type, see page 7.
196 Issue 09/2015

LEA
Cargo
Planning Drawings: Elevator Shaft
Kits
With 1 entrance Shaft vertical section
MRD
SD
CD
MRH
P1 to P5 *
DW
B1 CW (B2)
SW
With open through entrance
SH
DW
DH
CH
FFL UFL
CD
SD
UFL FFL FFL UFL
TH
DW
B1 CW (B2)
HST 1
SW
UFL FFL
HST 2
FFL UFL
Key:
SP
DH - Door height TH - Travel height P7 to P10 *

DW - Door width HST - Floor clearance
CH - Car height SH - Shaft headroom height
CW - Car width SP - Shaft pit depth
CD - Car depth FFL - Finished floor level
SW - Shaft width UFL - Unfinished floor level SD
SD - Shaft depth
MRH - Machine room height
MRD - Machine room depth
P1.. - Loads in the machine room or in the shaft pit * T he exact positions of the load points in the machine room and in the shaft pit are entered in
B1 - Distance, shaft wall - car (counterweight side) the general arrangement drawing.
B2 Distance, shaft wall - car The shaft layouts are examples and may also be shown mirror-inverted.
LEA
Cargo
Planning Drawings: Doors

Kits
Landing and elevator car doors from ThyssenKrupp
S8A/K8A M2Z S8A/K8A M4TZ

(min. W) 1) CW (min. W) 1) (min. W) 1) CW (min. W) 1)
200
260
265
320
Recess 60
Recess 55
Entrance side Entrance side
min. 1/2 DW DW = 700 - 1400 min. 1/2 DW min. 1/4 DW DW = 800 - 2500 min. 1/4 DW
+85 1) +85 1) +85 1) +85 1)
SW SW
Landing and elevator car doors from Meiller
TTS/TTK 31 EvoS 2) TTS/TTK 31 EvoN 2)

380
360
Recess 110
Recess 130
20 DW = 700 - 1400 min. 1/3 DW 20 DW = 700 - 1400 min. 1/3 DW

+70 +70
SW SW
TTS/TTK 28 EvoS TTS/TTK 28 EvoN

210
210
285
300
Recess 75
Recess 90
min. 1/4 DW = 700 - 3200 min. 1/4 min. 1/4 DW = 700 - 3000 min. 1/4
DW+70 1) DW+70 1) DW+70 1) DW+70 1)
SW SW
TTS/ TTK 32 EvoS TTS/ TTK 32 EvoN

(min. W) 1)
CW (min. W) 1)
(min. W) 1)
CW (min. W) 1)
360
360
Recess 110
Recess 130
min. 1/6 DW = 1100 - CW max. min. 1/6 min. 1/6 DW = 1100 - CW max. min. 1/6
DW+70 1) DW+70 1) DW+70 1) DW+70 1)
SW SW
1)
The higher value in each case is valid. 2) Door opening to the right pictured; version opening to the left also available. Key to the abbreviations used, see page 5.
198 Issue 09/2015

LEA
Cargo
Planning Data: Doors
Kits
Determining the shaft depth
Manufacturer Door type Shaft depth w/out open through entrance [mm] Shaft depth w/ open through entrance [mm]
ThyssenKrupp S8A/K8A M2Z SD = CD + 260 + 85 60 (recess*) SD = CD + 2 x 260 2 x 60 (recess*)
ThyssenKrupp S8A/K8A M4TZ SD = CD + 320 + 85 55 (recess*) SD = CD + 2 x 320 2 x 55 (recess*)
Meiller TTS/TTK 31 EvoS SD = CD + 380 + 85 130 (recess*) SD = CD + 2 x 380 2 x 130 (recess*)
Meiller TTS/ TTK 31 EvoN SD = CD + 360 + 85 110 (recess*) SD = CD + 2 x 360 2 x 110 (recess*)
Meiller TTS/TTK 28 EvoS SD = CD + 300 + 85 95 (recess*) SD = CD + 2 x 300 2 x 95 (recess*)
Meiller TTS/TTK 28 EvoN SD = CD + 285 + 85 75 (recess*) SD = CD + 2 x 285 2 x 75 (recess*)
Meiller TTS/ TTK 32 EvoS SD = CD + 380 + 85 130 (recess*) SD = CD + 2 x 380 2 x 130 (recess*)
Meiller TTS/ TTK 32 EvoN SD = CD + 360 + 85 110 (recess*) SD = CD + 2 x 360 2 x 110 (recess*)
* Subtract depth for the recess(es) only if planned with recess(es).
Fire protection approval for landing doors

Manufacturer Door type Fire protection a b c d e f g
ThyssenKrupp S8A/K8A M2Z BS 476 [SA100] 70 120 90 300 90 60 60
ThyssenKrupp S8A/K8A M2Z EN 81-58 (E120, EW30/60) [SA104/105] 120 120 90 300 90 60 60
ThyssenKrupp S8A/K8A M2Z EN 81-58 (EI60) [SA106] 120 120 90 300 90 60 60
ThyssenKrupp S8A/K8A M2Z EN 81-58 (EI120) [SA109] 70 70 90 300 90 60 60
ThyssenKrupp S8A/K8A M2Z DIN 18091 [SA105] 120 120 90 300 90 60 60
ThyssenKrupp S8A/K8A M2Z [SA16] 140
ThyssenKrupp S8A/K8A M4TZ BS 476 [SA100] 70 120 90 300 90 55 55
ThyssenKrupp S8A/K8A M4TZ EN 81-58 (E120, EW30/60) [SA104/105] 120 120 90 300 90 55 55
ThyssenKrupp S8A/K8A M4TZ EN 81-58 (EI60) [SA106] 120 120 90 300 90 55 55
ThyssenKrupp S8A/K8A M4TZ EN 81-58 (EI120) [SA109] 70 70 90 300 90 55 55
ThyssenKrupp S8A/K8A M4TZ DIN 18091 [SA105] 120 120 90 300 90 55 55
ThyssenKrupp S8A/K8A M4TZ [SA16] 140
Meiller TTS/TTK 31 EvoS EN 81-58 50 50 90 500 300 130 130
Meiller TTS/ TTK 31 EvoN DIN 18091 120 120 90 500 300 110 110
Meiller TTS/TTK 28 EvoS EN 81-58 50 50 90 500 300 90 90
Meiller TTS/TTK 28 EvoN DIN 18091 120 120 90 500 300 75 75
Meiller TTS/ TTK 32 EvoS EN 81-58 50 50 90 500 300 130 130
Meiller TTS/ TTK 32 EvoN DIN 18091 120 120 90 500 300 110 110
SA Special version; dimensions in mm. Key to the abbreviations used, see page 5.
TTS/TTK 31
to right pictured,
to left possible
3-panel, side-opening telescopic sliding door
d
f
S8A/K8A M2Z
2-panel, centre-opening sliding door

DH
S8A/K8A M4TZ
TTS/TTK 28
g
FFL 4-panel, centre-opening telescopic sliding door
UFL
f
e
TTS/TTK 32
a DW a
6-panel, centre-opening telescopic sliding door
LEA
Cargo
Robust Elevator Car Equipment

Kits
LEA Cargo as an elevator assembly kit for

carrying passengers and freight is charac-
terised by an attractive and yet very robust
car. The horizontal projection, the choice of
materials and the layout of all the elements
are designed for easy, rapid loading and
unloading and for a long service life.
Car operating panel / internal push-

button box
(not included in the scope of supply)
For installation flush with the car wall, in
a recess for a control box or for a high
operating panel
Car lighting
Let in flush or very flat structural shapes
Bright lighting
* optionally with LED light source Fluorescent tubes Halogen spotlight ceiling Indirect lighting Coffered ceiling SlimLED PANEL
let into main ceiling Pure White / stainless steel Pure White / stainless Pure White / stainless with LED light source
optionally LED spotlight steel steel
Wall panels
Sheet steel, impact-resistant and struc-
turally stiffened
High-quality powder coating
Stainless steel versions
Mouse Grey White Aluminium Pure White Stainless steel Stainless steel
(RAL 7005) (RAL 9006) (RAL 9016) Grain 220 Linen
Hand-rail and bumper rail

Hand-rail stainless steel 40 mm
Bumper rail to protect the car walls (can
be designed in 1 to 3 rows), height of
sections approx. 200mm
Hand-rail Bumper rail Bumper rail
stainless steel l 40 mm hardwood stainless steel
Flooring material
Bulb plate 6mm, primed
as standard
Materials made of rubber
or vinyl
Bulb plate Bulb plate Without flooring material lowered by
stainless steel (4 mm) aluminium (3 mm) 25mm for customer-fitted flooring material
Ice Dove Grey Black Stone Kayar Grey Kayar Black

rubber vinyl rubber rubber rubber
200 Issue 09/2015

LEA
Cargo
Main Components
Kits
Geared machines
TW130 with emer- The range of machines from LiftEquip has
gency brake system an excellent reputation and covers a finely Use of synthetic oil for long oil change
Horizontal motor position,
traction sheave on the left graduated performance range. intervals
Wide range of traction sheave diameters,
Gears TW63B, TW130, TW160, W263C positioned on the left or right
and W332C Low-wear traction sheave thanks to
Single-stage worm gear hardened traction sheave grooves
Type-approved protective device (optio- Different designs on the machine base
nally with emergency brake system NBS) frame with and without diverter pulley for
and thus EN 81-A3 compliant (TW63B, 2:1 or 1:1 rope suspensions
TW130, TW160) Gear in accordance with ATEX
Flexible erection thanks to horizontal or Many options available: partial explosion
vertical motor position (TW63B, TW130) protection / explosion protection versi-
W332C VVVF motors, type B5, with flexible clutch ons, extended shaft, etc.
Traction sheave on the right
Gearless machines
The SC300 and SC400 synchronous ge-
Type-approved safety brake in ac-
arless machines are the workhorses of the
cordance with EN 81-1 Section 9.10 and
range and are suitable for deployment in
protective device against unintended mo-
freight elevators:
vement of the elevator car in accordance
High efficiency with EN 81-1: 1998+A3:2009
Low noise EN 81-A3 compliant
Stable, compact monoblock housing Different designs on the machine base
Anti-friction bearings with life-time frame with and without diverter pulley for
lubrication 2:1 rope suspension
Ideally suited for power regeneration Optionally with counter-pulley suitable for
double rope wrap
SC300 on base frame

with counter-pulley for double rope wrap
Frequency inverters MFC 20/21 and MFC 30/31 inverters Inverters with power regeneration
The vector-controlled frequency inverters The MFC-R and MFR frequency inverters
from LiftEquip are matched to the geared with power regeneration capability have the
(asynchronous) and gearless (synchro- optimum technologies for an energy-efficient
nous) machines. elevator.
Inverter with brake activation, power filter In addition to the attributes of MFC units:
and power choke Inverter with electronic brake activation,
With travel contactor (MFC 30/31) power filter, power choke and electronic
Brake resistor in a separate housing travel contactors
Motor parameters stored Integrated power regeneration, which
Rapid commissioning via Plug&Play means no brake resistor is required
Emergency power mode possible in the Possibility for activation of a standby and
event of a power failure via UPS (uninter- sleep mode to improve energy efficiency
ruptible power supply) Possibility for remote parameterisation
Integrated speed monitoring for compli- via parallel interface, DCP03/04 and
ance with EN81-A3 (for MFC 30/31) in CANopen
conjunction with suitable control system
MFC 30/31 MFR (optional)
Parallel interface and DCP03
LEA
Cargo
Main Components
Kits
Doors from ThyssenKrupp

The S8A/K8A door series is characterised Robust sill substructure with solid stain-
by very high robustness, durability and less steel sills up to the encompassing,
an extensive range of options. In a freight concealed sill guide designed for heavy-
elevator we recommend: duty loading and unloading
2-panel, centre-opening sliding door High-quality door safety lock systems
(M2Z) and short door reversal times to prevent
4-panel, centre-opening telescopic collision with the freight and to protect
sliding door (M4TZ) the technology against damage
Safe and robust mechanical construction Ensuring a rapid and long-lasting spare
with powerful door drive parts availability
Long service life as a result of the exclu- Elegant and convenient door, ideally sui-
sive deployment of proven and tested table for use in prestigious surroundings,
materials and components such as shopping centres
S8A M2Z landing door
Doors from Meiller

The heavy industrial doors are specifically Sturdy designs of door frame, track rails,
designed for heavy-duty use in industrial track rollers and sill
and commercial applications. Sturdy, secure lower door panel guide,
In a freight elevator subject to heavy loads infinitely variable, where necessary can
or with door widths > 2500mm we recom- be exchanged without removing the door
mend: panels
3-panel, side-opening telescopic sliding
door (TTS/K 31)
4-panel, centre-opening telescopic
sliding door (TTS/K 28)
6-panel, centre-opening telescopic
sliding door (TTS/K 32)
TTS 32 landing door
Reference examples
202 Issue 09/2015

LEA
Cargo
Scope of Supply and Planning Information
Kits
LEA Cargo scope of supply Not included in the scope of supply are:
Machine Control system with control cabinet
Gear with motor or gearless machine, Rope system Operating and indicator elements
with brake, motor cable and rotary trans- Steel ropes External control panels
ducer with cable Rope anchor points with insulation for Built-in control panel in the car
Traction sheave with rope guard cover positioning in the machine room for 2:1 Emergency call system
Machine base frame with diverter or suspension Car distribution box
guide pulley (with 2:1 suspension) Compensation chain from travel height Travelling cable
Insulated elements to prevent transmis- > 33 m Shaft selector
sion of structure-borne noise (rubber (depending on the design) Shaft wiring and lighting
blocks) Inspection control, emergency stop
Optionally with gear: emergency brake Shaft equipment switch
system (NBS) Sliding bracket with mounting parts Integration of the inverter
Connection of the car lighting and the
Frequency inverter Painting/priming overload sensor
MFC 20 / 30 (for geared) or MFC 21 / 31 Steel parts mainly with powder coating Load measurement system (occupied,
(for gearless), without power regenerati- (similar to RAL 7005) or priming (RAL full load, overload)
on, with regeneration resistor 7031 and/or Electrical installations in the machine
Optionally MFC 21-R / MFR with power RAL 7005), layer thickness approx. 60 room
regeneration (for gearless only) m; All of the above components must be provi-
galvanised parts remain galvanised ded by the installation firm and/or a control
Elevator car system supplier.
Car with individual dimensions Landing and car doors
Car type P1000 or P4000 with car guard Different door makes and door types for
rail installation in the shaft or recess
TCS series sling (depending on rated Different designs: colours in RAL or
load) stainless steel
Guide pulleys for 2:1 suspension Door drive with closing force limiter
Optionally vibration isolation with steel Different sill designs: steel or stainless
springs or rubber elements steel
Ventilation via door gap and vents in the Optionally concealed sill guide
door recess, ventilation via openings in Light curtain
the car ceiling
Progressive safety gear Installations with enhanced safety
Counterweight Safety gear for downward travel integ- classes
Steel frame with sheet metal cladding rated in the sling and braking device for LiftEquip offers a wide range of eleva-
Guide pulley for 2:1 suspension upward travel tor and safety components of special
Weight inserts: steel and Gussolith in Optional: protection in upward travel by designs for installations in IP54, partial
variable proportions emergency brake system (geared) or explosion protection (Part-Ex) and explo-
monitored service brake in acc. with EN sion protection (Ex):
Guides on elevator car / counterweight 81-1, 9.10 (gearless) Geared and gearless machines with
Moving plastic sliding guides with lubri- brake system
cating units Overspeed governor Overspeed governor
Optional pulley guides For installation in the machine room, Door with door lock, door drive and
without test groove light curtain
Guide rails Governor rope 6.5 mm Elevator car lighting
Steel rails (T-section) for car and coun- Tensioning device for shaft pit This gives you the opportunity also to
terweight with butt straps design installations for use in the highly
Buffer demanding cement, chemical and petro-
Polyurethane buffer (v 1.0 m/s) chemical industries.
with pit element for installation in the
shaft pit
LEA
Cargo
Range of Geared Machines

Kits
The following overviews of specimen configurations show the wide performance range of our machines with matching frequency inverters.
From these tables you can choose the drive technology configuration that is perfectly suited to your requirements.
Naturally we can on request implement an individual configuration with your specific installation data.
Geared machines (freight traction elevator with machine room above the shaft 1:1 suspension) 1:1
Speed 0.63 m/s 0.8 m/s 1 m/s 1.2 m/s 1.6 m/s 2 m/s
Q = 1600 kg TW130, 52:1, TS 540 TW130, 42:1, TS 540 TW130, 35:1, TS 540 TW130, 35:1, TS 540 TW130, 45:2, TS 540 TW160, 45:2, TS 640
F = 1800 kg 9737 kJ/h, 10.4 kW 10563 kJ/h, 15.2 kW 12597 kJ/h, 15.8 kW 14244 kJ/h, 20.5 kW 18007 kJ/h, 27.5 kW 22441 kJ/h, 27.5 kW
23.9 A/34.2 A 26.8 A/39.2 A 31.3 A/46.1 A 36.9 A/49.9 A 45.8 A/68.2 A 57.3 A/81.8 A
1159 rpm, (NBS) 1188 rpm, (NBS) 1238 rpm, (NBS) 1485 rpm, (NBS) 1273 rpm, (NBS) 1343 rpm, (NBS)
Q = 1800 kg TW130, 52:1, TS 540 TW130, 42:1, TS 540 TW130, 35:1, TS 540 TW1301), 45:2, TS 540 TW160, 51:2, TS 640 *TW160, 45:2, TS 640
26.6 A/37.4 A 29.9 A/43 A 35 A/50.7 A 38.3 A/53.3 A 52.9 A/78.8 A 59.8 A/87.9 A
1159 rpm, (NBS) 1188 rpm, (NBS) 1238 rpm, (NBS) 955 rpm, (NBS) 1218 rpm, (NBS) 1343 rpm, (NBS)
Q = 2000 kg TW130, 42:1, TS 540 TW130, 35:1, TS 540 TW160, 41:1, TS 640 TW160, 35:1, TS 640 TW160, 51:2, TS 640 W263C, 41:2, TS 640
24.3 A/33.6 A 30 A/39.7 A 39.1 A/57.6 A 44.7A/66.8 A 59 A/87 A 73.7 A/113.2 A
936 rpm, (NBS) 990 rpm, (NBS) 1225 rpm, (NBS) 1253 rpm, (NBS) 1217 rpm, (NBS) 1224 rpm
Q = 2200 kg TW160, 50:1, TS 640 TW160, 50:1, TS 640 TW160, 41:1, TS 640 TW160, 35:1, TS 640 W263C, 41:2, TS 540 W263C, 41:2, TS 540
26.9 A/36.6 A 36.4 A/51.1 A 42.9 A/62.4 A 46.7 A/70 A 70.3 A/107.1 A 80.6 A/130.9 A
940 rpm, (NBS) 1194 rpm, (NBS) 1224 rpm, (NBS) 1253 rpm, (NBS) 1160 rpm 1450 rpm
Q = 2400 kg TW160, 50:1, TS 640 TW160, 41:1, TS 640 TW160, 35:1, TS 640 W263C, 40:1, TS 640 W263C, 41:2, TS 540 W332C, 46:2, TS 700
29.2 A/39.2 A 36.1 A/46.9 A 50.5 A/71.2 A 57.3 A/82 A 71.3 A/107.9 A 93.6 A/176.7 A
940 rpm, (NBS) 979 rpm, (NBS) 1045 rpm, (NBS) 1432 rpm 1160 rpm 1255 rpm
Q = 2600 kg W332C, 63:1,TS 640 W263C, 40:1, TS 540 W263C, 40:1, TS 540 W332C, 47:1, TS 800 W332C, 59:2, TS 700 *W332C, 46:2, TS 640
F = 2800 kg 16046 kJ/h, 26.1 kW 18431 kJ/h, 24.9 kW 20833 kJ/h, 27.5 kW 26872 kJ/h, 33.5 kW 34660 kJ/h, 42 kW 36445 kJ/h, 45.4 kW
38.3 A/87.4 A 46.5 A/70.5 A 52.6 A/75.4 A 65.1 A/121 A 82 A/166.7 A 95.3 A/173.6 A
1184 rpm 1132 rpm 1415 rpm 1347 rpm 1288 rpm 1373 rpm
Q = 2800 kg *W332C, 63:1,TS 640 W332C, 63:1, TS 700 W332C, 47:1, TS 640 W332C, 47:1, TS 800 W332C, 59:2, TS 700 W332C, 46:2, TS 640
F = 3000 kg 16622 kJ/h, 26.1 kW 19808 kJ/h, 33.5 KW 23550 kJ/h, 33.5 kW 28833 kJ/h, 33.5 kW 37186 kJ/h, 42 kW 38059 kJ/h, 45.4 kW
37.9 A/87.9 A 47.9 A/101.2 A 58.1 A/101.9 A 69.7 A/126.6 A 87.8 A/175.8 A 97.2 A/178.3 A
1184 rpm 1375 rpm 1403 rpm 1347 rpm 1288 rpm 1373 rpm
Specimen configurations, changes possible * 50% load capacity compensation Q = Load capacity,
Machine type, gear ratio, traction sheave l [mm] F = Car weight max.,
Heat to be dissip. [kJ/h], motor output [kW] at rpm TS = Traction sheave diameter,
Req. motor current [A] / req. starting current [A] NBS = Emergency brake system.
Motor speed [rpm], (NBS possible)
Inverter type. 1)
Stronger brake
204 Issue 09/2015

LEA
Cargo
Range of Geared Machines
Kits
Geared machines (freight traction elevator with machine room above the shaft 2:1 suspension)
2:1
Speed 0.63 m/s 0.8 m/s 1 m/s 1.2 m/s 1.6 m/s
Q = 1600 kg TW63B, 33:1, TS 590 TW63B, 48:2, TS 590 TW63B, 43:3, TS 450 TW130, 43:3, TS 540 TW130, 43:3, TS 4640
F = 1800 kg 7744 kJ/h, 10 kW 9716 kJ/h, 12.9 kW 11577 kJ/h, 12.7 kW 14134 kJ/h, 15.6 kW 17993 kJ/h, 27.5 kW
23.7 A/31.8 A 25.6 A/37.4 A 31.1 A/45.1 A 36.9 A/53.4 A 46.8 A/65.6 A
1346 rpm, (NBS) 1243 rpm, (NBS) 1217 rpm, (NBS) 1217 rpm, (NBS) 1369 rpm, (NBS)
Q = 2000 kg TW63B, 48:2, TS 450 TW130, 45:2, TS 540 *TW130, 45:2, TS 640 TW130, 43:3, TS 540 TW1301), 43:3, TS 640
F = 2200 kg 9333 kJ/h, 10 kW 11736 kJ/h, 16 kW 13668 kJ/h, 16 kW 17425 kJ/h, 20 kW 21916 kJ/h, 27.5 kW
28 A/38.1 A 29.3 A/42.1 A 34 A/48.1 A 43.9 A/65.2 A 56.8 A/77.8 A
Q = 2500 kg TW130, 35:1, TS 640 TW130, 45:2, TS 540 TW130, 45:2, TS 640 *TW1301), 43:3, TS 540 TW1301), 43:3, TS 540
F = 2500 kg 12048 kJ/h, 16 kW 14447 kJ/h, 16 kW 17805 kJ/h, 20.5 kW 18859 kJ/h, 26.8 kW 25128 kJ/h, 33.5 kW
30.2 A/40.8 A 36 A/49.4 A 44.6 A/60.4 A 47.2 A/71.3 A 67 A/80.3 A
Q = 3000 kg TW130, 35:1, TS 640 TW130, 45:2, TS 540 TW130, 45:2, TS 540 TW1301), 43:3, TS 540 TW160, 41:3, TS 640
F = 2800 kg 14468 kJ/h, 16 kW 17357 kJ/h, 20.5 kW 19078 kJ/h, 27.5 kW 23444 kJ/h, 32.6 kW 31911 kJ/h, 42 kW
36.2 A/47 A 42.8 A/58.5 A 50.9 A/61.1 A 59.5 A/86.1 A 79.4 A/129 A
Q = 3500 kg TW130, 45:2, TS 540 TW160, 57:2, TS 640 TW160, 45:2, TS 640 TW160, 45:2, TS 640 *W332C, 57:3, TS 800
F = 3200 kg 16973 kJ/h, 18.5 kW 19171 kJ/h, 27.5 kW 23354 kJ/h, 27.5 kW 26088 kJ/h, 33.5 kW 36107 kJ/h, 45.4 kW
38.6 A/46.4 A 48.2 A/63.6 A 58.8 A/77.4 A 68.6 A/81.8 A 97.9 A/179.1 A
1003 rpm, (NBS) 1361 rpm, (NBS) 1343 rpm, (NBS) 1611 rpm, (NBS) 1452 rpm
Q = 4000 kg TW160, 35:1, TS 640 TW160, 51:2, TS 640 TW160, 45:2, TS 640 W263C, 41:2, TS 640
F = 3500 kg 18719 kJ/h, 20.5 kW 22169 kJ/h, 26.8 kW 25900 kJ/h, 33.5 kW 34038 kJ/h, 42 kW
45.8 A/59.2 A 55.4 A/75 A 64.7 A/85.7 A 86.6 A/131.6 A
1316 rpm, (NBS) 1218 rpm, (NBS) 1343 rpm, (NBS) 1468 rpm
Q = 4500 kg TW160, 35:1, TS 640 W263C, 50:2, TS 540 W263C, 41:2, TS 540 *W332C, 57:3, TS 640
F = 4000 kg 19722 kJ/h, 27.5 kW 25747 kJ/h, 33.5 kW 31046 kJ/h, 42 kW 36192 kJ/h, 42 kW
49.2 A/64.3 A 64.8 A/87.9 A 78 A/120 A 86.3 A/172.4 A
1316 rpm, (NBS) 1415 rpm 1450 rpm 1361 rpm
Q = 5000 kg W263C, 50:2, TS 540 W263C, 41:2, TS 540 W332C, 46:2, TS 640
* 50% load capacity compensation
F = 4500 kg 24781 kJ/h, 29.9 kW 30548 kJ/h, 34.3 kW 37725 kJ/h, 45.4 kW
63.4 A/88.6 A 72.9 A/101.1 A 95.8 A/177.5 A Machine type, gear ratio, traction sheave l [mm]
1114 rpm 1160 rpm 1373 rpm Heat to be dissip. [kJ/h], motor output [kW] at rpm
MFC 20-105 V1 MFC 20-105 V1 MFC 20-105 V1 Req. motor current [A] / req. starting current [A]
Motor speed [rpm], (NBS possible)
Q = 5500 kg W332C, 47:1, TS 800 W332C, 59:2, TS 640 *W332C, 46:2, TS 640
Inverter type.
F = 5000 kg 28731 kJ/h, 33.5 kW 34694 kJ/h, 42 kW 37993 kJ/h, 45.4 kW
70.8 A/123.9 A 85 A/163.1 A 98.7 A/176.3 A
1414 rpm 1409 rpm 1373 rpm
MFC 20-105 V1 MFC 20-105 V1 MFC 20-105 V1
Q = Load capacity,
Q = 6000 kg W332C, 47:1, TS 800 W332C, 59:2, TS 640
31916 kJ/h, 37 kW 36111 kJ/h, 45.4 kW F = Car weight max.,
F = 5500 kg
74.6 A/124.8 A 97 A/175.3 A TS = Traction sheave diameter,
1414 rpm 1409 rpm NBS = Emergency brake system.
MFC 20-105 V1 MFC 20-105 V1
1)
Stronger brake
Specimen configurations, changes possible
LEA
Cargo
Range of Gearless Machines

Kits
Gearless machines (freight traction elevator with machine room above the shaft 2:1 suspension)
2:1
Without power regeneration
2:1 suspension
Speed 1 m/s 1.6 m/s 1.75 m/s 2 m/s
Q = 1600 kg SC 300 M 000 SC 300 M 002 SC 300 M 002 SC 300 M 005

F = 2300 kg 10.7 kW, 87 rpm 14.9 kW, 139 rpm 16.3 kW, 152 rpm 18.2 kW, 174 rpm
TS 440, MFC 21-32 V1 TS 440, MFC 21-48 V1 TS 440, MFC 21-48 V1 TS 440, MFC 21-48 V1
Q = 2000 kg SC 400 S 001 SC 400 S 001 SC 400 S 001 SC 400 S 007

Q = 2500 kg SC 400 M 008 SC 400 M 008 SC 400 M 012 SC 400 M 009

Q = Load capacity, F = Car weight max., TS = Traction sheave diameter.

COMPACT gearless with 1:1 suspension on request.
With power regeneration

2:1 suspension
Speed 1.6 m/s 1.75 m/s 2 m/s
Q = 1600 kg SC 300 M 001 SC 300 M 001 SC 300 M 001

F = 2300 kg 15.3 kW, 139 rpm 16.7 kW, 152 rpm 18.2 kW, 174 rpm
TS 440, MFC 21-50R V3 TS 440, MFC 21-50R V3 TS 440, MFC 21-50R V3
Q = 2000 kg SC 400 S 004 SC 400 S 004 SC 400 S 004

Q = 2500 kg SC 400 M 011 SC 400 M 011 SC 400 M 011

Q = Load capacity, F = Car weight max., TS = Traction sheave diameter.

COMPACT gearless with 1:1 suspension on request.
206 Issue 09/2015

LEA
Cargo
Options
Kits
LEA Cargo: car equipment
Car elements LEA Cargo

Car ceiling
Powder-coated in Mouse Grey RAL 7005
Powder-coated in Pure White RAL 9016
Stainless steel, grain 220
Stainless steel, Linen
Emergency trap in the car ceiling
Car lighting
Let-in fluorescent tubes (type C4), let in flush in the main ceiling, degree of protection IP20
Let-in fluorescent tubes (type C4), let in flush in the main ceiling, degree of protection IP54
Halogen spotlight ceiling (false ceiling, type CEI2), Pure White RAL 9016 (for Q < 3000kg)
Halogen spotlight ceiling (false ceiling, type CEI2), stainless steel grain 220 (for Q < 3000kg)
Indirect lighting (false ceiling, type CEI5), without screen, Pure White RAL 9016 (for Q < 3000kg)
Indirect lighting (false ceiling, type CEI5), without screen, stainless steel grain 220 (for Q < 3000kg)
Coffered ceiling (false ceiling, type CEI4), Pure White RAL 9016 (for Q < 3000kg)
Coffered ceiling (false ceiling, type CEI4), stainless steel grain 220 (for Q < 3000kg)
Panel light SlimLED PANEL, dimensions 300 x 300 x 16mm, mounted on the main ceiling
Panel light SlimLED PANEL, dimensions 620 x 620 x 16mm, mounted on the main ceiling
Wall design / car door portal

Powder-coated in Mouse Grey RAL 7005
Powder-coated in Aluminium White RAL 9006
Powder-coated in Pure White RAL 9016
Grain 220 stainless steel
Stainless Steel, Linen
Hand-rail and bumper rail

Hand-rail stainless steel grain 220, diameter 40 mm with straight closure
Bumper rail made of wood (beech), 200 x 19 mm, surrounding or with open through entrance on both side walls: 1-row / 2-row / 3-row / /
Bumper rail aluminium section clad with stainless steel grain 220, 100 x 10mm, surrounding or with open through entrance on both side walls: 1-row / 2-row / 3-row / /
Flooring material
Bulb plate, primed, 6 mm
Bulb plate, aluminium Duett W2, 3 mm
Bulb plate stainless steel, 4 mm
Ice / rubber
Dove Grey / vinyl
Black Stone / rubber
Kayar Grey / rubber
Kayar Black / rubber
Without flooring material, lowered by 25mm for customer-fitted flooring material
Skirting
Skirting 30 x 6 mm, aluminium
Skirting 30 x 6 mm, aluminium, clad with stainless steel grain 220
Accessories
Ladder panel without door / with door /
standard, optional, not available. Please contact our sales consultants regarding the availability of options.
LEA
Cargo
Reducing energy consumption

The optimally balanced system components and optionally available LED lighting enable
the LEA Cargo elevator system to make a decisive contribution to reducing regular opera-
ting costs and CO2 emissions.
Power regeneration
The deployment of the MFR frequency inverter with integrated power regeneration can
further enhance the overall efficiency of the installation. Taking account of the usage cate-
gory in accordance with VDI 4707, a high energy efficiency class can be achieved.
Technology with a secure future

Quality Made in Germany quality made by "LiftEquip":
on a level with international standards and appreciated worldwide.
Low-noise ride quality

The deployment of our high-quality and perfectly balanced components makes the LEA
Cargo from LiftEquip a very quiet and therefore comfortable elevator system.
Environmentally friendly production

Even during the production of our LEA Cargo we ensure that the environment
is protected.
208 Issue 09/2015

LEA
Home
Gulliver/Orion
Systems
Personally and individully
Gulliver and Orion, accord. to 2006/42/EG
Up to 5 stops, 0,15 m/s, 15 m FH
Over 70 platform variants and
design options
Your Benefits 210

Installation examples 211
Design Versions 212
Car Doors/Landing Doors 213
Equipment 214
Operating and comfort features - equipment 215
LEA
Home
Your Benefits
Systems
The LiftEquip home lifts, manufactured Qualities Gulliver Orion

according to Machinery Directive 2006/42/ Drive system Hydraulics Hydraulics
CE and EN81-41 with a speed of 0.15 m/s, Rated speed v 0.15 m/s 0.15 m/s
are available in different versions:
Can be used in indoor areas
The Gulliver model, a stand-alone vertical Can be used in outdoor areas
installation with a shaft and a travel Maximum travel height 15 m 15 m
height of up to 15 metres, offers you high
Rated load 300 kg / 400 kg 300 kg / 400 kg
flexibility.
The Orion model can be built into an Operation via domestic power supply 230V/AC
already existing shaft. Maximum number of landings 5 5
Different platform lengths/widths
The Gulliver can also be retrofitted wit-
As an option with classic, 4-side closed car
hout the need for complex work. Whether
indoors or outdoors both models can be Door arrangement of 3 sides possible
adapted to your personal living situation. Doors in different versions (shaft and car)
Select the lift according to your individual
Ceiling lighting, two spots
requirements and wishes.
The Gulliver provides you with a very spe- Standby function, autom. light shutdown
cial type of transport. It not only increases Installation
your quality of living, but also upgrades Retrofit solution
your domestic environment. Customized
furnishing options provide an ideal supple- Customer-provided shaft required
ment to your very own spatial concept. Shaft pit 100 mm 100 mm
Safety
All models fit perfectly into both private
Technical expert report (TV-certified)
surroundings as well as a commercial
environment. The property becomes more Automatic closing doors
comfortable and the value increases. Emergency operation
Signal in case of overload
Our positive features:
Shaft cladding
Made-to-measure solutions Key operated switch
Increased living comfort Emergency phone on operator panel
Retrofitting of platform lift also possible
Installation in indoor and outdoor areas Operation
Well thought-out design Control via operator panel
Impressive quality Radio remote control
Further equipment features
Customized selection of an extremely wide
variety of equipment configurations, materials
and car colours
Shaft cladding (safety glass, sheet metal,
laminate)
Ceiling lighting, four spots
Folding seat
Mirrors
standard; optional; not possible
210
210 Issue 09/2015
LEA
Home
Installation Examples
Systems
Steel shaft (Gulliver)
Feature of the Gulliver system
Interior and exterior:

Material: powder coated, galvanized
sheet metal, RAL 7001
A further 200 colours as per RAL can be
selected
Dimensions:
Minimum width 730 mm
Minimum depth 1150 mm
Various shaft sizes with over 70 standard
concepts
Panels:
High-quality galvanized sheet metal, dif-
ferent versions of safety glass, laminate
Doors: installed on shaft
Interior:
Panels: additional MDF wood panels
Roof: flat
Exterior:
Material: as above, plus surface-treated
for use in outdoor areas
Joints sealed with silicone
Roof: inclined, rainproof
Closed shaft (Orion)

Features of the Orion system
As Gulliver, but for installation in an exis-

ting shaft.
With telescopic door (left illustration)

With hinged door (right illustration)
LEA
Home
Design Versions
Car
Systems
Car with rear wall mirror; mirror Car with glass element made of
also available only above the transparent safety glass.
hand-rail. Two ceiling spots, aluminium
Four ceiling spots, PVC floor, floor, stainless steel panel and
stainless steel panel and colour-coated wall panels.
colour-coated wall panels.
Platform
Platform with hinged door Platform with hinged door Platform with ramp
opening on left opening on right in masoned (if a shaft pit cannot be imple-
shaft. mented on site).
Made of stainless steel,
chequer plate.
212 Issue 09/2015

LEA
Home
Car Doors/Landing Doors
Car doors
Systems
Manually operated folding Automatic telescopic door for a
doors for a closed solution with classic lift solution.
low space requirements. Telescopic door on the floor
Folding doors at the access made of steel or stainless
areas (max. 2) made of steel, steel, including special versions
coated in RAL colour or made for use outdoors.
of stainless steel. Here, access diagonally.
Landing doors
STEEL DOOR GLASS DOOR GLASS DOOR SOLID GLASS DOOR FIRE RESISTANT DOOR AUTOMATIC
Doors (elevator type) Doors (elevator type) Doors (elevator type) Fully transparent glass Doors (elevator type) TELESCOPIC DOOR
made of sheet metal, made of safety glass with safety glass with door with steel frame, made of sheet metal, Doors (elevator type),
undercoat in RAL7001. with aluminium frame, stainless steel frame, hasps and handle undercoat in RAL7001. manufactured completely
Made of galvanized steel anodized natural. Coat- manufactured from made of stainless steel. Certified in acc. with from stainless steel, or
and/or coating in RAL ing in RAL colours at an stainless or standard Semi-automatic with EN81-58. Fire resistant standard steel and stain-
colour at an additional additional charge. steel with stainless steel arm integrated in frame, doors available upon less steel cladding.
charge. With standard handle, cladding. damping device inte- request in compliance
With standard handle, buttons and closing With standard handle, grated in cross brace. with specific national
buttons and closing spring. buttons and closing standards (as special
spring. spring. version). With handle
and intercom unit for
wall mounting, closing
spring.
Door handles
TECHNO CLASSIC MODERN
Matching stainless Matching handles Matching handles and
steel handles and and buttons: buttons:
buttons (standard). Bright brass, satin-finished stain-
shiny brass, less steel,
chrome plated, glossy stainless steel
bright chrome (optional).
(optional).
LEA
Home
Equipment
Systems
Central cover
Made of stainless steel or coated in RAL
colour in acc. with RAL colour table.
Side cover
Made of stainless steel or coated in RAL
colour in acc. with RAL colour table.
Special paint upon request.
Flooring material
Made of hard-wearing PVC as standard.
Further flooring materials made of solid
stone, parquet or aluminium available at an
additional charge.
Standard powder coating

silver-grey RAL 7001.
Further colour selections in acc. with RAL
colour table (optional).
214
214 Issue 09/2015
LEA
Home
Operating and Comfort Features - Equipment
Systems
Control panel
Including display, control buttons with
braille lettering, integrated plastic hand-
rail and telephone unit (instead of the
telephone, an intercom system can be
supplied on request).
Landing pushbutton
Standard: manual travel, embossed
lettering
Optional: automatic travel
Remote control (optional)

Allows users to control the lift and the
automatic doors (optional).
Ceiling lights
With two ceiling spots (standard) or four
ceiling spots (optional).
Hand-rails (optional)
Painted or stainless steel.
Folding seat (optional)

For safe and comfortable travel
(max. 120 kg).
Car with mirror (optional)

One side wall with mirror element
(full surface or only above the hand-rail).
Systems LEA
Home
Overview of advantages:
Retention of mobility and independence

Retrofitting possible, simple and fast installation
Increased living comfort
Made-to-measure solutions
Installation in indoor and outdoor areas
Optimum space utilization
Reliable technology
Energy-efficient
216 Issue 09/2015

Technical Report
Technical Report
Gulliver - The Home Lift
TITELSTORY / TITLE STORY
Technical Report - Gulliver-The Home Lift

Gulliver Der Home Lift
Gulliver the home lift
Vor dem Hintergrund des demographischen Wandels, den gesetzlichen Anforderungen Factors like demographic change, the
an behindertengerechte Zugnglichkeit von Gebuden im ffentlichen Bereich und dem legal requirements for handicapped-
Wunsch des Einzelnen nach mehr Komfort auch im privaten Umfeld werden vermehrt friendly accessibility of buildings in the
Systeme zur Personenbefrderung im privaten und ffentlichen Bereich nachgefragt. public sector and the desire of individu-
Hier kommen sowohl Aufzge nach Aufzugsrichtlinie als auch nach Maschinenrichtlinie als for greater convenience including
sogenannte Home Lifts zum Einsatz. in their private surroundings have led
to an increased demand for personal
conveyance systems in the private and
In diesem Anwendungsfall steht die Fr- Gebuden oft eine wesentliche Rolle spielt. public spheres. Here both lifts according
derleistung nicht an erster Stelle, sondern Die meisten Home Lifts werden komplett to the Lifts Directive as well as according
die flexible Anpassung an die Kundenan- mit Schachtgerst geliefert. Durch diese to the Machinery Directive so-called
forderungen und bestehende Umgebungs- Komplettlieferung aus einer Hand redu- home lifts are in use.
bedingungen sowie einfache Installation, zieren sich die Schnittstellen bei Planung
Inbetriebnahme und Wartung, Bedienbar- und Konstruktion und damit auch der
The primary factor here is not conveyance
keit und Sicherheit. Diesem Trend folgend Aufwand fr Einbau und Inbetriebnahme.
performance, but rather flexible adjustment
waren auf der interlift 2013 unterschied- In den meisten Fllen wird nur ein 230 V
to customer requirements and existing envi-
lichste Systeme bei diversen System- und Anschluss bentigt. Mit EG Baumuster- ronmental conditions, plus simple installation,
Komponentenherstellern zu sehen. prfung und CE-Kennzeichen kann das start-up, maintenance, operability and safety.
Aufgrund der normativen Einschrnkun- System einfach in Verkehr gebracht werden. In line with this trend, all kinds of systems from
gen bei Home Lifts mit einer Betriebsge- Bei der Systementscheidung, ob ein Home various system and component manufacturers
schwindigkeiten von max. 0,15 m/s sind de- Lift nach Maschinenrichtlinie oder ein could be seen at the interlift 2013.
ren Einsatzbedingungen auch in Bezug auf Aufzug nach Aufzugsrichtlinie zum Einsatz Due to normative restrictions in home lifts with
Frderhhe und Frderleistung begrenzt. kommt, mssen die Nutzungsanforderun- operating speeds of a maximum of 0.15 m/s,
Ein wesentlicher Vorteil dieser Frdersyste- gen an die Anlage betrachtet werden. Je their operating conditions are also restricted with
me ist dabei die Flexibilitt, bezogen auf die nach Ausfhrung und Ausstattung kann regard to conveyance height and conveyance
performance. A significant advantage of these
Einbauabmessungen, sowie die niedrigen damit ein Home Lift von der Kosten-
conveyance systems is their flexibility in terms
Schachtgruben und Schachkpfe, was im situation auch in den Bereich eines Aufzu-
of installation dimensions as well as the low
Bereich der Nachrstung in bestehenden ges nach Aufzugsrichlinie kommen. Daher shaft pits and shaft heads. The latter often play
a major role in the field of retrofitting in existing
LiftEquip (3)
buildings. Most home lifts are supplied com-

plete with shaft frame. Thanks to this complete
delivery from one source, interfaces in planning
and design are reduced and as a result likewise
the expense for installation and start-up. In most
cases all that is needed is a 230 V connection.
Such systems are easy to distribute thanks to the
EC type examination and CE mark.
When a system decision has to be made as to
whether to use a home lift according to the
Machinery Directive or a lift according to the
Lifts Directive, one has to consider the usage
requirements on the system. Hence, depending
on the model and equipment, a home lift can
also fall within the scope of a lift according to
the Lifts Directive. Consequently, it is important
for a component or system supplier to provide
the customer / operator or installation company
with expert advice to ensure that the best solu-
tion for the case in hand is found.
LiftEquip provides tailor-made solutions for a
high degree of residential convenience in the
home lift product segment in the form of the
Gulliver / Orion system from ThyssenKrupp. These
systems are especially quiet and very energy-
efficient. They are optionally available complete
Home Lift, modernes Schachtgerst mit Glaselementen und Drehtren with shaft frame for indoors and outdoors or for
home lift, modern shaft frame with glass elements and hinged doors installation in an existing shaft. The illustrations
6 Liftjournal 2/2014 Verlagssonderverffentlichung
Technical Report
Technical Report
Gulliver - The Home Lift
TITELSTORY / TITLE STORY

Technical Report - Gulliver-The Home Lift
Je nach Kundenwunsch und Anwen- show examples for both situations with shaft
dungsfall kann zwischen vielen Optionen frame and in the masonry shaft.
gewhlt werden, wie: Depending on the installation situation, various
shaft designs are available sketch with hinged
Individuelle Ausstattungsmglichkeiten
doors - or with mechanically operated doors,
und Farbgestaltungen
shaft and lift car dimensions available. Since
Drehtren wahlweise mit automati- these systems are configured process-optimised,
schem Trffner the complete system can be delivered at short
Lichtgitter oder Fahrkorbabschlusstren notice. In the course of making an offer the in-
Automatische Fahrkorb- und Schacht- stallation situation can be checked with existing
abschlusstren shaft sketches. A system drawing is provided with
Unterschiedliche Plattformabmessun- the order confirmation.
gen (Fahrkorb) und Tragfhigkeiten Depending on the customers preferences, one
Fernbedienung oder Kommandotaster can choose between many options, such as:
sowie Ruftaster in der Haltstelle und individual equipment options and colour
schemes
Schsselschalter
hinged doors with automatic door opener
Notruftelefon
light grid or lift car doors
Schachtgerst mit Stahlblechverklei- automatic lift car- and landing doors
dung oder mit Glaselementen different platform dimensions (lift car) and
Unterschiedliche Beleuchtungsvarian- load-bearing capacities
ten remote control or command switch and call
Im Bereich der Normung werden diese button at the stop and key switch
Home Lifts zuknftig in einer eigenen emergency call telephone
Norm EN 81-42 betrachtet. Die Systeme shaft frame with steel plate cladding or glass
werden dort als LSPE Low Speed Passen- elements
ger Elevator benannt. Ziel dieser Norm different lighting versions
In the field of standards these home lifts will
ist es, die Sicherheit fr den Benutzer auf
in future be considered in their own standard
Home Lift, integriert im gemauerten Schacht ein vergleichbares Niveau eines Aufzuges
EN81-42. The systems will be referred to there
mit automatischen Schiebetren nach Aufzugsrichtlinie zu bringen. as LSPE low speed passenger elevator. The
home lift, integrated in masonry shaft with auto- Das System Gulliver / Orion von LiftEquip goal of this standard is to put safety for the user
matic sliding doors erfllt mit den Optionen wie Schacht- on a level comparable to lifts according to the
abschlusstren, Lichtgittern und Kom- Lifts Directive.
ist es wichtig, dass ein Komponenten- oder mandotastern im Fahrkorb und anderen The Gulliver / Orion system from LiftEquip already
Systemlieferant den Kunden / Betreiber Ausstattungsvarianten bereits heute we- meets major requirements from the planned EN
bzw. die Montagefirma kompetent bert, sentliche Anforderungen aus der geplanten 81-42 with options like lift car doors, light grids
damit die beste Lsung fr seinen Anwen- EN 81-42. and command switches in the lift car and other
dungsfall gefunden wird. equipment versions.
LiftEquip bietet im Produktbereich der Volker Lenzner Volker Lenzner
Home Lifts mit dem System Gulliver / Technische Leitung Technical Director
Orion aus dem Hause ThyssenKrupp LiftEquip GmbH Elevator Components LiftEquip GmbH Elevator Components
mageschneiderte Lsungen fr einen
hohen Wohnkomfort an. Die Systeme www.liftequip.de www.liftequip.de
sind besonders leise und haben eine hohe
Energieeffizienz. Wahlweise lieferbar kom-
plett mit Schachtgerst fr den Innen- und
Aussenbereich oder zum Einbau in einem
bestehenden Schacht. Die Bilder zeigen
Beispiele fr beide Situationen mit Schacht-
gerst und im gemauerten Schacht.
Je nach Einbausituation stehen unter-
schiedliche Schachtausfhrungen Skizze
mit Drehtren oder mit mechanisch
bettigten Tren, Schacht- und Fahrkorb-
abmessungen zur Verfgung.
Da diese Systeme prozessoptimiert konfi-
guriert werden, ist eine kurze Lieferzeit des
kompletten Systems mglich. Im Rahmen
der Angebotserstellung kann mit vorhan-
denen Schachtskizzen die Einbausituation
berprft werden. Bereits mit der Auftrags-
besttigung wird eine Anlagenzeichung Schachtgrundrisse mit unterschiedlichen Zugangssituationen (Schacht oder Schachtgerst)
geliefert. Shaft floor plan with differing access situations (shaft or shaft frame)
Verlagssonderverffentlichung Liftjournal 2/2014 7
218 Issue 09/2015

LEMoS
LEMoS
The Modular Modernisation Solution
Modernisation
Variable modernisation cabin
320 - 1050 kg
Configurable in millimeter increments
Flexible adaptation of various door
manufacturers
System advantages 220

System advantages / Elevator car P450SV/ 221
P1000SV
Modernisation 222
Project planning and performance data 226
Project planning data (without dual entrance) 233
Project planning data (with dual entrance) 234
Project planning data (door mountings) 235
Technical Data 237
Elevator Car Design 238
Car Design Options 240
Lighting system 241
LEMoS
System Advantages
Modernisation
Flexible degree of modernisation Optimisation possibilities

With LEMoS, you can individually mod- The LEMoS elevator system is specially
ernise by using single components in your tailored to the high, individual requirements
elevator installation or perform a complete in modernisation.
modernisation. The limits are fluid.
Regardless of which aspects are important
What is special about this system is that to you during modernisation, with LEMoS
you can also leave parts in your installation you can optimise and combine them with
for which replacement would not be techni- one another unlike with any other system.
cally necessary or make economic sense.
This flexibility is unique and carves out a We will work together with you to find the
distinct place for LEMoS! optimal solution for your elevator installa-
LEMoS opens the possibility of a dust-free tion, individually tailored to your require-
conversion process and shortening of the ments and wishes.
conversion time.
LEMoS can provide all the mechanical
components that can be combined with any
control systems available on the market.
Flexibility in the drive solution

At LEMoS we use cutting-edge drive solu-
tions which are matched to the particular
requirements in modernisation. The opti-
mum solution for your installation is chosen
from a wide range of gearless and geared
drives to suit the application.
LEMoS with gearless drive LEMoS with geared drive
Energy efficiency All components used by LEMoS are de-

With the flexible LEMoS system, you can signed so that your modernised installation
depending on the scope of the modernised achieves high levels of energy efficiency in
components considerably improve energy accordance with VDI 4707.
of your installation with LEMoS
Increase the energy efficiency
efficiency compared to your existing instal-

lation. You can thereby make a considerable
You can make significant savings for exam- contribution to the reduction of ongoing op-
ple with the use of standby operation mode erating and energy costs and the lowering
or by using frequency inverters with energy of CO2 emissions.
recovery capability.
Modern LED lighting also increases your
energy savings.
220 Issue 09/2015

LEMoS
System Advantages / Elevator Car P450SV/P1000SV
Modernisation
System perspective Improved comfort and design with of
The existing installation is adapted using space utilisation
state of the art technology to provide the Reusing as many non-value existing
very best technical solution within the components as possible, such as rails,
framework of a modernisation. counterweight and possibly door frame,
i. e. dust-free conversion and a reduction
The customers requirements with regard to of costs to the customer.
his installation and compliance with all cur- Rapid conversion and short down times
rent regulations are also considered during
planning, project implementation. Scope of supply and performance
Project planning base on the existing
For a comprehensive modernisation the shaft dimensions provide the best shaft
elevator car component is of central impor- utilisation thanks to variable elevator car
tance. Important aspects here are: dimensions
Modular modernisation in various stages
as an option
Safety requirements in acc. with EN81-1 Drive technology, safety components,
Requirements from the German regula- elevator car, doors as per customer
tion for operational safety of machinery requirements, shaft equipment (rails,
Requirements in acc. with EN 81-70 bracket, counterweight)
regarding access for persons with dis-
abilities
Energy efficiency in acc. with VDI 4707 Combination with any control systems
Sound insulation requirements and operating and elements available on
the market
The elevator car, flexible for modernisation

In modernisation there are many constraints that must be taken into consideration in the complex planning of a lift modernisation. From
the customer perspective the elevator car is one of the main visible components that must satisfy the requirements with regard to size
disability friendly requirements and design.
With the P450SV and P1000SV elevator car series we offer an elevator car that is flexible and adaptable to modernisation needs. The
elevator car is a self-supporting construction with integrated car sling for 1:1 suspension.
The shaft width and depth dimensions can be adapted in millimetre increments to the existing site conditions ensuring all available area is
used. Different elevator car heights are available, together with doors of different manufacturers.
As a result of planning the shaft cross-section we can prepared the offer precisely meeting the customers needs.
Innovation Efficiency Variability

Specially developed for modernisation Self-supporting elevator car without car From the basic model (galvanised
Enlarged elevator car thanks to optimum sling with 1:1 suspension elevator car) to individual full equipment
shaft utilisation Compact and variable elevator car specification everything is possible
Variable concept with flexible width, Largest possible available car floor area Large number of interfaces (e.g. doors
depth and height dimensions Elevator car configurable in millimetre of different manufacturers)
Integrated ventilation slots in the increments Different materials possible
car front wall Reliability Environment
Flexible door mountings Strict quality inspection ensures high Energy-efficient production with cutting-
Fast and simple assembly (thanks to quality of all installed components edge manufacturing technologies
integrated positioning aids) Guarantee of the long term supply of Use of recyclable materials
Adaptable off-centre suspension during spare parts Optimised use of materials
assembly (for subsequent alignment of Reduced down times and faults Energy-saving LED lighting
the installed elevator car in the shaft)
LEMoS
Modernisation Optimised to your Requirements

Modernisation
Space optimisation
Older elevator installations frequently have

smaller car dimensions which fail to meet
today's demands for comfort and legal
requirements. In existing buildings you can-
not however, change the shaft dimensions.
With the LEMoS system, we offer you the

unique possibility to make better use of the
existing shaft and use the largest possible
elevator car.
The new, self-supporting elevator car has

a compact, load-bearing structure and
can be adjusted to fit the existing shaft in
millimetre increments. In addition, space- All measures serve to offer the passengers With the flexible LEMoS system you can if
optimised shaft equipment and doors with a more spacious elevator car and to improve you wish naturally use your existing eleva-
reduced depth can be used. the handling capacity of the installation. tor car or retain the car dimensions.
Older people and people with disabilities will,
in particular, be very much appreciate the
additional freedom of movement.
Cost optimisation
Investment costs
Services provided by the customer
In the development of the LEMoS system, for adapting to the requirements of
a "less flexible" new installation
we have placed special emphasis on the
aspect of economic efficiency in moderni-
sation. This applies both to the investment Reduction in
for the modernisation itself as well as to the investment costs
ongoing running costs. Demand-based

Modernisation as component
complete replacement of
The LEMoS components have such flexible modernisation
the entire installation with LEMoS
interfaces that all parts which are ex-
posed to little wear and do not need to be
replaced, such are for example guide rails
and counterweights.
This reduces the modernisation costs as
well as the installation time. Parts of the
shaft equipment, landing doors or door
frames can frequently be re used.
The LEMoS components represent the lat- The ongoing operating expenses are signifi-
est state of the art equipment and manu- cantly reduced.
facturing techniques. They are optimised
for long service life and low power con-
sumption.
222 Issue 09/2015

LEMoS
Modernisation Optimised to your Requirements
Modernisation
Budget optimisation Scope of modernisation
(degree of modernisation) Modernisation of all required
'Step by Step' modernisation components in one step
Depending on scope, the modernisation of

your elevator installation may represent a
larger investment. If you prefer to spread
these costs over several budget periods
or years, we can prepare a modernisation
plan work within your budget. This takes
into account both the technical necessities Modular modernisation of individual
as well as your budget. components spread over a longer
period of time
The modernisation of individual com-
ponents then takes place over a longer Period of time 1 Period of time 2 Period of time 3 Time / budget
(e.g. 1st year) (e.g. 2nd year) (e.g. 3rd year) periods
period of time, spread over several stages.
The down time is, of course, kept to a
minimum during the work. Between the
individual stages of the modernisation, you The scope and features of the individual ensures that all components go together
will always have available a safe and fully modernisation packets can be freely se- perfectly. When all measures have been
functional elevator installation. lected and can be adapted to the available completed, you get a modernised elevator
budget. The matched LEMoS system that represents the latest state of the art
equipment.
Optimisation of the conversion time
Demand-based, modular
During extensive modernisation, down
modernisation with LEMoS
times of your elevator installation cannot
be completely avoided. With the LEMoS
system, we can, however, keep this to a
minimum with concern for the passengers. Conversion time = down time
Parts of the system which are exposed to Modernisation as

complete replacement
minimal wear or which would require con- Conversion time = down time of the entire installation
siderable time to replace, such as the shaft
equipment (rails, bracket, counterweight),
can be integrated in your modernised
elevator and continue to be used due to the
high flexibility of the components. Time
Compared to a complete replacement,

this eliminates time-intensive and costly
measures. In addition, with the modular A shortened conversion time and fewer
LEMoS system, we can prepare a phased measures performed by the customer
modernisation schedule for you in which also reduce stress for the building tenants
the modernisation measures are performed caused by noise and dirt. Less additional
during times of low use. work is necessary for adapting the doors on
the landing.
LEMoS
Modernisation according to Individual Requirements

Modernisation
Control system
-
Our components are tested with all
the control systems available on the
market
- Energy efficiency options such as
standby and sleep mode can be
activated in our components
Drive and control
- Very smooth running

- Reduction of operating costs
through energy savings
- Increase in safety level
- Maximum efficiency
- Energy recovery optional
Safety technology
- Increase in the safety level to the

current state of the art
- Fulfilment of the obligations of the
installation operator
- Reliable increase in the availability
of the installation
Shaft equipment
- Optimal utilisation of space in

the shaft
- Larger dimensions of the elevator
car possible
- Flexible components, such as
counterweight, rail bracket ...
- Reduction of running noise
Pictured:
- with gearless drive
in the machine room
224 Issue 09/2015

LEMoS
Modernisation according to Individual Requirements
Modernisation
Landing and car door
- Reduction of door operating times

- Increase in safety level
- Designed to accommodate disabled
passengers by means of light grid
- Increase in installation availability
- Modern, attractive appearance
- Doors with different door mounting
dimensions
Elevator car
Maximization of car dimensions

-
possible
- Increase in the rated load possible
- Modern, attractive design
- Positive effect on image & increase
in building value
Lighting
- Design possibilities through light

for a relaxing atmosphere
- Energy- and cost-saving
LED lighting
- Integrable emergency light function
- Long working life, considerably
reduced maintenance expenses
Operating and
indicator elements
- The choice can be made with all

the elements combinable for the
selected control system
- Elderly- and disabled-friendly design
in acc. with EN 81-70
Pictured:
- with geared drive
in the machine room
LEMoS
Project Planning and Performance Data (side counterweight)

Rated load 320 kg Q 550 kg
Modernisation
Shaft layout with side-opening door
EC STM 01
CWD
WC3
Min. MRH = 2000 mm

CW STM
1 Gearless / Geared
CD
SD
Min. HR = CH + 1320 mm
DD
CH = 2000 2250 mm
TH = 2000 2100 mm
R1 DW R2
WC1 1) CW WC2 1)
SW
FFL ORF
Shaft layout with centre-opening door

EC STM
CWD
WC3
TH
CW STM
CD
SD
FFL ORF
Min. SP = 1150 mm
DD
R1 DW R2
WC1 1) CW WC2 1)
SW
Machine room
CW/2+CWD/2+85 mm Middle elevator car
Shaft pit
CW STM / 2 +145 mm
R CW/2+60mm
dia. 200 CD dia. 80
160-200 200
dia. 80
MRD = SD+600 mm
PGG
P9
SD
dia. 200 Ge
arl
es
s/
Ge
are
d
P7 P7
SD
R1 - door recess, left PEC

P8 R2 - door recess, right
1)
The larger value is valid.
For the values C1 and C2
see table on Pages 17/18.
Pictured load points in the machine
SW
room for gearless drive.
SW MRW = SW+800 mm
226
226 Issue 09/2015
LEMoS

Modernisation
Performance data and principal dimensions with side counterweight without dual entrance (rope suspension 1:1)
Rated load 1 Q [kg] 320 350 375 400 425 450 500 550
Speed v [m/s] 1.0
Max. travel height TH [m] 40 25
Dual entrance No
Number of passengers 4 5 6 7
Car width (in 1 mm Min. CW [mm] 800 850
steps) Max. CW [mm] 850 900 950 1000 1100 1150 1250 1350
Car depth (in 1 mm Min. CD [mm] 1050
steps) Max. CD [mm] 1100 1200 1300 1350 1450 1500 1550 1650
Car height CH [mm] 2000 2250 (min. CH = DH; max. CH = DH + 150 mm)
Side wall clearance, side GG WC1 [mm] 225 (for counterweight depth 100 mm)
WC2 [mm] 140 300
Shaft width Min. SW 2 [mm] 1165 1215
Max. SW 2 [mm] 1375 1425 1475 1525 1625 1675 1775 1875
Rear wall clearance Min. WC3 3 [mm] 70
Door packet thickness DD [mm] 155 295 (depending on door model and door type, see Pages 17/18)
Shaft depth Min. SD [mm] 1300
Max. SD [mm] 1490 1590 1690 1740 1840 1890 1940 2040
Headroom height Min. HR [mm] 3320 3570 (Min. HR = CH + 1320 mm)
Pit depth Min. SP [mm] 1150 / 1550 4
Clearance - rail bracket Max. l [mm] 2500 2450 2400 2200 2150 2100 2000 2000
Distance between elevator car guide rails EC STM [mm] CW + 40
Rope clearance dimension RCD [mm] variable
Load point in machine room PGG [kN] 35.7 36.8 37.5 38.5 39.9 40.9 43.0 48.4
Load point in machine room PEC [kN] 19.2 19.9 20.3 20.8 21.5 22.1 23.2 26.1
Installation eye in machine room E1 [kN] 5.0
Load point in the shaft pit P7 [kN] 13.1 13.6 13.9 14.3 13.7 14.1 16.0 17.4
1)
The rated load depends on the car dimensions and on the installed car door. To determine the actual rated load, see table "Rated load depending on car width and car depth" on
Page 15. 2) The values for the lateral wall clearances WC1/WC2 and the resulting shaft widths have unrestricted validity only if the existing doors are retained. As soon as new doors are
installed, the permissible values for the shaft width must be determined depending on the door model, the door type and the door width. See table "Dimensions of the landing doors for
project planning" on Pages 17/18. 3) The horizontal, free clearance between outer edge of the elevator car and shaft rear wall must be at least 50mm (including installation tolerances).
The specified dimension also contains the installation depth of the wall panels of 20mm, because it is referred to the car inner side. 4) The minimum pit depth is 1550mm for CW x CD =
800 x 1100 - 1200mm and for CW x CD = 850 x 1150 - 1200mm.
Determination of the maximum possible car dimensions with side counterweight (rope suspension 1:1)
Car width = Shaft width Wall clearance, left Wall clearance, right
CW = SW WC1 WC2
CW = SW (C1 - R1 + IT + "air") (C2 - R2 + IT + "air")
CW = SW (C1 - R1 + 25 mm + 10 mm) (C2 - R2 + 25 mm + 10 mm)
Max. CW = SW 225 mm 140 mm
Car width = Car gauge between rails 2 x distance from elevator car to rail
CW = CGBR 2 x 20 mm
Without dual entrance

Car depth = Shaft depth Door packet thickness Rear wall clearance Installation tolerance, door side
CD = SD DD WC3 IT
CD = SD (155 to 295 mm) 70 mm 25 mm
Max. CD = SD 155 mm 70 mm 25 mm
IT installation tolerance ( 25 mm); C1 / C2 door dimensions, space requirements of the door panels in shaft width; R1 door recess, left;
R2 door recess, right; installation tolerances of 25 mm each are included in wall clearance dimensions WC1, WC2 and WC3.
LEMoS

Modernisation

R3 DW2 R4
1) 1)
(WC1) (WC2) 01
EC STM
CWD GGT
Min. MRH = 2000 mm

Bracket support
WC3
DD2
CWD
CW STM
EC STM Gearless / Geared

CD
CD
SD
CW STM
SD
Min. HR = CH + 1320 mm
DD1
DD
CH = 2000 2250 mm
DH = 2000 2100 mm
R1 DW R2 R1 DW1 R2
WC11) CW WC2 1) WC11) CW WC2
1)
SW SW
FFL ORF
R3 DW2 R4
(WC1) 1) (WC2) 1)
EC STM
CWD
TH
DH = 2000 2100 mm
WC3
DH = 2000 2100 mm
DD2
EC STM
CW STM
CW STM
CD
SD
ORF FFL FFL ORF

CD
SD
Min. SP = 1150 mm
CWD
DD1
DD
R1 DW R2 R1 DW1 R2
WC1 1) CW WC2 1) WC1 1) CW WC2 1)
SW SW Machine room
CW/2 + CWD/2 + 160 mm (with bracket support)

Shaft pit CW/2 + CWD/2 + 85 mm
0 mm (with bracket support)
Middle elevator car

CW STM / 2 +145 mm
R CW/2+60mm
dia. 200 CD dia. 80
160-200 200
P9 PGG dia. 80
MRD = SD+600 mm
SD
Prerequisites for version with dual entrance: dia. 200

Ge
arl
SD
P7 P7 Door recess dimension R1 or R2 >= 90 mm on main es

s/
entrance side and R3 or R4 >= 90 mm on rear side; dual Ge
are
d
entrance is not otherwise possible.
P8 R1 - door recess, left PEC
R2 - door recess, right
1)
SW Pictured load points in the machine SW
room for gearless drive. MRW = SW+800 mm
228
228 Issue 09/2015

LEMoS

Modernisation
Performance data and principal dimensions with side counterweight without / with dual entrance (rope suspension 1:1)
Rated load 1 Q [kg] 630 750 825 900 1000 1050
Speed v [m/s] 1.0
Max. travel height TH [m] 40
Dual entrance possible Yes/No Yes
Number of passengers 8 10 11 12 13 14
Car width (in 1 mm Min. CW [mm] 900 1000 1100
steps) Max. CW [mm] 1500 1600
Car depth (in 1 mm Min. CD [mm] 1050 1150 1200 1300 1450
steps) Max. CD [mm] 1750 2000 2100
Side wall clearance, side GG WC1 [mm] 255 (without bracket support); 330 (with bracket support) 2
WC2 [mm] 140 300
Shaft width Min. SW 3 [mm] 1295 1395 1495
Max. SW 3 [mm] 2130 2230
Rear wall clearance Min. WC3 4 [mm] 70 (without dual entrance)
Shaft depth (without dual entrance) Min. SD [mm] 1300 1400 1450 1550 1700
(without dual entrance) Max. SD [mm] 2140 2390 2490
(with dual entrance) Max. SD [mm] 2390 2640 2740
Headroom height Min. HR [mm] 3320 3570 (min. HR = CH + 1320 mm)
Pit depth Min. SP [mm] 1150
Clearance - rail bracket Max. l [mm] 2750 2500 2200
Load point in machine room PGG [kN] 63.9 68.2 70.9 73.6 77.4 on request
Load point in machine room PEC [kN] 34.4 36.7 38.2 39.7 41.7 on request
Load point in the shaft pit P7 [kN] 24.0 25.5 26.5 27.5 29.0 30.5
1)
Pages 15/16. 2) Without dual entrance: WC1 = 255 mm (without bracket support) with min. CD >= 1520 mm, otherwise WC1 = 330 mm (with bracket support). With dual entrance: WC1 =
255 mm (without bracket support) with min. CD >= 1680 mm, otherwise WC1 = 330 mm (with bracket support). 3) The values for the lateral wall clearances WC1/WC2 and the resulting
shaft widths have unrestricted validity only if the existing doors are retained. As soon as new doors are installed, the permissible values for the shaft width must be determined depending
on the door model, the door type and the door width. See table "Dimensions of the landing doors for project planning" on Pages 17/18. 4) The horizontal, free clearance between outer
edge of the elevator car and shaft rear wall must be at least 50mm (including installation tolerances). The specified dimension also contains the installation depth of the wall panels of
20mm, because it is referred to the car inner side.
Determination of the maximum possible car dimensions with side counterweight (rope suspension 1:1)
CW = SW WC1 WC2
CW = SW (C1 - R1 + IT + "air") (C2 - R2 + IT + "Luft")
CW = CGBR 2 x 20 mm
Car depth = Shaft depth Door packet thickness Rear wall clearance Installation tolerance, door side IT installation tolerance ( 25 mm); C1 / C2 door
CD = SD DD WC3 IT dimensions, space requirements of the door panels in
shaft width; R1 door recess, left; R2 door recess,
CD = SD (155 to 295 mm) 70 mm 25 mm
right; installation tolerances of 25 mm each are
Max. CD = SD 155 mm 70 mm 25 mm included in wall clearance dimensions WC1, WC2
With dual entrance and WC3.
Car depth = Shaft depth Thickness of door packet (1st entrance) Thickness of door packet (2nd entrance) 2 x installation tolerance, door sides
CD = SD DD (1st entrance) DD (2nd entrance) 2 x IT
CD = SD (155 to 295 mm) (155 to 295 mm) 2 x 25 mm
229
LEMoS
Project Planning and Performance Data (rear counterweight)

Modernisation
EC STM 01
CW STM
Min. MRH = 2000 mm

CWD
WC3
Gearless / Geared
CD
SD
MIN. HR. = CH + 1320 mm

DH = 2000 2100 mm
CH = 2000 2250 mm
DD
R1 DW R2
WC11) CW WC2 1)
FFL ORF
SW

EC STM
CW STM
TH
CWD
WC3
OFF ORF
CD
SD
Min. SP = 1150 mm
DD
R1 DW R2
WC11) CW WC21)
Machine room
SW
dia. 200
Shaft pit
PGG
RCD
dia. 80
CW/2+60 mm
160-200 200
dia. 80
MRD = SD+500 mm
dia. 200
SD
P9
PEC
P7 P7 Gearless / Geared
SD
R1 - door recess, left

P8
R2 - door recess, right = =
1)
Pictured load points in the machine SW
room for gearless drive. MRW = SW+550 mm
SW
230 Issue 09/2015

LEMoS

Modernisation
Performance data and principal dimensions with rear counterweight without dual entrance (rope suspension 1.1)
Rated load 1 Q [kg] 320 350 375 400 425 450 500 550
Speed v [m/s] 1.0
Max. travel height TH [m] 40 25
Dual entrance No
Number of passengers 4 5 6 7
Car width (in 1 mm Min. CW [mm] 800 850
steps) Max. CW [mm] 1050 1100 1200 1300 1350 1400
Car depth (in 1 mm Min. CD [mm] 850 950
steps) Max. CD [mm] 1100 1200 1300 1350 1450 1500 1550 1650
Side wall clearance, side GG WC1/WC2 [mm] 140 300
Shaft width Min. SW 2 [mm] 1080 1130
Max. SW 2 [mm] 1650 1700 1800 1900 1950 2000
Rear wall clearance WC3 3 [mm] 225 (for counterweight 100 mm)
Shaft depth Min. SD [mm] 1255 4 1355
Max. SD [mm] 1645 1745 1845 1895 1945 2045 2095 2195
Pit depth Min. SP [mm] 1150 / 1550 5
Clearance - rail bracket Max. l [mm] 2500 2450 2400 2200 2150 2100 2000 2000
Load point in machine room PGG [kN] 35.7 36.8 37.5 38.5 39.9 40.9 43.0 48.4
Load point in machine room PEC [kN] 19.2 19.9 20.3 20.8 21.5 22.1 23.2 26.1
1)
installed, the permissible values for the shaft width must be determined depending on the door model, the door type and the door width. See table "Dimensions of the landing doors for
project planning" on Pages 17/18. 3) The horizontal, free clearance between outer edge of the elevator car and outer edge of the counterweight must be at least 50mm (including installa-
tion tolerances). The specified dimension also contains the installation depth of the wall panels of 20mm, because it is referred to the car inner side. 4) Smaller shaft depths are possible
on request and after the project planning has been technically reviewed. 5) The minimum pit depth is 1550mm for CW x CD = 800 x 1100 - 1200mm and for CD = 850 to 950mm.
Determination of the maximum possible car dimensions with rear counterweight

(rope suspension 1:1)
CW = SW WC1 WC2
CW = CGBR 2 x 20 mm

CD = SD DD WC3 IT
CD = SD (155 to 295 mm) 225 mm 25 mm
IT installation tolerance ( 25 mm); C1 / C2 door dimensions, space requirements of the door panels in shaft width; R1 door recess, left;
R2 door recess, right; installation tolerances of 25 mm each are included in wall clearance dimensions WC1, WC2 and WC3.
LEMoS

Modernisation
Performance data and principal dimensions with rear counterweight without dual entrance (rope suspension 1.1)
Rated load 1 Q [kg] 630 750 825 900 1000
Speed v [m/s] 1.0
Max. travel height TH [m] 40
Dual entrance No
Number of passengers 8 10 11 12 13
Car width (in 1 mm Min. CW [mm] 900 1000 1100
steps) Max. CW [mm] 1500 1600
Car depth (in 1 mm Min. CD [mm] 1050 1150 1200 1300 1450
steps) Max. CD [mm] 1750 2000 2100
Side wall clearance, side GG WC1 [mm] 255 (without bracket support); 330 (with bracket support) 2
WC2 [mm] 140 300
Shaft width Min. SW 2 [mm] 1180 1280 1380
Max. SW 2 [mm] 2100 2200
Rear wall clearance WC3 3 [mm] 255 (for counterweight 135 mm)
Shaft depth Min. SD [mm] 1485 1585 1635 1735 1885
Max. SD [mm] 2325 2575 2675
Pit depth Min. SP [mm] 1150
Clearance - rail bracket Max. l [mm] 2750 2500
Load point in machine room PGG [kN] 63.9 68.2 70.9 73.6 77.4
Load point in machine room PEC [kN] 34.4 36.7 38.2 39.7 41.7
Load point in the shaft pit P7 [kN] 24.0 25.5 26.5 27.5 29.0
1)
installed, the permissible values for the shaft width must be determined depending on the door model, the door type and the door width. See table "Dimensions of the landing doors for pro-
ject planning" on Pages 17/18. 3) The horizontal, free clearance between outer edge of the elevator car and outer edge of the counterweight must be at least 50mm (including installation
tolerances). The specified dimension also contains the installation depth of the wall panels of 20mm, because it is referred to the car inner side.
Determination of the maximum possible car dimensions with rear counterweight

(rope suspension 1:1)
CW = SW WC1 WC2
CW = CGBR 2 x 20 mm

CD = SD DD WC3 IT
CD = SD (155 to 295 mm) 255 mm 25 mm
IT installation tolerance ( 25 mm); C1 / C2 door dimensions, space requirements of the door panels in shaft width;
R1 door recess, left; R2 door recess, right; installation tolerances of 25 mm each are included in wall clearance dimen-
sions WC1, WC2 and WC3.
232 Issue 09/2015

LEMoS
Project Planning Data (without dual entrance)
Modernisation
Rated load depending on car width and car depth
Rated loads Car width CW [mm]

Q [kg] 800 850 900 950 1000 1050 1100 1150 1200 1250 1300 1350 1400 1450 1500 1550 1600
850 320 350 350 375 375 400 425 425 450 475 500 500 525
900 320 350 350 375 400 400 425 450 450 475 500 525 550 575
950 320 350 350 375 400 425 425 450 475 500 525 550 575 600 600
1000 320 350 350 375 400 425 425 450 475 500 525 550 575 600 630 650
1050 320 350 350 375 400 425 425 450 475 500 525 550 575 630 630 675 700
1100 320 350 375 400 425 425 475 475 500 550 575 600 630 650 675 700 725
1150 350 375 400 425 425 450 475 525 550 575 600 630 650 675 725 750 775
1200 350 375 400 425 450 475 500 550 575 600 630 650 700 725 750 775 800
1250 375 400 425 450 475 500 550 575 600 630 675 700 725 750 800 825 850
1300 400 425 450 475 500 525 575 600 630 675 700 725 750 800 825 850 900
1350 400 425 450 500 525 550 600 630 650 700 725 775 800 825 875 900 925
Car depth CD [mm]
1400 425 450 475 525 550 575 630 650 700 725 750 800 825 875 900 925 975
1450 425 475 500 550 575 630 650 675 725 750 800 825 875 900 950 975 1000
1500 450 475 525 575 600 630 675 725 750 800 825 875 900 950 975
1550 475 500 550 600 630 675 700 750 775 825 850 900 925 975
1600 475 525 575 600 650 700 725 775 800 850 900 925 975 1000
1650 500 550 600 630 675 725 750 800 850 875 925 975 1000
1700 525 575 630 650 700 750 775 825 875 925 950 1000
1750 550 600 630 675 725 775 825 850 900 950 1000
1800 575 600 650 700 750 800 850 875 925 975
1850 575 630 675 725 775 825 875 925 950 1000
1900 600 650 700 750 800 850 900 850 1000
1950 630 675 725 775 825 875 925 975
2000 650 700 750 800 850 900 950 1000
2050 675 725 775 825 875 925 975
2100 675 750 800 850 900 950 1000
Determination of the rated loads in accordance with DIN EN 81-1:1998+A3:2009, edition 06.2010, item 8.2.1, table 1.1 for passenger elevators, with consideration given to an available
area in the entrance area with closed door of 0.072 m2 (door model ThyssenKrupp K8A, door type M2T / dual panel, one-sided telescoping, side-opening, door width DW = 900 mm).
When using other door models and door types, rated loads may vary from these values.
Number of persons depending on rated load Q

Rated loads Q [kg] 100 180 225 320 350 375 400 425 450 500 525
Number of persons 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Min. available area in elevator car [m2] 0.28 0.49 0.60 0.79 0.98 1.17 1.31
Rated loads Q [kg] 630 675 750 800 825 900 975 1000 1050
Number of persons 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Min. available area in elevator car [m2] 1.45 1.59 1.73 1.87 2.01 2.15 2.29
Determination of the number of persons in accordance with DIN EN 81-1:1998+A3:2009, edition 06.2010, item 8.2.3 (person weight 75 kg) or table 1.2.
LEMoS
Project Planning Data (with dual entrance)

Modernisation
Rated load depending on car width and car depth
Rated loads Car width CW [mm]

Q [kg] 800 850 900 950 1000 1050 1100 1150 1200 1250 1300 1350 1400 1450 1500 1550 1600
850
900
950
1000 575 600 630 630 675 700
1050 575 600 630 650 675 700 725
1100 575 600 630 650 700 725 750 775
1150 575 600 630 675 700 725 750 775 800
1200 575 600 630 675 700 725 750 800 825 850
1250 575 600 630 675 700 725 775 800 825 850 900
1300 575 600 630 675 700 725 775 800 825 875 900 925
1350 575 600 630 675 700 725 775 800 825 875 900 950 975
Car depth CD [mm]
1400 600 630 650 700 725 775 800 825 875 900 950 975 1000
1450 575 630 650 700 725 750 800 825 875 900 950 975 1025 1050
1500 575 600 630 675 725 750 800 825 875 900 950 975 1025 1050
1550 600 630 675 700 750 775 825 850 900 950 975 1025 1050
1600 600 650 700 725 775 800 850 900 925 975 1000 1050
1650 630 675 725 750 800 850 875 925 975 975 1050
1700 650 700 750 775 825 875 900 950 1000 1050
1750 675 725 775 800 850 900 950 975 1025
1800 700 750 800 825 875 925 975 1025 1050
1850 725 775 825 875 900 950 1000 1050
1900 750 800 850 900 925 975 1025
1950 775 825 875 925 975 1025 1050
2000 800 850 900 950 1000 1050
2050 825 875 925 975 1025
2100 825 900 950 1000 1050
Determination of the rated loads in accordance with DIN EN 81-1:1998+A3:2009, edition 06.2010, item 8.2.1, table 1.1 for passenger elevators, with consideration given to an available
area in the entrance area with closed door of 0.072 m2 (door model ThyssenKrupp K8A, door type M2T / dual panel, one-sided telescoping, side-opening, door width DW = 900 mm).
When using other door models and door types, rated loads may vary from these values.
234 Issue 09/2015

LEMoS
Project Planning Data (door mountings)
Decision-making aid for selecting a suitable door model

Door model S8A / K8A 2000 C-MOD FINELINE
- High-quality, elegant and efficient door - Economical solution for many common - Compact dimensions: low installation
series applications depth and width, ideal for narrow shafts
- Robust and reliable, even under - Further usage of existing swing landing - Version with asymmetric entrance
Special advantages challenging application conditions doors possible offers additional planning freedom
- Extensive range of fire protection - Further usage of existing swing landing

certifications and many options doors possible
Dimensions of the landing doors for project planning
TT
TT
C1 TB C2
C1 TB C2
Dimensioned drawing for side-opening door Dimensioned drawing for centre-opening door
(left-opening version shown) (dual panel version shown)
Door width Space requirement of door panels (in shaft width) Door packet thickness
Door model Door type
DW [mm] C 1 [mm] C 2 [mm] DD [mm]
M2T 700 400
TT
(dual panel, one-sided
telescoping, left-opening) 750 425
E1 TB E2
295
S8A / K8A 800 450 1) WA1 KB 150
WA2 1)
C-E1
SB
C-E2 (incl. door frame)
850 475
900 500
M2T 700 400

(dual panel, one-sided
750 425
telescoping, right-opening)
295
S8A / K8A 800 150 450
(incl. door frame)
850 475
900 500
M2Z 700 400 400

(dual panel, centre-opening)
750 425 425
235
S8A / K8A 800 450 450
(incl. door frame)
850 475 475
900 500 500
M4TZ 800 250 250

(quadruple panel, telescoping,
centre-opening) 295
S8A / K8A 850 265 265
(incl. door frame)
900 275 275
For dimensions C1 and C2 and for the dimension of door packet thickness TT, no shaft and dimensional tolerances are included in the calculation. To determine the maximum car width and
maximum car depth in an existing elevator shaft, the space requirements of the doors must be taken into consideration. Listed in the above table are the values for C1, C2 and DD for the
various door models and door types. Further door designs possible on request.
LEMoS
Project Planning Data (door mountings)

Modernisation
Dimensions of the landing doors for project planning
Door width Space requirement of door panels (in shaft width) Door packet thickness
Door model Door type
DW [mm] C 1 [mm] C 2 [mm] DD [mm]
650 390
2L
(dual panel, one-sided 700 415
telescoping, left-opening)
750 440 230
2000 C-MOD 100 (not including depth
800 465 of the door frame)
850 490
900 515
650 390
2R
(dual panel, one-sided 700 415
telescoping, right-opening)
750 440 230
2000 C-MOD 100 (not including depth
850 490
900 515
650 210 (DH 2000) / 235 (DH 2100) 210 (DH 2000) / 235 (DH 2100)
4Z
(quadruple panel, telescoping 700 210 (DH 2000) / 235 (DH 2100) 210 (DH 2000) / 235 (DH 2100)
centre-opening)
750 225 225 230
2000 C-MOD (not including depth
800 235 235 of the door frame)
850 250 250
900 260 260
650 205 205
4S
(quadruple panel, telescoping 700 205 205
centre-opening, symmetric)
750 215 215 155
FINELINE (not including depth
800 230 230 of the door frame)
850 240 240
900 255 255
650 255
4/AS-L
(quadruple panel, telescoping 700 260
centre-opening,
750 290 155
asymmetric left)
FINELINE 145 (not including depth
850 340
900 360
650 255
4/AS-R
(quadruple panel, telescoping 700 260
centre-opening,
750 290 155
asymmetric right)
FINELINE 145 (not including depth
850 340
900 360
For dimensions C1 and C2 and for the dimension of door packet thickness, no shaft and dimensional tolerances are included in the calculation. To determine the maximum car width and
maximum car depth in an existing elevator shaft, the space requirements of the doors must be taken into consideration. Listed in the above table are the values for C1, C2 and DD for the
various door models and door types.
236 Issue 09/2015

LEMoS
Technical Data
Modernisation
Technical data, installed components and electrical data

Rated load Q [kg] 320 350 375 400 425 450 500 550

Speed v [m/s] 1.0
Max. travel height Max. TH [m] 40
Dual entrance No
Mass of car (P 450 SV) EC 1 [kg] 400 540 410 550 415 555 420 560 430 580 435 590 450 610 475 725
Drive Geared TW 45 C
Nominal power [kW] 2.7 2.9 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.9 4.3
Max. mains power 2, 3 [kVA] 6.4 6.7 7.0 7.3 7.6 7.9 8.6 9.4
Mains rated current 2, 3 [A] 5.1 5.5 5.8 6.1 6.5 6.8 7.6 8.3
Max. mains current 2, 3 [A] 9.2 9.7 10.1 10.5 11.0 11.4 12.4 13.6
Suspension ropes n x dS [mm] 7x8
Drive Gearless PMC 145-2 M PMC 145-2 L
Nominal power [kW] 2.38 3.69
Max. mains power 2, 3 [kVA] 4.1 6.3
Mains rated current 2, 3 [A] 4.1 6.6
Max. mains current 2, 3 [A] 5.9 9.1
Suspension ropes n x dS [mm] 6x6 7x6 8x6 10 x 6 12 x 6
Elevator-car guide rails T 70/B
Counterweight guides T 50/A
Elevator-car buffer n x type 1 x 100x80 A 2 x 100x80 A
Counterweight buffer n x type 1 x 100x80 A

Rated load Q [kg] 630 750 825 900 1000 1050

Speed v [m/s] 1.0
Max. travel height Max. TH [m] 40
Dual entrance possible Yes
Mass of car (P 1000 SV) EC 1 [kg] 550 680 550 950 590 980 610 1000 630 1020 650 1050 700 1100
Drive Geared TW 45 C TW 63 B
Nominal power [kW] 4.8 4.8 5.3 5.8 6.7 7.4 7.7
Max. mains power 2, 3 [kVA] 10.2 12.3 13.6 14.6 15.6 16.7 17.4
Mains rated current 2, 3 [A] 9.3 9.4 10.3 11.2 12.9 14.2 14.9
Max. mains current 2, 3 [A] 14.7 17.7 19.6 21 22.5 24.1 25.1
Diameter of traction sheave DT [mm] 440 590 510
Suspension ropes n x dS [mm] 7x8 5 x 10 6 x 10 7 x 10
Drive Gearless PMC 145 M / PMC 170 M / DAF 210 L PMC 170 XL / DAF 270 M
Nominal power [kW] 4.8 5.8
Max. mains power 2, 3 [kVA] 8.8 11.9
Mains rated current 2, 3 [A] 9.3 13.1
Max. mains current 2, 3 [A] 12.7 17.1
Suspension ropes n x dS [mm] 7x8 8x8
Elevator-car guide rails T 89/B
Counterweight guides T 50/A
Elevator-car buffer n x type 2 x 100x80 A 2 x 125x80 A
Counterweight buffer n x type 1 x 125x80 A 2 x 100x80 A
1)
Equipment features for determining the elevator car weights: Min. EC: without dual entrance, door model FINELINE, hand-rail, without mirror, plastic flooring material, 2 mm.
Max. EC: with dual entrance, door model K8A, hand-rail, mirror, plastic flooring material, 2 mm. 2) For 400V / 50Hz. 3) The specified powers and currents are average values
for orientation, are based on the actually installed components and increase depending on the project according to elevator control unit, the number of landings, the type and
number of operating and indicator elements, the car lighting and other electrical power consumers (e.g. fans).
LEMoS
Elevator Car Design

Modernisation
Colours / materials
WVSG WVCW WVCC WVSE

Galvanised steel Traffic White RAL 9016 / Colour RAL / Leather / stainless steel
powder coating powder coating
WVSL WVSF WVSA

Linen / stainless steel Grain 220/stainless steel Grain 220/stainless steel
ferritic austenitic
Car ceiling and lighting systems
Mirrors
SpotLED SlimLED Without lighting

Traffic white RAL 9016 / Traffic white RAL 9016 / Traffic white RAL 9016 /
powder coating, CWFS powder coating, CWSL powder coating, CWNL
stainless steel grain 220, stainless steel grain 220,
Half mirror
CSFS CSSL
BTHM
Mirror,
entire Flooring material
height
BBWD
FNES FRKB FRKG FRIC

Black Stone / rubber Kayar Black / rubber Kayar Grey / rubber Ice / rubber
FPDG FOEO
Dove Grey / vinyl Dark Brushed Oak / PVC Prepared for flooring material
of up to 25 mm to be provided
by customer
Hand rail
Handrails
Stainless steel Stainless steel Stainless steel

Grain 220 dia. 40mm Grain 220 dia. 40mm Grain 220 dia. 40mm
straight version bowed version bowed version, all round
Rear wall, side walls Rear wall, side walls L-layout, U-layout
Skirt guards
Grain 220 stainless steel Aluminium

50mm 30 mm
Optional SBSS SBAA
238 Issue 09/2015

LEMoS
Elevator Car Design
Modernisation
Design variants
VERTICAL A VERTICAL B VERTICAL C
Colours / materials
Galvanised steel Traffic White / Grain 220

powder coating stainless steel
WVSG WVCW WVSF
Wall
WVSG WVCW WVSF
Car ceiling with lighting systems
CWFS CWFS CSSL
Skirt guard
SBAA SBAA SBSS
Flooring material
without FRKG FRKB
Hand rail
without HSRE + HSLT HCIL
Mirrors
without BTHM BBWD
The elevator car can also be supplied in galvanised sheet metal as the design for customer lining. Please specify the customer-designed
equipment with weight.
VERTICAL
The elevator car is prepared for installation of a COP (car operating panel) as installation panel by the customer. On account of the self-
supporting construction no through-holes or openings may be provided in the walls (exception: cable lead-through).
LEMoS
Car Design Options
Elevator car P450SV / P1000SV design options

Modernisation
VERTICAL VERTICAL
Colours / materials Code Colours / materials Code
selection selection
Walls (VERTICAL design line) Mirror on the rear wall of the car
Half mirror
Galvanised steel WVSG BTHM
from height of hand-rail to cover
Traffic White RAL 9016 / Full height mirror
WVCW BBWD
powder coating without dots pattern
Colour / RAL
WVCC
powder coating Handrails in the elevator car
Stainless steel grain 220 l 40 mm version, straight
Leather / stainless steel WVSE
on rear wall, rear HSRE
on side wall, right HSRI
Linen / stainless steel WVSL
on side wall, left HSLT
Grain 220 / stainless steel Stainless steel grain 220 l 40 mm, bowed version
WVSF
ferritic on rear wall, rear HBRE
Grain 220 / stainless steel on side wall, right HBRI
WVSA
austenitic on side wall, left HBLT
Stainless steel grain 220 l 40 mm, bowed version, surrounding
Car front walls L-layout (on rear and
HCIL
side wall, opposite CIOP)
Galvanised steel DPSG
U-layout (on three sides) HCIU
DPCW
powder coating Skirt guards in the elevator car
Colour / RAL Stainless steel grain 220 h = 50 mm
DPCC SBSS
powder coating without lighting
Leather / stainless steel DPSE Aluminium h = 30 mm

SBAA
without lighting
Linen / stainless steel DPSL
Grain 220 / stainless steel

DPSF
ferritic
Grain 220 / stainless steel
DPSA
austenitic
Car ceiling and lighting

SpotLED Traffic White RAL 9016 /
CWFS
powder coating
SpotLED grain 220 /
CSFS
austenitic stainless steel
SlimLED Traffic White RAL 9016 /
CWSL
powder coating
SlimLED grain 220 /
CSSL
austenitic stainless steel
Without lighting Traffic White
CWNL
RAL 9016 / powder coating
Flooring material in the elevator car

Black Stone / rubber FNES
Kayar Black / rubber FRKB
Kayar Grey / rubber FRKG
Ice / rubber FRIC
Dove Grey / vinyl FPDG
Dark Brushed Oak / PVC FOEO
Without flooring material
Option
240 Issue 09/2015

LEMoS
Lighting System
Modernisation
LED Lighting
Through the use of highly efficient and
energy-saving LED lighting, energy
savings up to 78% over fluorescent
lamps can be achieved.
W
White LED
LED strips
With indirect lighting over the skirt guard,
the LED lighting system offers you a
special accent with soft light. Our atmos-
pheric RGB LED lighting system offers you
a broad spectrum of colored light.
RGB LED:
all colors available on the skirt
guard
Technical Report
Technical Report
Solutions for modernisation with components
Techical Report - Solutions for modernisation with components
Solutions for modernization with components UK

The elevator markets in Germany and Whenever a modernization is planned, Bracket fastenings (masonry situa-
many parts of Europe have a high num- it is therefore necessary to check the tion)
ber of existing installations, some of current situation regarding the installa-
Shaft openings (position and size)
which are more than 25 years old. Due tion in terms of up-to-dateness, by us-
to the considerable age of these instal- ing the available drawings and techni- Existing concrete foundations in ma-
lations and safety-related considera- cal documents (register), and to chine room and pit (retain or re-
tions, as well as the need for necessary document the actual status with photo- move)
repairs and conversions, many of these graphs. Dust-free conversion
installations have to be fundamentally Modernization concepts, the selection Access to the building during the
renovated. It may also be necessary to of components and schedules must al- conversion
modernize existing elevators as part of ways be coordinated in detail.
building renovation programmes and Transport paths in the building for
When installations are modernized, ex- the conversion
changes of use. In such cases, the in-
perience shows that noise behaviour in
stallation is often completely replaced.
the building can change perceptibly in
The market potential in terms of connection with changes made to the This means that, in the area surround-
modernization is therefore significantly elevator. ing the modernization, it must be possi-
greater than for new installations which ble to adapt the solutions and packages
It is therefore recommended that noise
are either in planning or have already flexibly to the particular application
and passenger comfort should be
been fitted. conditions of the installation.
measured before the conversion, in or-
The majority of these installations still der for these measurements to then be Some requirements that should be tak-
have a machine room, which it would used as comparison measurements af- en into consideration are detailed be-
then be advisable to keep in service, ter the modernization is completed. low. Some requirements may also arise
even in the case of modernization. in combination:
Because the total amount of time and
Modernizations which, without a com- resources required for modernization Optimization of the elevator car size
pelling reason, forgo the continued use is not limited only to the elevator com-
With an elevator car that can be flex-
of an existing machine room, should ponents, the surrounding area should
ibly configured with integrated car
therefore be carefully examined in or- also be included in the examination
sling for gauge reduction, the inter-
der to check that measures in place for during the planning stage.
nal car area can be optimized, given
rescuing elevator passengers, mainte- The following general conditions should the available shaft cross section.
nance and installation inspection are also be considered: When doors with corresponding pad
not encumbered as a result. Complete
replacement with an MRL system is Changes that affect structural as-
frequently proposed as a moderniza- pects (ceiling loads, wall fastenings
tion solution when suppliers are not and pit stresses)
able to offer project-related and cus- Further usage of existing ceiling and
tomized solutions. wall openings
Figure 2: Elevator car with integrated car

Figure 1: Shaft utilisation sling and flexible dimensions
242 Issue 09/2015

Technical Report
Technical Report
thicknesses and installation dimen-

sions are also used, in many cases
this optimization makes it is possi-
ble to use a door with a width of
900 mm and a floor area which fulfil
the requirements for a type of eleva-
tor that can be used by the disabled.
Door openings
When the existing door openings on
the floors can continue to be used as
a result of appropriate planning, this
means a considerable reduction in the
additional measures taken by the
customer. Old hinged-door frames
can be retained and the sliding
doors placed behind them. By panel- Figure 6: DAF210 with adaptation to TW63
ling the frames, the closure to the frame with rope guard
masonry on the floor can then be
made dust-free. Figure 4: LIOP, LOP, LIP
verter is also state-of-the-art prac-

tice and energy-efficient solutions
with power regeneration are used
more frequently even in the lower
range of performance. Machine base
frames for adaptation to local condi-
tions can also be supplied in many
cases.
In terms of service and mainte-
nance, both drive concepts are com-
parable, since brake manufacturers
can alternatively also supply brakes
with manual release for gearless Figure 7: DAF270 with adaptation to
TW130 frame with rope guard
brakes.
Gears can be placed either with an
adapter onto the existing frame or
onto the foundation. For using gear-
less drives in the machine room,
corresponding solutions with an op-
Figure 3: Panelled hinged-door frame with tional traction sheave cover are avail-
telescopic door
able.
All solutions are designed with ap-
Operating and indicator elements
propriate insulation for sound-opti-
On the landing, LOP, LIOP, LIP pan- mized installation.
els with integrated electrics for sim-
ple cabling to the control system can When adjacent drives are replaced,
Figure 8: DAF210 as a replacement
be fitted as desired on the door solutions with a gearless system and for lower
frame or the masonry as flat attach- traction sheave in the shaft are avail-
ment elements with different button able, which are placed in the wall
opening. Drum drive as a special solution
designs. The requirements of EN 81-70
are then also met. Where space is very restricted, the
solution with a drum drive is a possi-
Gearless or geared
ble alternative to the hydraulic or
For the drive, a check must be made traction sheave elevator. EN 81-1 al-
to see whether an existing gear with so describes the standard require-
large traction sheave should be rements for drum-drive elevators.
placed by a gear with large traction Worm gears are generally used for
sheave or whether a gearless system the drive, while the use of gearless
with 2:1 suspension and smaller drives is limited in terms of rated
traction sheave is used. In moderni- load due to the required diameter of
zation, the use of a frequency con- Figure 5: ModKit with PMC 170 the traction sheave.
Technical Report
Anzeige_Liftronic_eco_1 05.01.1970 3:27 Uhr Seite 5
Technical report
Installation part replacement Structural aspects

When replacing parts, a check must When the loads on an installation are
be made to see whether components increased, a change in or recalcula-
such as rails, brackets and the coun- tion of the statics is always neces-
terweight can, in fact, be used again. sary. In many cases, one solution
If they can, a considerable amount here can be to distribute the loading
of installation time and effort, using onto the shaft ceiling via a load dis-
dowels and transporting material, tribution beam. This measure can al-
can be avoided. As a result, it may so be helpful on occasions when, be-
also be possible to reduce the length cause of the installation situation,
of time required for the conversion. new ceiling openings have to be
created. The drives are protected
Modular modernization
from vibration when placed on these
Based on an overall concept for the beams.
modernization, it is possible to im- To further optimise the noise situa-
plement the measures in several tion, it may be advisable in certain
steps, when this is not possible in cases to also provide additional anti-
one step for budgetary reasons, for vibrating elements underneath the
example. It is then ensured that, on beams. In this case, the rubber-met-
completion of the entire moderniza- al connections should be designed
tion, the installation features state- accordingly.
Figure 9: DAF270 with traction sheave in of-the-art technology and no unnec-
the shaft When individual components are re-
essary costs are incurred through
placed, all components to be
repeatedly replacing components.
changed and the different effects on
Energy efficiency the overall system during replace-
ment must be assessed.
Depending of the type of use (num-
ber of runs, equipment, etc.), the fo- UCM (unintended car movement)
cus must be placed on reducing ei- As part of a modernization opera-
ther the travelling requirement or tion, a check must always be made
the standby requirement. In VDI to see what measures must be im-
4707 Part 2, the process has now plemented in relation to the require-
been defined as to how, using com- ments according to A3. Replacing a
ponent characteristic values, an en- drive always makes it necessary to
ergy efficiency analysis can be carried carry out an assessment according
out even as part of the moderniza- to EN 81-1:A3 (UCM) and implement
Figure 10: Drum drive with gear TW130 tion planning (forecast tool). the necessary measures. In this
LIFT-REPORT 40. Jahrg. (2014) Heft 1 49
244 Issue 09/2015

Technical Report
Technical report

case, comprehensive planning is re- brake, or via an emergency brake In the process, flexibly adjusted car di-
quired, which, in many cases, should system (NBS) on the gear. mensions can be assessed for opti-
be combined with simultaneous re- mum space utilisation.
placement of the control system, Summary In the report, the different concepts
since the majority of control system In Germany and in parts of Europe, the will also be assessed on the basis of
developers offer A3 functionality as market volume in terms of moderniza- examples, in order for a technical and
a pre-integrated feature in their cur- tion is significantly greater than the economic assessment of the solution
rent control systems. The solution is market for new installations. options to be made.
often easier to implement than net- In the view of the operators and in re-
Types of modernization may turn out
working the different components spect of safety for servicing personnel,
to be very different according to the lo-
with additional detection systems. continuing to use existing machine
cal situation and the particular supplier.
When a control system is later re- rooms is to be preferred, provided that
placed, these components may no Approaches to modernization range
this space is not otherwise required for
longer be required. from the typical replacement of indi-
reasons of building use (e.g addition).
When implementing the require- vidual components to modular and
scalable replacement solutions, through In existing installations, headrooms
ments of A3, it may be easier to for- and shaft pits are generally sufficiently
go a levelling operation with early- to the complete replacement of the
entire elevator system. large, so that measures for temporary
opening doors and demonstrate via safety spaces are not necessary.
rope elongation that, due to the buff- All these solution options should be
A special application where space is
ering during loading, relevelling is viewed in terms of a project in order
restricted may take the form of a solu-
not necessary. In this case, it is suf- for a solution to be found, on the basis
tion with a drum drive.
ficient if the installation is securely of a technical and economic assess-
stopped at the landing via a safety ment, that is customized to the re- LiftEquip GmbH
brake, as found on the gearless sys- quirements of both customer and op- Elevator Components GmbH,
tem in the form of an operational erator. D-73765 Neuhausen a.d.F.
246 Issue 09/2015
Safety
Basic safety practices for lifts

BASIC SAFETY PRACTICES
FOR LIFTS
Disclaimer: The present ELA Basic Safety Practices for Lifts booklet is intended as a tool among others to help
controlling safety risks. It is for general information purposes only and should not be construed as legal advice. It is
not intended as a substitute for each companys own assessment and decision making. LiftEquip declines any and all liability
for any measure taken or not taken on the basis of the present booklet.
Safety
INTRODUCTION
Installing, maintaining, repairing, and modernizing lifts are activities leading to

exposure to specific risks. In order to mitigate these risks and help promote an
injury-free workplace, professionals are therefore required to follow specific safety

practices and work methods.
This ELA Basic Safety Practices booklet gathers general and specific safety practices
which should be followed at all times.
This booklet has been designed, in the first instance, for providers of installation,
maintenance, repair, and modernization services for lifts. These service providers
have a legal obligation and responsibility to protect their employees against any
risks related to their activities. The booklet provides guidance in quoting examples
of protection means which when put in place adequately will help attain the best
level of protection to, among others, contractors and subcontractors employees.
It is also the company responsibly to identify, understand and comply will all the
applicable local, regional, country and European requirements and laws.
Equally, this booklet has also been designed for the employees. Indeed, the
employee is responsible for following the safety practices and for using the
protection equipment provided by his/her company. The booklet will help him/
her to understand the risks and, where needed, to require the necessary additional
protection means from his/her company.
Safety practices are generally based upon common sense. They have been set
following the lessons learnt from many years of incidents, some of them very serious
and leading to death.
Some of the safety practices are particularly important: these are the VITAL rules. As
clearly stated, these rules are VITAL for the preservation of life itself. Should they not
be followed, the result could be very serious or even fatal injuries.
(3)
248 Issue 09/2015

Safety
INTRODUCTION
This ELA Basic Safety Practices booklet addresses most of the risks and situations
encountered in the lift activity. It provides guidelines and examples on how to

protect against the risks and help starting the safety journey. However, this booklet
should not be seen as an exhaustive set of rules covering all the complexity of our
work. It remains the responsibility of the company concerned to conduct its own risk
assessment and provide the right preventive measures.
Your business as a contractor or subcontractor and your life as a worker depend on

the strict application of all safety practices. Ensure their respect and respect them
at all times.
Finally, in case of a doubt, should anyone feel that the situation is not fully under
control, STOP working immediately and ask for support.
The Editing Team
Disclaimer: The present ELA Basic Safety Practices for Lifts booklet is intended as a tool among others to help
controlling safety risks. It is for general information purposes only and should not be construed as legal advice. It is
not intended as a substitute for each companys own assessment and decision making. ELA declines any and all liability
for any measure taken or not taken on the basis of the present booklet. 2015 European Lift Association (ELA) aisbl
Belgium - All rights reserved.
(4)
250
Safety
INTRODUCTION
Summary of the risks :
Electrical hazard Crushing hazard on Risk of hurt on ceiling Asbestos

unprotected moving equipment
Risk of fall access to machine Risk of slip Risk of tripping

and/or machineroom
(5)
Electrical hazard Crushing hazard on Risk of crush on top of the Falling objects
unprotected moving equipment hoistway and adjacent unit
Risk of fall from Risk of slip Risk of tripping Asbestos

the top of the car
Electrical hazard Crushing hazard on Risk of crushing Falling objects

unprotected moving equipment by the car, counterweight
or adjacent elevator
Risk of fall from the Risk of slip Risk of tripping

landing or pit ladder
Issue 09/2015
Safety
PeRsONal PROTeCTIve eqUIPmeNT (PPe)
Like all professionals firemen, policemen, welders etc. or any sportsman

fencing, martial art wearing personal protective equipment allows one to perform

the activity in the best safe conditions.
The company has the responsibility to provide this Personal Protective Equipment
to all their employees.
The employee has the responsibility to wear and use them and require them to be
replaced if damaged.
2 types of protective equipment are presented:

n The personal protective equipment which protects the body from an injury.
n The means of fall protection which prevents the employee from falling from heights.
(6)
Safety
PeRsONal PROTeCTIve eqUIPmeNT (PPe)
Glasses: Safety helmet required:

n Are mandatory when n When there is a risk of falling objects
there is a risk of flying n Are mandatory on all construction sites

objects (such as drilling, Check the helmet following the manufacturers recommendation!
grinding) Protective caps are:
n Recommended when using n Recommended all times to protect against injuries in small
chemical products machine room or work in the hoistway
Ear protection:
n Mandatory if noise > 85 dB(A)
Required gloves:
n Heavy duty gloves when doing
manual handling.
n Cut protective when performing
repairs, using tools, etc.
n Electrical gloves for work on
potential live equipment
n Chemical gloves when using
chemical products.
Fall protection equipment are
mandatory when there is a
risk of fall:
n Fall Arrest system allows
the arrest of a fall
n Fall Restraint prevents
approaching the gap
Safety shoes:
n Anti-slip, anti-perforating.
n Toe protection against falling
objects.
n A heel to get a better grip when
climbing a ladder
Working clothes: n Preferably providing protection
n Protect against cuts, dirt, etc. for the ankle
n Identify the company
Avoid wearing:
n Metal watches, bracelets, necklaces, rings etc. when working on a live electrical equipment
n Unfitted clothes that could be caught in unprotected moving equipment
n Ties, scarves that could be caught in unprotected moving equipment
Remember:
n Additional safety requirements such as glasses, high visibility jacket could be required locally!
(7)
252 Issue 09/2015

Safety
Fall PROTeCTION eqUIPmeNT

Primary protection means: the balustrade or guardrail
A balustrade or guardrail should always have at least the following component:
Guardrail or balustrade shall be installed if a risk

Top rail of fall exists as defined in the local regulation
(for example, gap>30 cm and working area >2 m):
Mid rail On top of the car
On top of temporary working platform.
Toe guard On a scaffold.
On edge of a building.
Check the dimension in local regulation! In hoistway / shaft opening.
Secondary protection means: fall arrest system or fall restrain system
Fall Arrest System: STOPS the fall Fall Restraint System: PREVENTS a fall
Fall Arrest System includes: Fall Restraint includes:

Body harness EN 361 Body harness EN 361 OR
Short lanyard EN 355 Belt EN 358
with shock absorber Adjustable lanyard EN 355
Connectors to attach the Connectors to attach to
harness EN 362 harness EN362
All fall protection equipment:

Is individual: every employee exposed shall be provided with one
Must be formally inspected 1/year by a competent person (supplier or any trained person)
Must be checked before each use
Hooking points
On the top of the car, unit in service Other situations: the life line
Example of life line:
Life line made of cord with its Retractable

attachment point for harness life line
The car beam is generally considered as an The life line shall be fixed to an adequate hooking
adequate hooking point for the fall arrest point with the right capacity as per local regulation.
system. The life line shall be protected against sharp edge.
The company to list the authorized hooking points.
Use life line when working on:
When working on the car: Temporary platform
Attach after accessing On a car when ropes have been removed
Detach before egressing On a car partially assembled, suspended by chain
or hoisting device
This is to prevent still being attached when A ladder when working on top of the
putting the unit back in service. counterweight
(8)
Safety
FaTal & seRIOUs aCCIDeNTs PReveNTION
In the Lift Industry, employees are exposed to risks which if not fully identified and
adequately managed may lead to a fatal or serious accident.
The present chapter aims to help any employee and company understanding what
the main risks are and help them identify effective means of protection. The list is
based on lift industry experience and knowledge of serious accidents but however
cannot be considered as fully exhaustive.
(9)
254 Issue 09/2015

Safety
ACCESSING THE SITE NEW EQUIPMENT CONTROL OF MECHANICAL ENERGY

DESCRIPTION OF THE RISK
Risk of being hurt by a falling object can occur when walking on a

construction site and a worker drops a tool or materials.
PROTECTION MEANS
VITAL RULE:
ALWAYS wear a safety helmet when working on a
construction site.
ALWAYS be careful of workers working above when accessing
the site or the building.
EXAMPLE OF SPECIFIC PROTECTION MEANS:

Personal Protective Equipment:
Safety helmet.
Check the safety helmet following the manufacturers

recommendation!
(10)
Safety
ACCESS TO THE MACHINE ROOM OR THE PULLEY ROOM TRAP ACCESS FALL PROTECTION
Risk of falling from unsuitable access equipment if: Risk of falling from unsuitable access equipment if:
unsafe ladder (damaged, too short or cant be unsafe trap (not robust enough, too heavy, no
secured to a fixing point) system to prevent accidental closing etc.)
PROTECTION MEANS
VITAL RULE:
ALWAYS check condition of ladder and trap before use.
NEVER use improvised access equipment.

Safe Access Equipment:
Ladder in good condition (not broken, damaged or fragile).
Ladder with non-slip feet.
Fixed ladder or hooking system to secure the ladder.
Secured and robust trap.
Handle to facilitate the access and good balance.

Boots with clean, non-slip soles.
Protective cap.
Safe procedure:
Check that the access equipments are safe.
Keep 3 points of contact when climbing up the ladder
NEVER stay positioned on the trap: it may not be robust.
ALWAYS close the trap (public and employee protection)
If the access is not safe, inform the company.
The issue should be raised with your company who should inform
the customer and/or inspection body (if relevant) to help and
find an appropriate solution.
(11)
256 Issue 09/2015

Safety
ACCESS TO THE MACHINE ROOM OR THE PULLEY ROOM ACCESS TO ROOF FALL PROTECTION

Risk of falling from unprotected edge if:

Edge is within less than 3 m from the access path to
the machine room or pulley room.
PROTECTION MEANS
VITAL RULE :
NEVER approach an unprotected edge.
ALWAYS ensure that fall protection is in place if a fall
exists with 3 m from the access path to the machine room or
pulley room.
ALWAYS use a portable light if no proper lighting is in place.

Safe Access:
Edge of the building protected by a compliant guardrail.

Fall protection system and appropriate hooking point.
Safe procedure:
Check that the access is safe.
If the access does not meet the criteria above, inform the
company.
The issue should be raised with your company who should in-
form the customer and/or inspection body (if relevant) to help
and find an appropriate solution.
(12)
Safety
WORK IN THE MACHINE ROOM FALL PROTECTION

Risk of falling through unprotected hole from an open trap

or when lifting equipment through the trap.
PROTECTION MEANS
VITAL RULE:
NEVER work in close proximity of an unprotected
opening without appropriate fall protection equipment.
If a barrier cannot be used, ALWAYS wear protective equipment

attached to a hooking point in the machine room.

Safe Access:
Compliant guardrail around the trap.
Personal Protective Equipment

Personal fall protection with the lanyard attached to an
appropriate hooking point (such as a specially created point or
an adequate beam).
Safe procedure:
Install a compliant guardrail if none exists.
Identify the appropriate hooking point for fall protection.
Wear personal fall protection with the lanyard attached.
No employee shall stay within the vicinity of the fall hazard if not
wearing any kind of fall protection equipment.
If the access does not meet the criteria above, inform the
company.
The issue should be raised with your company who should inform
the customer and/or inspection body (if relevant) to help and find
an appropriate solution.
(13)
258 Issue 09/2015

Safety
WORK IN THE MACHINE ROOM CONTROL OF ELECTRICAL ENERGY

Risk of being electrocuted when:

Taking measurements on electrical equipment.
Replacing or repairing an electrical component or any equipment which can
be powered with 110V DC or 50V AC and more (controller, selector, machine,
main line switch, junction box, door lock).
Working in close proximity of the energized equipment.
Check if local regulation requires a mandatory certification for all

exposed employees!
PROTECTION MEANS
VITAL RULE :
ALWAYS lock out and tag out the equipment before
performing any work on the electrical equipment, except
when measuring values during fault finding.

Lift Equipment Protection:
Energized equipment is protected against accidental contact (IP2x).
Electric shock protection devices.

Insulated gloves.
Safety glasses to avoid flashover injuries if exposed to live
equipment.
Testing device or measurement device depending on local
constraint.
Locks and tools to prevent 3rd party putting the power back on.
Safe procedure:
Before working on the live equipment:
Switch off all the power sources of the unit (main power, car light, etc.).
Apply locks in order to prevent 3rd party switching the power back on.
Verify that the testing device/multi-meter is working properly on a
known source.
Verify that there is no power left on the equipment with the testing
device/multi-meter for every individual phase.
When replacing the main line switch: switch off, locked out and tagged
out the power of the lift at the main line switch of the building.
(14)
Safety
WORK IN THE MACHINE ROOM WORK ON ROTATING / MOVING EQUIPMENT

Risk of crushing or amputation when:

Working on moving equipment such as ropes, sheave,
selectors etc.
Working in close proximity of unprotected equipment.
PROTECTION MEANS
VITAL RULE:
performing any work on the moving/rotating equipment.
NEVER get in close proximity to unprotected moving/rotating

equipment.

No tie, scarf, loose clothing, etc. worn in proximity of moving
equipment.
Lift Equipment Protection Check that:

Sheave, ropes are protected by a guard covering the nip points.
Safe procedure:
Before working on the equipment:
Switch off the power of the unit.
Apply locks in order to prevent 3rd party switching the power
back and ensure the unit cant move.
If using the emergency rescue operation (ERO), ensure that no

one gets in close proximity.
(15)
260 Issue 09/2015

Safety
WORK IN THE MACHINE ROOM WORK ON THE BRAKE

CONTROL OF MECHANICAL ENERGY

When working on the brake, the movement of the

sheave is free and can lead to an uncontrolled movement
of the car.
PROTECTION MEANS
VITAL RULE:
ALWAYS check the brake condition.
ALWAYS check proper adherence of ropes into the sheaves.
ALWAYS secure the cam to prevent one to open the manual
landing door.

Example of a safe procedure
Before working on the brake:
Check the brake condition and adherence.
Secure the cam to prevent anyone opening the manual landing
door.
Land the counterweight on the buffer.
An additional precaution can be to block the sheave to prevent
uncontrolled movement.
On drum machine:
The car should be landed on its buffer or if slack rope, movement
shall be prevented by preventing the drum from moving.
(16)
Safety
WORK ON THE LANDING SERVICE & RENOVATION FALL PROTECTION

Risk of an employee or a member of the public falling through unguarded opening when the landing
door is open and the car is not behind.
PROTECTION MEANS
VITAL RULE:
ALWAYS protect the working area at landings.
ALWAYS inform the customer that the lift is not available.
ALWAYS verify that the landing doors are mechanically locked
when closing the landing doors and before leaving site.
NEVER leave the landing doors wide open when working in pit.
NEVER open wide the landing doors when the car is not behind.

Safe procedure:
When opening the landing doors:
Install protective barrier if possible.
Take a stable position to keep firm footing.
Preferably open the bottom floor landing doors.
Only open a few centimeters to prevent falling.
When working on the car from the landing:

Position the car so that it is comfortable to work.
Switch off the unit to prevent potential electrocution if wor-
king on electrical equipment (junction box, door operator).
When accessing the hoistway:

Position the car safely: no more than 50 cm from landing.
In case the car is stopped between floors (trapped passengers

or renovation):
Check the opening under the car.
Ensure the opening does not allow anyone to fall underneath.
(17)
262 Issue 09/2015

Safety
WORK ON THE LANDING WORK ON MOVING / ROTATING EQUIPMENT

Risk of crushing or amputation when working on moving

equipment such as the car door operator, landing door
panels or car doors.
PROTECTION MEANS
VITAL RULE:
performing any work on the moving/rotating equipment.
NEVER come in close proximity to unprotected moving/rotating

equipment.

Protective gloves
No tie, scarf, loose clothing etc. worn in proximity of moving/
rotating equipment.
Safe procedure:
Switch off the power of the unit if power is not needed.
When opening/closing the landing/car doors or manipulating the
car door operator, be aware of the kinetic energy to control the
movement and keep body parts away from nip points.
(18)
Safety
WORK ON THE LANDING NEW EQUIPMENT FALL PROTECTION

Risk of an employee or a worker of the construction site falling

through the unprotected hoistway opening.
PROTECTION MEANS
VITAL RULE:
ALWAYS ensure voids and openings are protected by suitable
guardrails in compliance with current standards.
Important! When the mechanic is working in the hoistway, protection

against falling objects must be in place (see p 27).

Hoistway protection:
Fixed guardrails to current standards shall be installed to protect lift
employees and other workers.

Effective barricade installed Fall protection equipment if a fall hazard exists.
in front of the hoistway to Suitable anchorage for lanyard at the hoistway opening.
prevent site workers and
employees falling in the Safe procedure:
hoistway In case a guardrail needs to be installed or if a ladder needs to be used
in the vicinity of the opening, a personal fall protection shall be used:
Install a specific hooking point for the lanyard at hoistway opening.
Tie off the body harness.
Protect the working area to prevent other workers falling into the
hoistway opening.
Before the work starts, the company should have a risk assessment
process to check that the hoistway conditions is as per the installation
requirements.
If the hoistway conditions are not met by the General Contractor, work
shall stop and company must be informed.
(19)
264 Issue 09/2015

Safety
ACCESS THE HOISTWAY ACCESS THE TOP OF THE CAR CONTROL OF THE ELEVATOR

Risk of being crushed in the hoistway when working on

the top of the car.
PROTECTION MEANS
VITAL RULE:
ALWAYS take control of the lift before accessing the hoistway
by switching off the power or activating STOP and
INSPECTION buttons after they have been checked separately.

Lift safety equipment:
free space or refuge or alternative means of safety distances.
STOP button.
Inspection switch.
Safe procedure:
Before accessing the top of the car:
Switch off the power of the unit and apply lock to prevent anyone
putting power back on, OR :
Send the car several floors below (minimum 2).
Open the hoistway door with the release key.
Check that the car stops when landing doors safety contact opens.
Stop the car no more than 50 cm above the floor to safely access.
Push the STOP button, close the doors, push the call buttons and
check that the car did not move.
Open the doors, push the INSPECTION button, release the STOP
button back to normal, close the doors, push the call buttons and
check that the car did not move.
Open the landing doors and push the STOP button back.
Assess other potential risks such as fall from the car top or
adjacent unit running in the same hoistway, etc.
This procedure may need to be customized depending upon the

technology.
(20)
Safety
ACCESS THE HOISTWAY ACCESS TO THE PIT CONTROL OF THE ELEVATOR

Risk of being crushed by the car or the counterweight when accessing and working in pit.
PROTECTION MEANS
VITAL RULE:
ALWAYS take control of the lift before accessing the hoistway
by switching off the power or activating STOP after it has been
checked.

Lift safety equipment Check presence of:
STOP button.
Pit ladder.
Safe procedure:
Before accessing the pit:
Enter the pit through the bottom landing door or access door
Switch off the power of the unit and apply lock to prevent anyone
to put power back.
OR :
Send the car to the top floor.
Open the hoistway door with the release key before the car arrives
at the floor.
Check that the car stops when landing doors safety contact opens.
Push the STOP button, close the landing doors and push the call
button to check if the STOP switch is effectively working.
Prevent the landing doors from closing completely (leave no more
than 15 cm opening) by using a door blocking device.
A screwdriver is not an appropriate tool.
If there is no pit STOP Switch: Switch off the power.
(21)
266 Issue 09/2015

Safety
WORK IN THE HOISTWAY TOP OF THE CAR / INSIDE THE CAR FALL PROTECTION

Risk of falling from the top of the car Risk of falling from inside the car when exposed to a
fall hazard
PROTECTION MEANS
VITAL RULE:
ALWAYS ensure voids and openings are protected by suitable
barriers in compliance with current standards.

Equipment on the car:
Fixed balustrade to current standards on car top, see page 8.

Fall arrest or fall restraint system.
Suitable anchorage for lanyard on the top of car.
Safe procedure:
Before accessing the car:
Check for balustrade.
If no balustrade or it is unsuitable, wear the appropriate fall
protection attached to suitable anchorage point.
ALWAYS attach the harness when on the top of car.

ALWAYS detach the harness before leaving the top of car.
(22)
Safety
WORK IN A HOISTWAY MOVING IN THE HOISTWAY CONTROL OF THE MECHANICAL ENERGY

Risk of being crushed by an equipment when Risk of being crushed on top of the hoistway
moving the car in the hoistway if insufficient space on the top
(counterweight, Bracket, etc.). of the hoistway.
PROTECTION MEANS
VITAL RULE:
NEVER ride the lift in normal speed.

NEVER ride the lift if there is no control (or inspection box).
EXAMPLE OF SPECIFIC PROTECTION MEANS :

Free space or refuge or alternative means of safety distances
(eg; above the top rail of the balustrade)
Control or inspection box.
Limit switch.
Inspection limit switch.
Safe procedure:
When riding the top of the car:
ALWAYS position yourself in the center of the car when riding.
ALWAYS activate the STOP button after a ride.
ALWAYS check the door lock when getting out at a different floor.
ALWAYS opt to ride down rather than up as it reduces the risk of
being hit by the counterweight or fixed equipment in the hoistway.
In renovation, if limit switches are not in place and a risk of crushing

exists if the space is not sufficient:
Install props under the counterweight with the right length to
allow space on the top of the hoistway.
(23)
268 Issue 09/2015

Safety
WORK IN A HOISTWAY ADJACENT UNITS CONTROL OF THE ELEVATOR

Risk of being crushed by an adjacent running unit or

any other equipment which may be moving
(adjacent counterweight etc.).
PROTECTION MEANS
VITAL RULE:
ALWAYS prevent the movement of the adjacent lift by
switching off its power or activating its STOP in pit or on
the top of the car.

Full screen is in place along the entire height of the hoistway
if distance with adjacent moving equipment is less than 50 cm
Screen in pit.
Safe procedure if no screen is in place and there is a risk of

having the body outside of the car contours:
Before accessing the top of the car or the pit:
The adjacent unit shall not move accidently:
Switch off the power of the adjacent unit and apply locks to
prevent anyone putting power back on.
OR :
Open the hoistway door with the release key.
Check that the car stops when landing doors safety contact
opens.
Push the STOP button and close the landing doors to check it is
working effectively.
(24)
Safety
WORK IN A HOISTWAY WORK ON THE HYDRAULIC LIFTS CONTROL OF MECHANICAL ENERGY

When working on the hydraulic system, on the pipe or cylinder,

the risk of having a free fall of the car is significant, potentially
resulting in crushing hazard if the employee is working in pit.
PROTECTION MEANS
VITAL RULE:
ALWAYS close the safety handle (if existing).
ALWAYS land the car on props or suspend the car with 2 safety
means when working on the hydraulic system.

Safety bracket that allow to mechanically secure the car.
Tools & equipment:

Slings or props in good condition and right weight capacity.
Prop of the right capacity
Safety brackets.
and installed under the car to
prevent from falling in pit in case
Safe procedure:
of a major hydraulic failure
Before working on the hydraulic system, mechanical energy shall
be secured:
Handle closed and removed
Close the safety handle (if existing).
Land the car on the brackets specially designed (if equipped).
OR
Install adequate capacity prop, secure it to prevent from falling.
Land the car on props from the machine room.
OR
Secure the car by 2 slings or hoisting devices.
Take any measure to avoid 3rd party putting the system back on
by:
Locking out and tagging out the unit.
Removing the handle off.
In case work in pit is long (for example, more than 15 min),

mechanical protection as described above is imperative.
(25)
270 Issue 09/2015

Safety
WORK IN A HOISTWAY WORK ON A LADDER FALL PROTECTION

Risk of fall from the ladder in case:

The ladder slips if not adequately secured.
The ladder is not in good condition.
The risk can occur typically when working on the top of the
counterweight or deflection sheave on top of the hoistway in
repair or renovation.
PROTECTION MEANS
Work on ladder is allowed only for very short period

of time. Otherwise, other means shall be identified
(platform, scaffold, etc).
Check local regulations!
VITAL RULE:
ALWAYS secure the ladder from bracing with cords or slings.
ALWAYS wear fall protection if a fall hazard exists and ALWAYS
when feet are above 2 m.

Tools & equipment:
Ladder in good condition.
Fall protection equipment.
Safe procedure:
Before working on the ladder:
Install a lifeline in the hoistway to prepare a proper hooking
point for the body harness.
Secure the ladder so that it will not move.
When working on the ladder:
Tie off the body harness to the lifeline.
(26)
Safety
WORK IN A HOISTWAY FALLING OBJECTS (RENOVATION & NEW EQUIPMENT) MECHANICAL ENERGY
Risk of injury by a falling object can occur when:

Working in the hoistway while an object falls through
unprotected holes in the hoistway.
Working in the hoistway while a colleague is working above in
the machine room or on the top of the car and drops a tool or
equipment.
Working in the hoistway while another colleague installs a lift in
the adjacent hoistway not being protected by a screen or other
means.
PROTECTION MEANS
VITAL RULE:
ALWAYS wear a safety helmet when working on
a construction site or whenever a risk of falling objects exists in
repair / renovation.
ALWAYS ensure that all holes into the hoistway are protected.
NEVER allow stacked work.
NEVER leave any tool or equipment on guide brackets or beams that
could ultimately fall down.

Safety helmet.
Safe procedure:
Before working in the hoistway:
Protect all holes by a fixed plate or guard.
Protect the hoistway opening by guardrail and a net covering the
entire opening.
Organize the activity in the hoistway or common hoistway to
eliminate stacked work.
When working in the hoistway:

Work from inside of the car as much as possible: any falling object
will be stopped by the top of the car or ceiling.
(27)
272 Issue 09/2015

Safety
WORK IN A HOISTWAY WORK ON ROPES (RENOVATION & NEW EQUIPMENT)

When working on the suspension system e.g. replacing ropes,

this can lead to :
Free fall of the car.
Free fall of the counterweight.
PROTECTION MEANS
VITAL RULE:
ALWAYS secure the car and the counterweight by
2 independent means when ropes are removed.
ALWAYS trigger the safeties.
NEVER remove more than 50% of the ropes, if possible.

Tools & equipment:
Slings in good condition and adequate weight capacity.
Props in good condition and adequate weight capacity.
Lift equipment:
Safeties are triggered: governor and car is blocked.
Safe procedure:
Car secured by 2 slings and Before removing the ropes:
counterweight secured on props Position the car at the proper height.
Position the car on the safeties.
Secure the car by 2 independent means: 2 slings or hoisting
devices. If one fails, the system will be secured by the other one.
Install props under the counterweight.
Secure the props from falling (onto the guide for example).
Car secured by 2 independent

slings attached to rail graber
(28)
Safety
CONTROL OF HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES HOISTING AND RIGGING ACTIVITIES

Risk of falling equipment if

hoisting practice is inadequate:
Car or counterweight insufficiently
secured.
Damaged sling or hoisting equipment.
Risk of fall with the car if rigging practice

is inadequate:
Gravity center insufficiently identified.
PROTECTION MEANS
VITAL RULE:
ALWAYS ensure that the hoisting and rigging equipment
is formally verified as per the local laws, are in good
condition and properly rated for the load to be lifted and
suspended.
ALWAYS protect slings from sharp edges with packing.
NEVER walk / stand under suspended load.
NEVER used, damaged or unknown capacity equipment.

Tools & equipment:
Certified hoisting tools: slings, shackles, hooking points shall be
rated for the maximum load and in good conditions.
Certified hoisting device, rated for the maximum load:
To hoist material only (chain hoist).
To hoist material and employee (e.g. Tirak).
Safe procedure:
Before lifting or rigging:
Check the weight of the equipment.
Use the right hooking point, shackle, sling and hoisting
equipment accordingly.
Test the hooking point with specific equipment: it is usually the
one that fails first .
When lifting equipment (machine, controller etc):

Identify the center of gravity to minimize unexpected swinging.
NEVER hold the equipment with the hand: it can be crushed.
Use a cord to control the movement.
(29)
274 Issue 09/2015

Safety
CONTROL OF HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES SCAFFOLD

Risk of fall from the scaffold.
Risk of falling with the scaffold if inadequately built.
Check if certification is required by law for scaffold and

scaffolder.
PROTECTION MEANS
VITAL RULE:
ALWAYS ensure it has been built and checked by
an authorized person.
NEVER remove any barrier or planking.
NEVER use an incomplete scaffold.
ALWAYS respect the maximum capacity and check if it is visibly
displayed.
ALWAYS ensure inspection by an authorized person.

Tools & equipment:
Certified scaffold.
Safe procedure:
Check that the scaffold is secured to the structure.
Ensure that there is safe access to the scaffold with a fixed ladder.
Ensure that the platform is in good condition, guardrails are in
place.
NEVER climb onto the guardrails.
Any defect shall be raised with the company and the scaffold shall
not be used.
Note:
Even if the primary protection mean relies on the properly built car
platform, it is recommended to wear a body harness and be tied off
to a life line suspended in the hoistway.
(30)
Safety
CONTROL OF HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES TEMPORARY FIXED WORKING PLATFORM

Risk of fall from a temporary fixed working platform

Risk of falling with the temporary fixed working platform if inadequately built or inadequate guardrails
Check if certification is required by law for platform and platform installer!
PROTECTION MEANS
VITAL RULE:
ALWAYS ensure it has been built and checked by
an authorized person.
NEVER remove any barrier or planking.
NEVER use an incomplete working platform.
ALWAYS respect the maximum capacity and check if it is visibly
displayed.
ALWAYS ensure a safe fixed mean of access to the platform.
Safe and robust platform
with guardrails protecting
from falling
Tools & equipment:
Certified working platform.
Certified shoe, adequately calibrated to capacity of the platform.
High quality materials.
Safe procedure:
Check that the temporary fixed working platform is robust.
ALWAYS respect the maximum capacity.
Ensure that there is safe access with a fixed ladder.
NEVER climb onto the guardrails.
Safe metal working platform
ALWAYS wear a body harness attached to a life line to prevent
falls in case the platform collapses.
Any defect shall be raised with the company
Note:
Even if the primary protection mean relies on the properly built car
platform, it is highly recommended to wear the body harness and
be tied off to a life line suspended in the hoistway.
(31)
276 Issue 09/2015

Safety
WORK IN A HOISTWAY CAR USED AS A TEMPORARY MOVING PLATFORM (RENOVATION & NEW EQUIPMENT)

Risk of fall from the moving platform.
Risk of fall with the car if inadequately built.
PROTECTION MEANS
VITAL RULE:
ALWAYS ensure that 2 independent safeties are in place:
Ropes and governor.
Or ropes and additional safety.
Or special hoisting device authorized to lift persons and an
additional safety device.

Tools & equipment:
Certified safeties (governor or additional safety).
Car connected to the ropes Certified hoisting device in good condition and right capacity.
and governor in place Certified hooking points with the right capacity.
Safe procedure:
ALWAYS respect the maximum capacity.
ALWAYS install the governor and the ropes as soon as possible
and/or as per the installation method.
ALWAYS use proper hoisting equipment.
ALWAYS install the appropriate balustrade on top of the car.
Note:
Even if the primary protection means relies on the properly built
car platform, it is highly recommended to wear fall protection
tied off to a life line suspended in the hoistway.
It is recommended to have an audio visual system fixed under

the car to inform other mechanics of the movement of the car
when doors safeties are disabled.
(32)
Safety
CONTROL OF HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES DEFEATING A SAFETY CIRCUIT

Risk of being crushed when accessing/working/egressing

the hoistway.
Similar risks exist for members of the public in the situation that
the landing door safety has been disabled.
PROTECTION MEANS
VITAL RULE:
Defeating a circuit shall be the last option when no other
alternatives exist: NEVER defeat a circuit for a long period.
NEVER leave a shunt (shorting wire) in place when leaving the site.
NEVER install a shunt in any hoistway equipment (lock, car lock,

emergency stop etc): it is not visible and may be forgotten.

Tools & equipment:
Company approved shunts, 1 m long coloured cables to make it
visible.
Safe procedure:
Before installing a shunt:
Remove the lift from normal operation.
Identify precisely the circuit to be defeated with the electrical
diagram
If there is no other alternative method than shorting it, conduct
a risk
assessment.
ALWAYS use 1 m long coloured cable, properly authorized.
ALWAYS check the electrical diagram to be sure to place the
shunt on the right circuit.
NEVER short the entire safety chain.
Install the shunt when the power is off to prevent electrocution.
If riding in the hoistway is necessary:
ALWAYS test STOP and INSPECTION before shunt is placed!
Before leaving the site:
ALWAYS check all the safeties after having removed the shunt.
(33)
278 Issue 09/2015

Safety
CONTROL OF HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES ASBESTOS

Asbestos in brakes risk of severe health Asbestos on hoistway walls risk of severe
effects if brake lining are removed health effects if put in contact or removed
without precautions. without precautions.
PROTECTION MEANS
VITAL RULE:
NEVER touch materials in the machine room

or hoistway.
NEVER work on equipment that contains asbestos

without having the proper training and protective
equipment.
ALWAYS be alert for different asbestos containing

materials.
Review the local regulation to identify mandatory

training, safety protective tools and equipment!
Safe procedure:
The company must ask the customer for the record of
asbestos before commencing work.
If asbestos has to be removed to perform maintenance,

repair or modernization/replacement, it has to be
done by a specialized company or by specially certified
mechanics.
(34)
Safety
FReqUeNT aCCIDeNTs PReveNTION
Hopefully, fatal and serious accidents represent a minor proportion of the accidents
reported by the companies.
This chapter aims to present the risks that are the source of the most frequent
accidents which occur. These accidents are, most of the time, not specific to lift
work.
Although not usually fatal they can still lead to painful injuries.
Consequently, these risks must not be neglected and appropriate measures as

suggested in the examples shall be taken. Again, this list is not exhaustive and it is the
responsibility of every company and employee to conduct a proper risk assessment
and to comply with the communicated rules.
(35)
280 Issue 09/2015

Safety
ACCESS THE HOISTWAY ACCESS TO THE PIT

Risk of falling, slipping when accessing or egressing the pit if:

There is no ladder for pit > 1 m.
Ladder is not adequate.
Ladder is not used.
Floor is slippery.
PROTECTION MEANS

Pit ladder.
Pit ladder is within reach from the landing.
Pit ladder is secured and safe.
Safe procedure:
Before accessing the pit:
Check the position and condition of the ladder if any.
Block the door with the door blocking device in order to prevent the
door from closing.
Ensure that the STOP button is working properly (see p. 20) and is
activated.
In a safe and stable position, reach for the ladder.
When egressing the pit:

Keep the STOP button activated.
Take the ladder and climb up safely.
Once safe on the landing, release the STOP.
Close the landing doors and verify these are mechanically closed.
Keep 3 points of contact on the ladder
Use the pit ladder or a portable ladder. NEVER jump in pit!
If the pit ladder is unsafe, it should be raised with your company who
should inform the customer and/or inspection body (if relevant) to help
and find an appropriate solution.
(36)
Safety
SLIP, TRIP, FALL

Risk of falling on stairs when there is poor lighting Risk of falling when the ground is wet,
or stairs are in poor condition uneven, with a small step etc
These accidents are some of the most frequent!
PROTECTION MEANS

Protective Personal Equipment:
Anti-slip shoes.
Shoes with a heel to give a better grip on ladder.
Safe procedure:
ALWAYS keep a firm footing.
ALWAYS watch for wet floor, slippery floor, icy conditions
ALWAYS be aware of the time switch.
ALWAYS use the handrail when going down the stairs, or
keep points of contact where there is none (use the wall as
a support).
NEVER rush, particularly down the stairs.
NEVER use your mobile when walking or climbing down stairs.
(37)
282 Issue 09/2015

Safety
SAFE USE OF HAND TOOLS

Risk of slipping of tools if the spanner, screwdriver or bolt is in poor condition.
PROTECTION MEANS

Tools and protective equipment:
CE-marked and authorized by the company.
Hammer in good condition, fixed head with sound handle.
Spanners in good condition, not burred or splayed.
Screwdrivers with good insulation, not broken or worn.
Safe procedure:
ALWAYS check the equipment is in good condition before use.
ALWAYS wear cut protective gloves.
ALWAYS use the appropriate equipment (an adjustable wrench
is less safe than a spanner which is less safe than a hex key).
NEVER use an electricians screwdriver for mechanical work.
NEVER use damaged tools.
ALWAYS use the correct sized tool for the job.
(38)
Safety
SAFE USE OF ELECTRICAL PORTABLE TOOLS

Risk of dust in the eye, risk of cuts, laceration, Risk of cuts, laceration when using cutting tools.
flying particles and fire.
PROTECTION MEANS

CE-marked and authorized by the company.
Glasses and protective gloves.
Tool (vice-grip) to maintain the piece firmly in place.
Grinder and drill equipped with a handle to get a firm grip.
Safe procedure:
ALWAYS check the good condition of the equipment before
use (overall condition, cable is not damaged, protection in
place).
ALWAYS use the drill and grinder with 2 hands.
ALWAYS wear glasses and gloves when drilling, grinding.
ALWAYS check that the grinder disk is within the limit date
of use.
ALWAYS have a hot work permit if required.
NEVER use damaged tools.
NEVER hold the piece with the hand when drilling or
grinding: secure it firmly in place with the correct tool.
NEVER cut upwards with angle grinder.
Ear protection should be used when drilling or grinding.
(39)
284 Issue 09/2015

Safety
SAFE USE OF CHEMICALS

Risk of loss of conscious, disease or health issues Risk of explosion if flammable product is used
in case of use of dangerous products. in close proximity to hot work or lit cigarettes.
PROTECTION MEANS
Selection of the product:

Only use the chemicals approved by the company: usually,
poisonous or toxic products are not necessary in lift industry.
NEVER buy products not approved by the company.
ALWAYS check the Material Safety Data Sheet which describes
the potential dangers & safety precautions to take for each
product.

Gloves and glasses if a risk of splashing exists.
Suitable Respiratory Protective Equipment.
Safe procedure:
ALWAYS wear gloves to avoid product penetration through the
skin.
ALWAYS use small quantities in non-ventilated areas (pit).
ALWAYS put the cap back on after use.
NEVER smoke, grind or weld in close proximity to flammable
product.
NEVER transfer a chemical product into an unidentified can.
Read and follow the precautions for use as written on the
container.
NEVER store volatile chemicals / aerosols in non-ventilated
areas (pit)
(40)
Safety
MANUAL HANDLING
Risk of back injuries when lifting equipment.
Risk of cuts, laceration if the load falls down.
Risk of falls or slips when handling the equipment.
PROTECTION MEANS

Protective gloves.
Handling equipment if the load is heavy (as defined in the risk
assessment or as per the regulation).
Safe procedure:
ALWAYS keep the back straight and use the legs to lift the load.
ALWAYS place the hands so that they dont get crushed.
ALWAYS scan the route to identify possible risks of fall and slip.
(41)
286 Issue 09/2015

Safety
Other risks that have not been developed in the present booklet but which can
however be relevant:

Risk of a fire.
Risk related to welding activities.
Risk related to the specificity of the site (nuclear plant, chemical plant, explosive
atmosphere etc).
Risks related to the use of vehicles.

(42)
Basic safety practices for lifts Safety
This document was prepared by experts of the Education

& Training Committee and Quality, Safety, Environment
and Education Committee of the European Lift Association
It is illustrated by drawings which are available free of charge

in high and low resolution on the ELA website at
www.ela-aisbl.org
Make the fullest possible

use of this brochure and drawings
European Lift Association

44 Avenue Herrmann-Debroux, box 1, B-1160 Brussels
Tel.: +32 (0) 2 779 50 82 Fax: +32 (0)2 772 16 85
288 Issue 09/2015

Mai 2015 Juni 2015 Juli 2015 August 2015 Calendar
KW MO DI MI DO FR SA SO KW MO DI MI DO FR SA SO KW MO DI MI DO FR SA SO KW MO DI MI DO FR SA SO
With us you can plan

18 1 2 3 23 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 27 1 2 3 4 5 31 1 2
19 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 24 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 28 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 32 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
20 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 25 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 29 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 33 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
21 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 26 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 30 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 34 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
22 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 27 29 30 31 27 28 29 30 31 35 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
36 31
September 2015 Oktober 2015 November 2015 Dezember 2015
Calendar
KW MO DI MI DO FR SA SO KW MO DI MI DO FR SA SO KW MO DI MI DO FR SA SO KW MO DI MI DO FR SA SO
Kalender 2016 mit Feiertagen, Schulferien und KW Seite 1 von 1
36 1 2 3 4 5 6 40 1 2 3 4 44 1 49 1 2 3 4 5 6
37 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 41 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 45 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 50 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
38 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 42 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 46 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 51 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
39 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 43 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 47 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 52 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
40 28 29 30 44 26 27 28 29 30 31 48 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 53 28 29 30 31
Kalender492016
30
January 2016 February 2016 March 2016 April 2016
CW MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT SUN
Gesetzliche Feiertage im Kalender 2015
CW MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT SUN CW MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT SUN CW MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT SUN
Donnerstag 1.1.2015 Neujahrstag bundesweiter Feiertag
53 1 2 3 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 13 1 2 3
Dienstag 6.1.2015 Heilige Drei Knige nur in Baden-Wrttemberg, Bayern, Sachsen-Anhalt
1 4 5 3.4.2015
Freitag 9 10
6 7 8Karfreitag 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Feiertag
bundesweiter 10 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
2
Sonntag11 12 14 15 16 17
5.4.2015 Ostersonntag7 15 16 17
13 18 19 20 21
nur in Brandenburg 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 15 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
11
3
Montag18 19 20 21 22
6.4.2015 23 24
Ostermontag 8 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 Feiertag
bundesweiter 12 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 16 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Freitag
4 25 26 1.5.2015
27 28 29 1. 30
Mai31/ Tag 9
der29
Arbeit bundesweiter Feiertag
13 28 29 30 31 17 25 26 27 28 29 30
Donnerstag 14.5.2015
May 2016 Christi Himmelfahrt bundesweiter Feiertag
July2016 August 2016
June 2016
Sonntag 24.5.2015 Pfingstsonntag nur in Brandenburg
CW MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT SUN CW MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT SUN CW MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT SUN CW MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT SUN
Montag 25.5.2015 Pfingstmontag bundesweiter Feiertag
17 1 22 1 2 3 4 5 26 1 2 3 31 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Donnerstag 4.6.2015 Fronleichnam nur in Baden-Wrttemberg, Bayern, Hessen, NRW, Rheinland-Pfalz, Saarland
18 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 23 6 7 8 11 12 in27
9 10 regional
sowie 6 7 8 9 10 32 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
4 5 Thringen
Sachsen,
Samstag
19 9 10 8.8.2015
11 12 13 Friedensfest
14 15 24 13 14 15 16 nur17
in Augsburg
18 19 28 (Bayern)
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 33 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Samstag 15.8.2015 Mari Himmelfahrt nur im Saarland
20 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 25 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 29 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 34 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
sowie regional in Bayern
21 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 26 27 28 29 30 30 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 35 29 30 31
Samstag 3.10.2015 Tag der Deutschen Einheit bundesweiter Feiertag
22 30 31
Samstag 31.10.2015 Reformationstag nur in Brandenburg, Mecklenburg-Vorpommern, Sachsen, Sachsen-Anhalt,
September 2016 October 2016Thringen November 2016 December 2016
Sonntag 1.11.2015 Allerheiligen nur in Baden-Wrttemberg, Bayern, NRW, Rheinland-Pfalz, Saarland
CW MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT SUN CW MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT SUN CW MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT SUN CW MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT SUN
Mittwoch 18.11.2015 Bu- und Bettag nur in Sachsen
35 1 2 3 4 39 1 2 44 1 2 3 4 5 6 48 1 2 3 4
Freitag 25.12.2015 1. Weihnachtstag bundesweiter Feiertag
36 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 40 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 45 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 49 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Samstag 26.12.2015 2. Weihnachtstag bundesweiter Feiertag
37 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 41 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 46 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 50 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
8. September
38 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 422015
17 von http://www.schnelle-online.info/Kalender.html,
18 19 20 21 22 23 47 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 ohne
51Gewhr
19 20 21 22 23 24 25
39 26 27 28 29 30 43 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 48 28 29 30 52 26 27 28 29 30 31
44 31
Holiday: Gesetzliche
BW BY1) BE BB HB HH HE MV NI NW Feiertage
RP SL SN ST SH TH im Germany:
School holidays Kalender 2016
Freitag
Neujahrstag
x
1.1.2016
x x x
Neujahrstag
x x x x x x x x x
bundesweiterSchool
x x x
Feiertagyear 2015/2016 School year 2016/2017
(01.01.)
Mittwoch
Hl. Drei Knige 6.1.2016 Heilige Drei Knige nur in Baden-Wrttemberg,
Winter Easter Bayern,Pentecost
Sachsen-Anhalt Summer Autumn Christmas
x x x
(06.01.)
Freitag 25.3.2016 Karfreitag bundesweiter
BW - Feiertag 24.03. / 29.03. - 02.04. * 17.05. - 28.05. 28.07. - 10.09. 02.11. - 04.11. * 23.12. - 07.01.
Karfreitag x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
Sonntag 27.3.2016 Ostersonntag * BY 08.02. - 12.02. * 21.03. - 01.04. 17.05. - 28.05. 30.07. - 12.09. 31.10. - 04.11. 24.12. - 05.01.
Ostermontag x x x x x x x x x x x x x x nur
x in
x Brandenburg
BE 01.02. - 06.02. 21.03. - 02.04. 06.05. / 17.05. / 18.05. * 21.07. - 02.09. 17.10. - 28.10. 23.12. - 03.01.
1-May
Montag x x x x
28.3.2016 x x x x x x x x x
Ostermontag x bundesweiter
x x Feiertag
BB 01.02. - 06.02. 23.03. - 02.04. 06.05. / 17.05. * 21.07. - 03.09. 17.10. - 28.10. 23.12. - 03.01.
Christi Himmelfahrt x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
Sonntag 1.5.2016 1.x Mai HB 28.01. - 29.01. 18.03. - 02.04. 06.05. / 17.05. * 23.06. - 03.08. 04.10. - 15.10. 21.12. - 06.01.
Pfingstmontag x x x x x /x Tag
x xder
x Arbeit
x x x bundesweiter
x x x Feiertag
HH 29.01. 07.03. - 18.03. 06.05. / 17.05. - 20.05. 21.07. - 31.08. 17.10. - 28.10. 27.12. - 06.01.
Donnerstag
Fronleichnam x 5.5.2016
x Christi xHimmelfahrt
x x x 2) bundesweiter
3)
HE - Feiertag 29.03. - 09.04. - 18.07. - 26.08. 17.10. - 29.10. 22.12. - 07.01.
Mari Himmelfahrt
Sonntag k
15.5.2016 Pfingstsonntag x MV 01.02. - 13.02. 21.03. - 30.03.
nur in Brandenburg 14.05. - 17.05. 25.07. - 03.09. 24.10. - 28.10. 22.12. - 02.01.
(15.08.)
Tag der dt. Einheit NI 28.01. - 29.01. 18.03. - 02.04. 06.05. / 17.05. 23.06. - 03.08. * 04.10. - 15.10. 21.12. - 06.01.
Montag
(03.10.)
16.5.2016
x x x x Pfingstmontag
x x x x x x x x x x bundesweiter
x x
NW -
Feiertag 21.03. - 02.04. 17.05. 11.07. - 23.08. 10.10. - 21.10. 23.12. - 06.01.
Donnerstag
Reformationstag 26.5.2016x Fronleichnam
x x x nur in
x Baden-Wrttemberg,
RP - Bayern,- Hessen, NRW,
18.03. - 01.04. 18.07.Rheinland-Pfalz, Saarland
- 26.08. 10.10. - 21.10. 22.12. - 06.01.
(31.10.)
SL 08.02.
sowie regional in- 13.02.
Sachsen, Thringen
29.03. - 09.04. - 18.07. - 27.08. 10.10. - 22.10. 19.12. - 31.12.
Allerheiligen
x x x x x ST 08.02. - 20.02. 25.03. - 02.04. 06.05. * 27.06. - 05.08. 03.10. - 15.10. 23.12. - 02.01.
Montag
(01.11.) 8.8.2016 Friedensfest nur in Augsburg (Bayern)
Bu- u. Bettag x SA 01.02. - 10.02. 24.03. 06.05. - 14.05. 27.06. - 10.08. 04.10. - 15.10. 19.12. - 02.01.
Montag
1.u. 2. Weihnachts- 15.8.2016 Mari Himmelfahrt nur im Saarland
SH - 24.03. - 09.04. 06.05. 25.07. - 03.09. * 17.10. - 29.10. 23.12. - 06.01.
x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
tag (25./26.12.) sowie regional
TH 01.02.in- 06.02.
Bayern 24.03. - 02.04. 06.05. 27.06. - 10.08. 10.10. - 22.10. 23.12. - 31.12.
Montag 3.10.2016 Tag der Deutschen Einheit bundesweiter Feiertag
x means public holiday
Montag
k means 31.10.2016
public holiday Reformationstag
in municipalities with a predominantly Catholic population.nur in Brandenburg, Mecklenburg-Vorpommern, Sachsen, Sachsen-Anhalt,
Thringen
http://www.schnelle-online.info/Kalender.html?bundesland=-1&jahr=2015&schulferi... 08.09.2015
Dienstag 1.11.2016 Allerheiligen nur in Baden-Wrttemberg, Bayern, NRW, Rheinland-Pfalz, Saarland
Mittwoch 16.11.2016 Bu- und Bettag nur in Sachsen
Sonntag 25.12.2016 1. Weihnachtstag bundesweiter Feiertag
Montag 26.12.2016 2. Weihnachtstag bundesweiter Feiertag
8. September 2015 von http://www.schnelle-online.info/Kalender.html, ohne Gewhr

Standards and Guidelines
Standards and Guidelines:

Legal requirements both at the European and national level constitute the framework for design, manufacture, dis-
tribution and operation of lifts. The corresponding standards and guidelines describe the technical demands on the
products.
The new standards take the expanded safety requirements into account, which underlie the current state of the art.
EN 81-20 for passenger and freight lifts under the Lift Directive includes guidelines on the design for rope and hyd-
raulic lifts and describes the conditions that have to be met during the installation of lifts.
EN 81-50 lays down the calculations and tests that have to be conducted for components and systems.
The current major changes are dominated by the new Lift Regulation AR 2014/33/EU and EN 81-20/-50. The transiti-
onal periods are presented in the illustration below.
EN 81-20 + EN 81-50
Transitional period in combination with old / new Elevator Directive
12.12.2014 20.04.2016 31.08.2017
EN 81-1/2
EN 81-20/-50
AR 95/16/EG
AR 2014/33/EU
The entire guideline family of the EN81- series is affected by the changes in the new EN 81-20/-50, which replace the
previous EN 81-1 and EN 81-2. Consequently the individual standards will also be revised in the years to come
290 Issue 09/2015

Standards and Guidelines:

EN 81
Familie
EN 81-1X EN 81-2X EN 81-3X EN 81-4X EN 81-5X EN 81-6X EN 81-7X EN 81-8X

Sonderaufzge
Grundlagen Aufzge f. den Aufzge fr den fr Personen- Prfungen Dokumentation Sonder- Bestehende
+ Personen- u. Lastentransport und fr Aufzge anwendungen Aufzge
Interpretationen Lastentransport Lastentransport
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
System der Personen- Kleingter- Treppenlifte u. Baumuster- Wartungs- und Anforderung an Sicherheits-
Normenfamilie aufzge aufzge Schrgaufzge prfungen Bedienungsanl Aufzge f. anpassung
f. Behinderte Sicherheitsbau eitungen Personen mit bestehender
Seil 31 -teile Behinderungen Aufzge
11
Definitionen Betretbare 41
Hydraulik
Gteraufzge Vertikale 81
Plattform- 61 71 Moderni-
etc.
aufzge 51 Wartungs- und Vandalen- sierung
12 Baumuster- Bedienungs. resistente bestehender
21 Aufzge
Methoden fr prfungen Lastenaufzge Aufzge
Neuaufzge in
Risiko- 43 Aufzge
bestehenden
beurteilung Aufzge fr
Gebuden Arbeitspltze 72
58 Feuerwehr- 82
Brand- 68 aufzge Verbesserung
22 schutztren Fern- der Zugng-
Schrgaufzge berwachung lichkeit besteh
fr Personen-
73 ender Aufzge
transport Verhalten von
Aufzgen im 83
28 Brandfall Verbesserung
Fern-Notruf- der
System Schutzmass-
nahmen
76 gegen
Evakuierungs- mutwillige
aufzge fr Zerstrung
Pers. mit bestehender
Aufzge
Behinderungen
77
Aufzge in
Erdbeben-
gebieten
Important notes on the application of the guidelines and standards

Lift planning must take the transitional periods for the application of the new standards and reference dates for dis-
tribution under the new Lift Directive into account to ensure that no retrofitting is needed in the event of any building
site date postponements.
All current type approval certificates for safety components will also retain their validity under the new Lift Directive;
they only need to be documented with a new conformity declaration under the new lift guidelines.
Under the new Lift Directive protection against unintended car movement (UCM) becomes a safety component in
accordance with 2014/33/EU. This does not have to be provided by a tested complete system; it can as before be
the result of individual type tested components.
The enhanced requirements for protected areas and crushing distances must be observed during lift planning.
The strength requirements for doors and cars have been increased.
If you have any questions on interpreting the standards, there is a hotline at the DAfA. The queries are answered
by experts and are generally accessible via the VDMA homepage.
Own Notes
Own Notes
Own Notes
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
292 Issue 09/2015

Own Notes
Own Notes
Own Notes
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
LiftEquip TEAM
The TEAM of LiftEquip
Managing Director Order management E-Mail: ordermanagement@liftequip.de

LiftEquip TEAM
Thorsten Elssser Matthias Bayha Inge Arold
Managing Director Head of Order Order Management

Management
T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2928 T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2962 T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2998

M: + 49 (0) 173 / 752 3037 M: + 49 (0) 172 / 745 6004 inge.arold@liftequip.de
thorsten.elsaesser@ matthias.bayha@
liftequip.de liftequip.de
Support E-Mail: produktservice@liftequip.de

Volker Lenzner Norbert Blum Anita Rank
Head of Product Service Sales Support

Product Service
T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2967 T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2473 T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2294

M: + 49 (0) 172 / 735 1166 M: + 49 (0) 173 / 709 1440 M: + 49 (0) 172 / 739 4988
volker.lenzner@liftequip.de norbert.blum@liftequip.de anita.rank@liftequip.de
Sales D-A-CH E-Mail: vertrieb@liftequip.de

Markus Bruckmeyer Thomas Bzner Jochen Bhmler
Head of Sales D-A-CH Sales D-A-CH Sales D-A-CH
T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2935 T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2986 T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2987

M: + 49 (0) 173 / 709 1426 M: +49 (0) 172 / 735 0058 M: + 49 (0) 172 / 735 2040
markus.bruckmeyer@ thomas.baezner@ jochen.boehmler@
liftequip.de liftequip.de liftequip.de
Sales Export E-Mail: salesexport@liftequip.de

Gnter Stoll Ewelina Czarnik Maria Kairidou
Head of Sales Sales Export Sales Export

Export
T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2969 T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2968 T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2964

M: + 49 (0) 172 / 735 1839 M: + 49 (0) 172 / 735 1699 M: + 49 (0) 172 / 739 4100
guenter.stoll@liftequip.de ewelina.czarnik@ maria.kairidou@
294 Issue 09/2015

LiftEquip TEAM
We're here for you
Order management E-Mail: ordermanagement@liftequip.de
LiftEquip TEAM
Samira Jnger Nida Koyuncu
Order Management Order Management
T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2782 T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2963

M: + 49 (0) 173 / 709 1080 M: + 49 (0) 172 / 218 2946
samira.juenger@ nida.koyuncu@liftequip.de
liftequip.de
E-Mail: claim@liftequip.de E-Mail: termine@liftequip.de

Frank Jobst Thomas Oelschlgel Jochen Digel
Quality Management Scheduling Hotline

Frequency Inverter
T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2940 T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2071 M: + 49 (0) 172 / 735 2020
M: + 49 (0) 172 / 739 4987 M: + 49 (0) 173 / 709 1436
frank.jobst@liftequip.de thomas.oelschlaegel@
liftequip.de
Sales D-A-CH E-Mail: vertrieb@liftequip.de

Volker Hermenau Thomas Schmid Rana Recber
Sales D-A-CH Sales D-A-CH Sales
T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2975 T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2970 T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2893

M: + 49 (0) 172 / 739 4090 M: + 49 (0) 172 / 735 1005 rana.recber@
volker.hermenau@ thomas.schmid@ liftequip.de
Sales Export E-Mail: salesexport@liftequip.de

Patrick Schoch Waldemar Tabakow Julian Wirtl
Sales Export Key Account Manager Trainee
T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2966 T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-3063 T: + 49 (0) 7158 / 12-2964

M: + 49 (0) 172 / 739 3838 M: + 49 (0) 173 / 709 1083 M: + 49 (0) 173 / 675 4018
patrick.schoch@ waldemar.tabakow@ julian.wirtl@liftequip.de
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
LiftEquip GmbH Elevator Components

2
Bernhaeuser Strae 45
D-73765 Neuhausen a.d.F.
Tel.: +49 (0) 71 58 12 - 2929
1
Fax: +49 (0) 71 58 12 - 2971

More than you expect ...
E-Mail: kontakt@liftequip.de
0
Internet: www.liftequip.com
2.1 Drive Units
Inquiry/Order
Customer Inquiry To
Order ____________________________
Company LiftEquip GmbH Elevator Components
Contact person
Phone +49 (7158) 12-2929
Fax +49 (7158) 12-2971
Date
Machine type Gear Gearless

Controller type Frequency regulated 2-speed
VVVF inverter MFC 20/21 MFC 30/31
MFR Others
Suspension r 1:1 2:1 3:1 4:1
Rated load Q [kg]
___________
___________
Car weight [kg]
incl. Car sling ___________
Counterweight [kg]
___________
Travel height [m]
___________
Compensation rope / chain Yes No
Machine located Above (MR) Above beside Above (HR)
Below (MR) Below beside Below (SP)
Machine type Gear TW 45 C TW 63 B TW 130
TW 160 W 263 C W 332 C
Gearless PMC 145-2 DAF 210 SC 300
PMC 170 DAF 270 SC 400
Documentation German English French* Russian**
Notes:

2.1 Drive Units
Inquiry/Order
Motor direction Horizontal Vertical

Machine in version Left Right
Protection class in machine room IP21 IP54 EX
Traction sheave diameter [mm] _____________
Wrap angle _____________
Groove type of traction sheave V-groove Seat groove round-groove***
Rope type Warrington 8x19 Drako 250 T Drako 300 T
PAWO _________
Rope diameter [mm] 6 8 10 13 16
_________
Number of ropes ___________ 2 up to 10
Groove clearance ___________ mm
Power supply [V] 400 ___________
Frequency of the mains [Hz] 50 ___________
Encoder 4096 1024 2048***
Encoder protocol EnDat Biss-C SSI
Power supply of encoder TTL HTL Sinus***
Special versions Brake monitoring (SA 3)
Traction sheave in shaft (SA 9)
Oil drain at side (SA 11)
Partial explosion (SA 4)
_________
Emergency braking system NBS No Yes NBS power pack
NBS switchbox
EN81-A3
Surface colour (drive) Standard primed RAL 7021
Special colour RAL ___________
Machine base frame (RAL 7005) With roller bearing
distance between ropes ______________ mm
Without roller bearing (flat frame)
With isolation
Notes:
*(Machine TW45C, TW63B, TW 130, TW160, DAF 210, DAF 270, SC300, NBS)
**(Machine TW45C, TW63B, TW 130, TW160, DAF 210, DAF 270, SC300, SC400)
***( only gearless drives possible)

2.1 Drive Units
Drive with drum
Inquiry/Order
Customer Inquiry To
Order ____________________________
Contact person
Phone +49 (7158) 12-2929
Fax +49 (7158) 12-2971
Date
Machine type Gear with drum

Controller type Frequency regulated
VVVF inverter MFC 20/21 MFC 30/31 Others
Rated load Q [kg]
___________
Rated speed vN [m/s] 0,3 m/s 0,5 m/s 0,63 m/s _____ m/s
Car weight [kg]
incl. Car sling ___________
Counterweight [kg]
___________
Travel height [m]
___________
Machine located Above Above beside
Below Below beside
Machine type Gear TW 45 C TW 63 TW 130
TW 160 W 263 C W 332 C

2.1 Drive Units
Drive with drum
Inquiry/Order
Documentation German English French* Russian**

Motor direction Horizontal Vertical
Machine in version Left Right
Protection class in machine room IP21 IP54 EX
Drum diameter 360 450 520 ________
_________
Power supply [V] 400 ___________
Frequency of the mains [Hz] 50 ___________
Encoder 4096 1024
Power supply of encoder TTL HTL
Special versions Brake monitoring (SA 3)
Oil drain at side (SA 11)
_________
Surface colour (drive) Standard primed RAL 7031 (Gear)
Standard primed RAL 9005 (Gearless)
Special colour RAL ___________
Emergency braking system NBS No Yes NBS power pack
NBS switchbox
EN81-A3
Notes:
*(Machine TW45C, TW63, TW 130, TW160)

**(Machine TW45C, TW63, TW 130, TW160)

5.2 ModKit MO61
Enquiry/Order
Customer Enquiry To
Order ______________________________
Contact person
Phone +49 (7158) 12-2929
Fax +49 (7158) 12-2971
Date
1:1
2:1
ModKit MO61 (D4)
Data:
Rated load Q [kg]

Car weight* [kg]
Headroom SK [mm]
Travel height FH [m]
Mass GGH [mm]
Ceiling thickness s [mm]
Traction sheave height n [mm]
Pulley distance Y [mm]
Traction sheave diameter DT [mm]
Diverter pulley diameter DU [mm]
Distance ceiling opening
SAM (2:1) 750 1400 [mm]
SAM (1:1) 600 1400 [mm]
Distance ceiling opening min 200x200 [mm]
Distance GG to wall min 130 [mm]
*car weight with doors and car sling

5.2 ModKit MO61
Enquiry/Order
Modernisationset ModKit MO61 consisting of:
__________________________________________________________________________
PMC145-2 M / 145-2L, incl. connection line (according to calculation)
Frequency inverter: MFC 21-xx MFC 31-xx MFR
Machine base frame ModKit MO61, Machine base frame isolation
2 pc rope pulley with rope pulley addition (car + cw)Rope guard
Suspension rope 6 mm, Rope attachment
Brake control 2 (with MFC 31-xx integrated)
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
Options:
Governor GBTK 6023 / D300, with console and final limit switch OFF
Governor tensioning pulley
Overspeed governor rope length [mm] ____________
Notes:

1.2 Car Slings TCS
Enquiry/Order
Customer Enquiry To
Order _____________________________
Contact person
Phone +49 (7158) 12-2929
Fax +49 (7158) 12-2971
Date
Type of car sling TCS 25 TCS 40 TCS 60 Rated load [kg] ___________
DGB Distance between guide rails [mm] __________ Suspension 1:1 2:1
Number of buffers ________ Without buffer plate
Documentation German English Russian
Rated speed [m/s] ___________
Guide type Sliding Short Long High load
Roller 100 180 300 mm
Guide rail surface Drawn Processed
Oiled Dry
Guide rail head [mm] 9 16 19 Others ________
(rubbing suface width mind 28 mm)
Rope diameter [mm] 8 10 13 16 Others___
Location of speed governor rope Left behind Right behind
Left front Right front
Distance guide railgovernor rope [mm] 150 200 250 350 400
Protection class of car IP20 IP54
Travelling cable mounting None At side At front
Car weight without car sling [kg] ________________
Total safety mass [kg] ________________
Braking system (upward direction) Yes No acc. to EN 81
Car isolation Yes No

1.2 Car Slings TCS
Enquiry/Order
Floor material thickness [mm] ___________

Height [mm] ___________ (Distance between fixing points)
Width [mm] ___________ (DGB -110/DGB -50 if TCS 25)
Number of rope pulleys 1 2 None
Rope pulley axle diameter [mm] 360 450 540
Rope pulley distance at car sling [mm] ___________
Bearing type of rope pulley Standard High load
Rope pulley isolation at car sling Yes No Compensation chain Yes No
Type of compensation chain WF100 WF150 WF200 WF250
WF300 WF350 WF400
Notes:

1.3 Counterweights GTK
Enquiry/Order
Customer Enquiry Order ________________ To

Contact person
Phone +49 (7158) 12-2929
Fax +49 (7158) 12-2971
Date
Distance between guide rails [mm] 700 1050 1370 ___________

Counterweight frame width [mm] 135 200 270
Suspension 1:1 2:1
Rated speed [m/s] ___________ Max 2.5 m/s
Oiled Dry
Guide rail head [mm] 5* 9 16 Others
Roller 60
Counterweight mass [kg] ___________
Rope diameter [mm] 8 10 13 16 _________
Number of buffers for counterweight ___________ Without buffer plate
Documentation German English
Counterweight safety gear Yes No acc. to EN 81
CW rope pulley diameter [mm] 360 450 540
Compensation chain Yes No
Compensation chain type WF100 WF150 WF200 WF250
WF300 WF350 WF400
Panelling of counterweight frame Yes No
CW-panelling acc. to EN 81-1 Yes No
Counterweight fillers Steel Gussolith Without fillers
Notes:
*No safety gears possible.
Issue: 08/2008
1.4 Safety Gears
Enquiry/Order

Contact person
Phone +49 (7158) 12-2929
Fax +49 (7158) 12-2971
Date
Safety gear operation In downward direction (freefall) and/or

In upward direction acc. to EN 81
Oiled Dry
Operating speed [m/s] ___________
Car weight, incl. car sling [kg] ___________
Rated load [kg] ___________
Counterweight [kg]
(only required for braking upwards) ___________
Rope weight [kg]
(only required for braking upwards) ___________
Compensation chain [kg] ___________
Travelling cable [kg] ___________
Guide rail head [mm] 9 10 13 14 16
19 28,6 35 Others ___________
Type of progressive safety gear
(e.g. type RL 111) ___________
Type of braking system
(e.g. type RL 011) ___________
Elevator standard EN 81 TRA
French Russian
Notes:
Issue: 11/2009
1.5 Overspeed
Governors (300 mm)
Enquiry/Order
Customer Enquiry To
Order _____________________________
Contact person
Phone +49 (7158) 12-2929
Fax +49 (7158) 12-2971
Date
Use of governors Car Counterweight

Governor type standard Standard (G)
Remote tripping Rocker blockable with power supply (M)
Rocker blockable without power supply (O) ), EN81-A3 conform
Blocking device Wheel blockable without power supply, acting right (R)
Wheel blockable without power supply, acting left (L)
Governor pulley type 300 mm (1) 300 mm with test groove (2)
300 mm with test groove, 1 mounted initiator (3)
250 mm with test groove (4)
300 mm with test groove, 2 mounted initiators (5)
212 mm at 300 mm wheel without 300 groove (6)
Governor switch type Non-locking, for vN 1.0 m/s (1)
Non-locking, EX protected, for vN 1.0 m/s (2)
Locking and non-locking, manual reset (3)
Locking and non-locking electrical reset, 24 V (4)
Locking, manual reset (5)
Locking, electrical reset, 24 V (6)
Governor mounting type Without console (U)
With console (K)
With console and final limit switch (N)
On console at guide rail
Governor impulse generator With mounted impulse generator, vN1.6m/s (I)
Without impulse generator
Tripping speed [m/s] For car ______________________ Max 2.5 m/s
For counterweight _____________ Max 2.5 m/s
Documentation German English French Russian
Notes:

1.5 Overspeed
Governors (200 mm)
Enquiry/Order
Customer Enquiry To
Order _____________________________
Contact person
Phone +49 (7158) 12-2929
Fax +49 (7158) 12-2971
Date
Application Overspeed Governor Car

OG version standard standard version (G)
remote tripping rocker blockable with voltage, 24 V (M)
slump protection rocker blockable without voltage, 12 V (O)
OG switch versionst switch non-locking type with 2 contacts, automatic reset via spring power
vN 1,0 m/s, without additional locking type switch (3) usable (1)
switch locking type with 1 contact, with electrical reset, 24 V (3)
switch locking type with 1 contact (3) and switch non-locking type with 2
contacts (1) (4)
OG mounting without console, mounting directly with the flooring (U)
console for mounting on guide rail (MRL)
Sensors, 36 pulses/revolution 1 Initiator (detection of movement) (1I)
2 Initiators (detection of movement and travel direction)
(2I)
Accessories reinforcement of housing for rope forces from 1800 N to 4000 N (V)
tension pulley, operating of the safety gears in download direction
tension pulley, operating of the safety gears in down- and upward direction
Rated speed [m/s] ___________ Max 1,6 m/s
Tripping speed [m/s] for car ______________________ Max 3,0 m/s
for counterweight ______________ Max 3,0 m/s
Documentation German English French Russian
Notes:

1.5 Rope Tensioning
Pulleys
Enquiry/Order
Customer Enquiry To
Order _____________________________
Contact person
Phone +49 (7158) 12-2929
Fax +49 (7158) 12-2971
Date
car counterweight
Travel height [m] ___________
Car guide rail type T 70-1/A (k=9mm) T 90/B (k=16mm)
T 125/B (k=16mm) T 127-2/B (k=16mm)
T 140-1/B (k=19mm) T 140-2/B (k=28,6mm)
___________
Car braking system Yes No
Distance guide rail - governor rope [mm] 150* 200 250
Optional 300 350 400
Notes:
*Only for T70-1/A rail.


1.6 Rubber- and
Oil Buffers
Enquiry/Order

Contact person
Phone +49 (7158) 12-2929
Fax +49 (7158) 12-2971
Date
Buffer type Rubber buffer (vN1m/s)

Oil buffer
Retardation monitoring device Yes No
Rated speed [m/s]
___________
Total load, incl. travelling cable, rope weight, compensation chain [kg]
(capacity + car complete) ___________ each buffer
Counterweight mass ___________ kg
Oil buffer with reduced stroke (SA 1) Yes No
Place of installation MRL Machine room
Buffer support Yes No
French Russian
Notes:
Issue: 02/2009
1.7 Roller-, Sliding Guides
and Lubricators
Enquiry/Order

Contact person
Phone +49 (7158) 12-2929
Fax +49 (7158) 12-2971
Date

Roller 60 100 180 300 mm
Lubricator Yes No
Application for Car Counterweight
Rated speed [m/s]
___________
Guide rail head [mm] 5 9 16
19 28.6
Notes:
Issue: 08/2008
1.8 Ropes/
Rope Attachments
Enquiry/Order

Contact person
Phone +49 (7158) 12-2929
Fax +49 (7158) 12-2971
Date
Elevator rope Warrington 8x19 Drako 250 T PAWO

Drako 300 T
__________
Rope length [m] ___________
Number of ropes ___________
Oil for rope maintenance Yes No
Rope cleaner Yes No
Number of rope attachments
for the car ___________
Number of rope attachments
for the counterweight ___________
Onesided integrated rope attach-
ment and mounting parts1 Yes No
1) only at PAWO ropes
Governor rope Warrington 6x19
Rope diameter [mm] 6,5 8

Rope length [m] ___________
Notes:
Issue: 08/2008
1.9 Rope Pulleys
Axles, Axle Brackets
Enquiry/Order

Contact person
Phone +49 (7158) 12-2929
Fax +49 (7158) 12-2971
Date
Material of rope pulley Cast steel Polyamide*

Rope pulley diameter [mm] 360 400 450
540 640 740
Rope diameter [mm] 8 10 13
16 18 ___________
Number of grooves of rope pulley
___________
Groove distance RA [mm]
___________
Bearing type of rope pulley Standard High load
Axle for Rope pulley Yes No
Axle bracket Yes No
Rope pulley load [kN] ___________
Rope speed [m/s] ___________
Notes:
*Possible for diameter 360 mm, 7x8, RA 14 and 450 mm, 7x10, RA 18.
Issue: 08/2008
5._ LEA MRL Systems

Enquiry/Order
___ LEA
___ LEA -flex ___ LEA -comfort

Customer Enquiry To
Order ____________________________
Contact person
Phone +49 (7158) 12-2929
Fax +49 (7158) 12-2971
Date
Lift data:
Project name
Rated load Q [kg] ________ Rated speed vN [m/s] ______ Mass of car* [kg] ________
Pit [mm] ________ Headroom [mm] _________ Travel height FH [m] _____
Shaft depth ST [mm] ______ Shaft width SB [mm] _______ Gauge between rails
FK [mm] _____________
Cabin width KB [mm] _____ Cabin depth KT [mm] _______ Gauge between rails
GG [mm] _____________
Cabin height KH [mm] _____ Clear cabin height GG-Compensation
(Cabin without cladding) KH [mm] _______ x [%] _____________
Door width TB [mm] ________ Door height TH [mm] _______ __ Entrances/open through
Car floor thickness [mm] ____ Fixing span [mm] ________
Mounting in shaft of anchor Anchor rail Dowels
Flat pit Flat head
New installation / Replacement or modernisation
* Weight of car with doors withoutch frame
Component set contains:

Gearless (PMC / DAF) Inverter MFC Inverter MFR
Machine frame Car sling Car
Counterweight / fillers Overspeed governor Buffers
Suspension ropes Governor rope Rope attachment
Shaft bow Rails Doors
Options:
Sliding guide Roller guide Compensation chain
Well lighting Pit ladder Car
Notice and statements to car equipment and special requests:

____________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________
Issue: 03/2015
5. LEA Cargo
Enquiry/Order
Customer Enquiry To
Order ____________________________
Contact person
Phone +49 (7158) 12-2929
Fax +49 (7158) 12-2971
Date
Lift Data:
Project name
Rated Load Q [kg] ________ Operating speed vN [m/s] ____ Mass of car* [kg] ______
Pit [mm] ________ Headroom [mm] _________ Travel height TH [m] _____
Shaft depth SD [mm] ______ Shaft width SW [mm] _____ Gauge between rails
[mm] _________________
Car width CW [mm] _____ Car depth CP [mm] _______ Gauge between rails
CW [mm] ______________
Car heigth CH [mm] _____ Clear cabin height [mm]______ CW-compensation x [%]
(cabin without cladding) _____________________
Door width CW [mm] _______ Door height DH [mm]_________ ___ Access/Dual entrance
Car floor height [mm] __ Distance between fastening
[mm]__________________
Mounting in shaft of anchor Rails Dowels
Number of Landing ___________
New Installation / replacement or modernisation
**Car weight with doors but without car sling
Component Set Contains:

Gear Geraless Inverter MFC
Machine base frame Car sling Car
Counterweight / Filler Governor Buffer
Suspension rope Governor rope Rope attachment
Shaft bow Rails Doors
Option:
Guide rails Roller guides Compensation chain
Shaft lighting Pit ladder Car
Notes:
____________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________
Issue: 03/2015
5.10 LEMoS
Enquiry/Order
Customer Enquiry To
Order ____________________________
Contact person
Phone +49 (7158) 12-2929
Fax +49 (7158) 12-2971
Date
Plant date for the modernisation:
Project name: _______________________ Factory no.:____________________________

Year: ______________________________ Manufacturer: __________________________
Rated load Q [kg] __________ Rated speed vN [m/s] _______ Mass of car* [kg] ________
Shaft pit [mm] _____________ Headroom [mm] __________ Travel height TH [m] _____
Shaft depth SD [mm] _______ Shaft width SW [mm] _______ Gauge between
rails car [mm] ___________
Car width [mm] ____________ Car depth [mm]____________ Gauge between rails CW
[mm] __________________
Car height (raw car) [mm] _____ Clear car height [mm] _______ Counterweight [kg]_______
Door widht DW [mm] _________ Door heigt DH [mm] ________
Dual entrance yes no Entrance 1 ______ doors Entrance 2 ________ doors
Rail specification at partial replacement
Guide rail Guide blade ______ mm Treads ___________ mm
Version Drawn machined
Sliding guide Pulley guide
Car floor thickness [mm] _________________________ Distance between fastening
[mm]__________________
Fastening in well: Anchor rail type ________ Dowel
Partial replacement (without CW, rails, adjustable bracket)
Full replacement (without control, operating- and indicator elements)
*Weight of car with integrated car sling and doors
07-2014
Page 1 of 6
5.10 LEMoS
Enquiry/Order
LEMoS consisting of:

Drive: Gear Gearless
Inverter: MFR (with regeneration) MFC
Machine base frame Machine base isolation Car LEMoS
Counter weight Buffer Rope attachment
Overspeed governor Diameter [mm] 200 300
Position governor Back left Back right
Front left Front right
Note: Construction drawing with tested dimensions alternatively to the individual measure
Options:
Pulley guides Governor rope Compensation chain

Suspension rope Buffer support with buffer
Adjustable bracket Counterweight filler
Car guide rail Counterweight guide rail
Pit ladder
Door typ:
ThyssenKrupp S8A/K8A M2T, right left

M2Z, center-opening
M4ZT, center-opening
Wittur Fineline 4S (4-panel, telescopic center-opening)
4/AS-L (4-panel, center-opening)
4/AS-R (4-panel, center-opening)
Sematic C-MOD 2L (2-panel, side left opening)
2R (2-panel, side right opening)
4Z (4-panel, telescopic center-opening)
Other door type _________________________________________________
Door version Color RAL _______________
Stainless steel grain 220
Stainless steel leather Stainless steel linen
special ___________________________________________
07-2014
Page 2 of 6
5.10 LEMoS
Enquiry/Order
Elevator Car Design (see brochures page 20):
Walls: Galvanised steel

Traffic white RAL 9016/powder coating
Powder coating RAL ___________________
Stainless steel grain 220 Stainless steel leather Stainless steel linen
Ceiling and lighting : Spot LED Slim LED (single lamp)

Traffic white RAL 9016
Powder coating
Stainless steel 220
without lighting Traffic white RAL 9016
Powder coating
Mirror: Half mirror Full height mirror
Flooring: Black Stone/rubber Kayar Black/ rubber

Kayar Grey/rubber Ice/ rubber
Dove Grey/vinyl Dark Brushed Oak/PVC
Prepared for flooring material of up to 25 mm
Handrails: one side two sides three sides

Stainless steel 220, 40 mm, version straight
Stainless steel 220, 40 mm, bowed version
Stainless steel 220, 40 mm, bowed version,surrounding
Skirt guards: Aluminium, 30 mm

Stainless steel grain 220, 50 mm
Notes:
____________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________
07-2014
Page 3 of 6
5.10 LEMoS
Enquiry/Order
Shaft situation:
LEMoS: Position counterweight (GW) behind

Following components will remain: car rails, CW-rails, counterweight
Position counterweight (GW) side, without dual entrance

As an alternative to the measurements can also be a manhole floor plan will be made
available.
Dimension shaft front to car rail A=

Dimension from car guide blade to CW rail level B=
Centre CW rail to rear wall C=
Car guide blade to left side wall D1=
Car guide blade to right side wall D2=
CW guide blade to left side wall F1=
CW guide blade to right side wall F2=
Dimension from CW guide blade to car rail level G=
Dimension for collision check CW car door J1=
Dimension for collision check CW car door L1=
Gauge between rails for car FKSTM=
Gauge between rails for counterweight GGTSTM=
CW depth GGT=
Counterweight rear Without bracket support Without bracket support With bracket support
CW rear left CW front left CW left
CW rear right* CW front right* CW right*
*Counterweight (CW) right symmetrical (mirror image)
07-2014
Page 4 of 6
5.10 LEMoS
Enquiry/Order
LEMoS: Position Counterweight (CW) side, with dual entrance

As an alternative to the measurements can also be a manhole floor plan will be made
available.
Dimension shaft front to car rail A=

Dimension from car guide blade to CW rail level B=
Centre CW rail to rear wall C=
Car guide blade to left side wall D1=
Car guide blade to right side wall D2=
Dimension from CW guide blade to car rail level G=
Dimension for collision check CW car door J1=
Dimension for collision check CW car door L1=
Dimension for collision check CW car door _DE J3=
Dimension for collision check CW car door _DE L2_DL=
Gauge between rails for car FKSTM=
Gauge between rails for counterweight GGTSTM=
CW depth GGT=
Without bracket support Without bracket support With bracket support

CW rear left CW front left CW left
CW rear right* CW front right* CW right*
*Counterweight (CW) right symmetrical (mirror image)
07-2014
Page 5 of 6
5.10 LEMoS
Enquiry/Order
Access:
Clearance of door recess ROL = __________________________________

Clearance height of door recess Height ROL = ______________________________
X1 = ____________________________________
X2 = ____________________________________
Depth of niche NT = ____________________________________
Height of niche Height niche = ____________________________
without niche/ without niche/

without shaft front wall Existing door clearance
with niche with niche

without shaft front wall Existing door clearance
without niche
TB = _________________________
Existing hinged door frame
TH = _________________________
Y1 = _________________________
Y2 = _________________________
DTB* = _______________________
Existing hinged *(Width of hinged door frame)
door frame
TB (hinged door frame)
07-2014
Page 6 of 6

01 LiftEquip General-Catalogue en

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Título original

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

01 LiftEquip General-Catalogue en

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Components and Systems

Best Quality - Made in Germany

More than you expect ...

Home Lift LEA - Home 209

Standards and guidelines 290

The TEAM of LiftEquip 294

We are aware from our day-to-day work how much safety is

I greatly appreciate your interest and now wish you success in

We look forward to working with you.

North America Europe

Gears Gearless Control system

Solutions for modernisation

Safety gear frames and safety technology

Overall system in focus

Alongside the people and their know-how, the technology in production

Production at the elevator specialist

Attractive price-performance ratio

Perfection all the way to delivery

You order from us and want the products immediately?

How do we manage that?

What awaits you at the construction site?

For such a sophisticated and long-term investment as

Consulting and telephone hotline

Proximity to our customers

Trade fairs and visiting you

We have produced enquiry forms for all of our

Page 1 of 2 Issue: 12/2014

As a result, it is also very easy to calculate different lift configurations

Below there is a short overview of the LEKalk tool options:

LEKalk suggests possible mo-

After selecting the motor and

LEKalk shows possible suitable

LEKalk calculates the traction

You can add even more compo-

The design is for submission

Always online, always up-to-date

LiftEquip newsletter Modernisation lift car LEMoS

Machine base frame ModKit MO61 S

Extremely flexible and economic!

LiftEquip - Customer and Training Centre

Customer and Training Centre

Please contact us if you are interested in one of the courses.

Technical Report - From components to home lifts

The legendary gear systems

Uniform colour assignment for

78 LIFT-REPORT 39. Jahrg. (2013) Heft 6

generations of converters in black

housings are configured to conform

80 LIFT-REPORT 39. Jahrg. (2013) Heft 6

Technical Report - From components to home lifts

82 LIFT-REPORT 39. Jahrg. (2013) Heft 6

TW- and W-Series

Colouring for all Drives 84

TW- and W-Series EN81-

All gear drives are designed with Machine base frame

TW- and W-Series

Horizontal/vertical version Horizontal/vertical version Horizontal/vertical version

TW160 up to 4000 kg* W263C up to 5000 kg* W332C up to 6000 kg*

Horizontal version Horizontal version Horizontal version

*Representation of the drives: horizontal right, 2:1 suspension

TW- and W-Series

TW- and W-Series

Q= 5000kg W263C, 50:2, TS 540 W263C 41:2, TS 540 W332C, 46:2,TS640